JP2021058711A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can improve the game amusement.SOLUTION: When the ratio of the number of put-out game balls to the number of shot game balls is defined as a ball put-out ratio, a game machine can execute n types (n is an integer being 2 or greater) of ball entrance assisting modes having the different ball put-out ratios. The game machine can execute at least the game ball reduction mode with the ball put-out ratio being 1 or less and the game ball increase mode with the ball put-out ratio being 1 or greater as one of the n types of ball entrance assisting modes. When the ball put-out ratio in such a case that the i-th (i is an integer between 1 and n) ball entrance assisting mode is executed is defined as Mi, and the ratio at which the i-th ball entrance assisting mode is executed in such a case that the ball entrance assisting mode is executed is defined as Pi, the following relational expression (R1) is satisfied. Σ(Mi×pi)<1 (R1)SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 69

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and directing for the purpose of improving the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-172988

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvement of technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following forms.

を満たすように構成されている
ことを特徴とする遊技機。 [form]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
The entry part where the launched game ball can enter, and
An execution means for executing a ball entry assist mode for assisting the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A payout means for paying out the game ball as a prize ball based on the ball entering the ball entry section.
It is a game machine equipped with
The ratio of the number of paid game balls to the number of fired game balls in a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined interval with a predetermined firing intensity by the firing means is defined as the ball ejection rate. If you do
The execution means
It is possible to execute n types of ball entry assist modes (n is an integer of 2 or more) having different ball exit rates.
As one of the n types of ball entry assist modes, at least a game ball decrease mode in which the ball output rate is less than 1 and a game ball increase mode in which the ball output rate exceeds 1 can be executed. ,
The ball exit rate when the i-th (i is an integer from 1 to n) entry assist mode is executed is defined as Mi.
When the ratio of the i-th ball entry assist mode to the execution of the ball entry assist mode is defined as Pi, the ball entry assist mode is executed.
The following relational expression (R1)

A gaming machine characterized by being configured to meet the requirements.

According to the above form, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine as one Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and the display surface which are variable-displayed in a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of various counters used for a jackpot lottery and the like. It is explanatory drawing explaining the winning / failing table stored in the winning / failing table storage area. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a start opening. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for through. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the game time control process. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a display duration. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric service support. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service opening / closing process. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of a voice light emission control device and a display control device. It is a time chart which shows an example of the déjà vu notice executed by the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the image which is displayed on the symbol display device when the déjà vu notice is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the déjà vu notice processing. It is a flowchart which shows the déjà vu notice occurrence lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the effect corresponding to the déjà vu notice. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the start of fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the command interrupt processing which is executed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing executed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a time chart which shows an example which increases the number of production elements of the same content which are executed multiple times with the passage of time. It is a time chart which shows an example of the déjà vu notice executed by the pachinko machine of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows an example of the déjà vu notice executed by the pachinko machine of the 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the display surface when the déjà vu notice is executed by the pachinko machine in the 3rd Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows an example of the déjà vu notice executed by the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the process executed in the main control device of the pachinko machine and the voice light emission control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows an example of the déjà vu notice executed by the pachinko machine of the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow when the pachinko machine selects the button effect XA as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, and executes the button effect XA twice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the effect mode XA1, XA2 and the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XA. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing when the button effect XA is executed as the effect element for the déjà vu notice. It is a flowchart which shows the flow when a pachinko machine selects a button effect XB as an effect element for déjà vu notice, and executes the button effect XB twice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the effect mode XB1, XB2, XB3 and the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XB. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing when the button effect XB is executed as the effect element for the déjà vu notice. It is a flowchart which shows the flow when the pachinko machine selects the button effect XC as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, and executes the button effect XC twice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the effect mode XC1, XC2 and the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XC. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing when the button effect XC is executed as the effect element for the déjà vu notice. It is a flowchart which shows the flow when the pachinko machine selects the button effect XA as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, and executes the button effect XD twice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the effect selection screen XD1, the effect mode XD2, and the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XD. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing when the button effect XD is executed as the effect element for the déjà vu notice. It is a flowchart which shows the flow when the pachinko machine selects the button effect XE as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, and executes the button effect XE twice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the effect selection screen XE1, the effect mode XE2, and the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XE. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing when the button effect XE is executed as the effect element for the déjà vu notice. It is a flowchart which shows the flow when a pachinko machine selects a button effect XF as an effect element for déjà vu notice, and executes the button effect XF twice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the effect mode XF1, XF2 and the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XF. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing when the button effect XF is executed as the effect element for the déjà vu notice. It is a flowchart which shows the flow when the pachinko machine selects the button effect XG as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, and executes the button effect XA twice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the effect mode XG1, XG2 and the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing when the button effect XG is executed as the effect element for the déjà vu notice. It is a flowchart which shows the flow when a pachinko machine selects a button effect XH as an effect element for déjà vu notice, and executes the button effect XH twice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the effect mode XH1, XH2, XH3 and the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing when the button effect XH is executed as the effect element for the déjà vu notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game board of the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the 2nd start port unit provided in the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the behavior of the 2nd start port unit when the 1st high frequency support mode is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the behavior of the 2nd start port unit when the 2nd high frequency support mode is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table in the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a start port executed by the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode executed by the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service support process executed by the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service opening / closing process executed by the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the 2nd start port unit provided in the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the locus of a game ball at the time of entering the game ball into the 2nd start port unit provided in the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table in the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a start port executed by the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode executed by the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service opening / closing process executed by the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the structure of the 2nd start port unit schematically. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the structure of the 2nd start port unit concretely. It is explanatory drawing which shows the behavior of the 2nd start port unit at the time of winning the type 1 electric service opening in the pachinko machine of the tenth embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the timing when a game ball reaches a through gate and an opening / closing ball entry device, and also shows the control mode of an opening / closing door when the type 1 electric service opening is won. It is explanatory drawing which shows the behavior of the 2nd start port unit at the time of winning the 2nd type electric service opening in the pachinko machine of 10th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the timing when the game ball reaches the through gate and the opening / closing ball entry device, and also shows the control mode of the opening / closing door when the type 2 electric service opening is won. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode executed by the pachinko machine of the tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service support process executed by the pachinko machine of the tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service opening / closing process executed by the pachinko machine of the tenth embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the opening / closing door in the 1st high frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine of 11th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the opening / closing door in the 2nd high frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine of 11th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the opening / closing door in the 3rd high frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine of 11th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the opening / closing door in the low frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine of 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table in the pachinko machine of 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table in the pachinko machine of the twelfth embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the opening / closing door when the fluctuation time of a normal drawing unit is set to 0.95 seconds in the high frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine of thirteenth embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the opening / closing door when the fluctuation time of a normal figure unit is set to 0.25 seconds in the high frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine of thirteenth embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the opening / closing door when the fluctuation time of a normal figure unit is set to 0.05 second in the high frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine of thirteenth embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation time table for the high frequency support mode in the pachinko machine of 13th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the increase / decrease of the game ball which a player has in the high frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine of 13th Embodiment.

Embodiments of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First Embodiment:
A1. Game machine structure:
A2. Electrical configuration of the game machine:
A3. Various processes executed in the main controller:
A4. Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
A5. Déjà vu notice:
A5-1. Summary of déjà vu notice:
A5-2. Control related to déjà vu notice:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Third Embodiment:
D. Fourth Embodiment:
E. Fifth embodiment:
F. Sixth Embodiment:
G. Seventh Embodiment:
H. Eighth embodiment:
I. Ninth embodiment:
J. Tenth embodiment:
K. Eleventh embodiment:
L. 12th Embodiment:
M. 13th Embodiment:
N. Modification example:
O. About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments:

A. First Embodiment:
A1. Game machine structure:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as an embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 that is combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by an outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a voice emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. Illuminations are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect of the effect by lighting or blinking at each game time performed by the pachinko machine 10, when a big hit is won, when a reach occurs, or the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls rented from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launch mechanism included in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores the game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged to the outside from the lower plate 21.

An effect operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral edge portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game effect reflecting the operation.

Further, an operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front. When the player operates the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there is a touch sensor for permitting the drive of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and a rotation of the operation handle 25. A variable resistor that detects the amount of dynamic operation by the change in electrical resistance is provided. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor.

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. Specifically, these mechanical parts are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game and a function of monitoring the power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material.

The second control unit 52 includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice emission control device 90 controls light emitting means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90. The design display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays a design or an image for directing.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to launch a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the launch control device 80 launches a game ball having a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launch mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a slope connected below the tank 54 and gently inclined so that the game balls flow to the downstream side. A predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70 by receiving the supply of game balls from the tank rail 55 having the above, the case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, and the case rail 56. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10 such as the payout device 71 are provided.

Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area GA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area GA. A guide rail 31 for guiding the game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and discharged to the upper part of the game area GA, and then flows down the game area GA. In the game area GA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicular to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area GA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 includes a special drawing unit 37, a normal drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

As shown in the figure, a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

Both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 are opened upward, and the first starting port 33 is arranged vertically side by side so as to be above the second starting port 34. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls. The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a made of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win a prize in the second starting port 34. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can win a prize in the second starting port 34. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 34, four game balls are paid out as prize balls. An out port 43 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 30, and game balls that do not win in various winning ports are discharged from the game area GA through the out opening 43.

The through gate 35 is provided with a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. When the game ball wins the through gate 35, that is, when the game ball passes through the through hole of the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery) with the winning as a trigger. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric service opening is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric service open state in which the electric service is opened in a predetermined mode. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the game area GA after the winning and is second. It is possible to win a prize in the starting port 34. In the present embodiment, even if the game ball wins the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and also includes an opening / closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening / closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize in the large winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (big hit lottery) by the main control device 60, when the big hit is won and the opening / closing execution mode is entered, the opening / closing door 36b repeats the open state in which the game ball can win and the closed state. The opening / closing execution mode shifts to the case where the jackpot is won as a result of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by winning the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and the opening / closing door 36b is in the open state. It is a mode that repeats the closed state. That is, as a result of the big hit lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 33, when the big hit is won, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 can win the big winning opening 36a. Similarly, as a result of the big hit lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 34, even if the big hit is won, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 can win the big winning opening 36a. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first result display unit 37a and a second result display unit 37b. The first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. When a big hit lottery triggered by winning a prize in the first starting port 33 is performed, the first result display unit 37a has a variable display or a variable display as a display mode until the segment display is made to display a display corresponding to the lottery result. Have a predetermined display be performed. When the lottery is completed, the first result display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result. When a big hit lottery triggered by winning a prize in the second starting port 34 is performed, the second result display unit 37b has a variable display or a variable display as a display mode until the segment display is made to display a display corresponding to the lottery result. Have a predetermined display be performed. When the lottery is completed, the second result display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first hold display unit 37c and a second hold display unit 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won a prize in the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of holds of the first start port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won a prize in the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second hold display unit 37d displays the number of holds of the second start port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on.

The normal drawing unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 35 is performed, the normal drawing unit 38 causes a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode to be displayed as the display mode of the light emitting display. When the electric accessory opening lottery is completed, the normal drawing unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result. The special figure unit 37 and the normal figure unit 38 are not limited to being composed of a segment display and a light emitting display by an LED lamp, and are, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display. It may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery during and the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined mode, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open / close execution mode, or displays corresponding to the number of round games. A round game is an opening / closing door until either a predetermined upper limit duration elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins a prize in the variable winning device 36. It is a game in which the open state of 36b is continued. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the open / close execution mode is started, and ends when the open / close execution mode ends and a new game round is started.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area GA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 is composed of a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be composed of various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first result display unit 37a makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the winning of the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. Further, when the second result display unit 37b makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the winning of the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 performs the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. .. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a display effect triggered by winning a prize in the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, but also performs a display effect in the open / close execution mode that shifts when a big hit is won. Hereinafter, the details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol and a display surface 41a that are variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol that is variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 4A, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbols indicating the numbers 1 to 8 in a variable manner. As the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol having a pattern such as a character may be adopted for each of the symbols showing the numbers 1 to 8.

FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram showing a display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown, the display surface 41a displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 4A are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row is periodically arranged from top to bottom or from bottom to bottom. A variable display that scrolls up is performed. As shown in FIG. 4B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L. Specifically, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity is started. Then, each scrolling symbol switches from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol string Z1, the symbol string Z3, and the symbol column Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. .. When the variation display of the symbols is completed and the display is stopped, and the result of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60 is the jackpot winning, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the effective line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the effective line L.

In addition, in this specification, one game round means 1st start opening 33 or 2nd start opening in either 1st result display part 37a or 2nd result display part 37b and the symbol display device 41. The period from the start of the variable display based on any of the 34 prizes to the stop display of the predetermined lottery result and the start of the next variable display. In addition, the time required for one game is also referred to as the display duration. The display duration is the variation display time, which is the time from the start of the variation display until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and the variation of the next game round is started after the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. It is composed of the stop display time, which is the time until the time is reached. The mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol row, and the symbol of each symbol row Various modes can be adopted as the mode of variable display of the symbol such as the number.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, the first reserved display area Ds1 and the second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first hold display area Ds1, the number of holds based on the winning of the first start port 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, the number of holds based on the winning of the second starting port 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have won prizes in the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is four, respectively.

A2. Electrical configuration of the game machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a program recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may have a part of the function which MPU 62 has. Further, details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. Various detection sensors 67a to 67e, a payout control device 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The MPU 62 receives a DC stable 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the required operating power by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, and the like, and supplies each device. Supply power. Further, the MPU 62 is a plurality of detection sensors 67a to 67e provided in various winning openings such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. It is connected to the detection sensor, and it is determined whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area GA during the game has won a prize in each winning opening. Further, the MPU 62 executes a big hit lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, and executes the electric accessory opening lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35.

On the output side of the MPU 62, a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34, and a main display. The unit 45 is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the electric accessory opening is won as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is opened. In each game, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the main display unit 45, and in the open / close execution mode, the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. Display control of.

Further, the payout control device 70 and the voice emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the MPU 62. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a prize is specified for the general prize opening 32, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the prize for the first starting port 33 is specified. In that case, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when a prize is specified for the second starting port 34, one game ball is paid out. The prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60. A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the voice emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And controls the display control device 100. Further, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the voice emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the display duration of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. At the same time, the presence or absence of reach, the content of the reach effect, the content of the advance notice effect executed in each game, and the like are grasped.
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of various counters used for big hit lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a big hit lottery, a display setting of the main display unit 45, a symbol display setting of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery, and the jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result, and the symbol to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is used. The reach random number counter C3 is used for the reach lottery for whether or not to generate the reach when the row is changed, and the random number initial value counter CINI is used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, the variable type counter CS is used when determining the display duration in the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b of the main display unit 45, and the symbol display device 41. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b. The hold information storage area 64b is composed of a first result display unit hold area Ra, a second result display unit hold area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total hold quantity storage area. When the game balls sequentially win the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the winning timing are chronologically stored in the hold information storage area 64b. Stored in.

The details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. Specifically, the updated value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit of the hold information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins in the first start port 33, and is stored in the second start port 33. When the game ball wins in 34, it is stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit of the hold information storage area 64b. The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a winning / failing table in the winning / failing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a. The pachinko machine 10 is set with a low probability mode and a high probability mode as a lottery mode for a jackpot lottery. FIG. 7 (a) shows a pass / fail table for the low probability mode, and FIG. 7 (b) shows a pass / fail table for the high probability mode. As shown in FIG. 7A, the value of the random numbers for winning the jackpot is two under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the jackpot lottery. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7B, under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the jackpot lottery, the value of the random numbers for winning the jackpot is 21. Further, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode. If the winning probability of the high-probability mode is higher than that of the low-probability mode, the number and value of the winning random numbers are arbitrary.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining a jackpot type such as a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 has a configuration in which 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. More specifically, at the timing when the game ball wins in the first start port 33, it is stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit of the hold information storage area 64b (RAM 64), and the game ball wins in the second start port 34. It is stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit of the hold information storage area 64b (RAM 64) at the timing.

Here, the jackpot type in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends (3) The electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening / closing execution mode ends Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (1) opening / closing execution mode, the frequency of winning the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode The high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode can be set so that is relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is until 30 seconds have elapsed or the number of winnings to the opening / closing door 36b is 10. It can be set to continue until the number is reached. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed twice from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of winnings to the opening / closing door 36b. Can be set to continue until there are six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area GA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening / closing door 36b at one time is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening / closing door 36b once is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode in which the low-frequency winning mode is applied, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur. However, it may be set so that the winning of the game ball can occur even in the opening / closing execution mode related to the low frequency winning mode.

The number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the number of opening limits for one opening are determined by winning the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the frequency of occurrence of the above is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening / closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is long, or the number of opening limits for one opening is set to be large. Good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that the variable winning device 36 is not substantially won.

The pachinko machine 10 has, as a mode of the lottery mode of the big hit lottery after the end of the above-mentioned (2) opening / closing execution mode, a probability variation lottery mode in which a big hit lottery is performed using a high probability win / loss table as a win / loss table, and a win / loss table. It is possible to set a normal lottery mode in which a big hit lottery is performed using a winning / failing table for low probability. As explained with reference to FIG. 7, the case where the jackpot lottery is performed using the high-probability winning / failing table is compared with the case where the jackpot lottery is performed using the low-probability winning / failing table, and the jackpot is won. There is a high probability of doing so.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening / closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 continues to launch the game ball in the same manner with respect to the game area GA. The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are used so that the frequency with which the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the above-mentioned situations. Can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening is the same. Compared to the low-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electric combination opening is won may be set more often, and one opening time may be set longer. In addition, when the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times in the high frequency support mode, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is It may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed is set shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. You may.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that a prize is generated in the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first starting port 33 is higher than that of the second starting port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second start is higher than that of the first starting port 33. The probability that a prize will be given to the mouth 34 increases. When a prize is won in the second starting port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. Can be done.

The configuration in which the high-frequency support mode is set to the electric service open state more frequently than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, the electric power in the electric accessory opening lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the winning combination. In addition, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of securing times are prepared for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed, the frequency is low in the high frequency support mode. It may be set so that a shorter reservation time is more easily selected or the average reservation time is shorter than the support mode. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed is shortened (that is,). , Shortening the duration of one display in the normal drawing unit 38), shortening the average time of the secured time, and increasing the winning probability, any one or any combination of conditions shall be applied. Therefore, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be enhanced.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 can be set with a plurality of types of jackpots. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, a plurality of types of jackpots are sorted by using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution destination of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 8A shows a distribution table for the first result display unit, and FIG. 8B shows a distribution table for the second result display unit.

As shown in the distribution table for the first result display unit of FIG. 8A, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first starting port 33 are 8R normal jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, and 8R. Probability change jackpot and 16R probability variation jackpot are set. In the 8R normal jackpot and the 16R normal jackpot, the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the winning / failing lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the low probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end of is the high frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode in the 8R normal jackpot and the 16R normal jackpot shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the transition to the high-frequency support mode.

In the 8R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot, the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the winning / failing lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the high probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end of is the high frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode for the 8R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot will continue until the next jackpot winning.

In the distribution table for the first result display unit, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 5" corresponds to 8R normal jackpot, and "6 to 8" corresponds to 16R normal. It corresponds to the jackpot, "9 to 23" corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot, and "24 to 29" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the mode of jackpot is diversified. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the degree of advantage for the player is that the 16R probability variation jackpot is the highest, the 8R probability variation jackpot is the next highest, then the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different advantages for the player in this way, it is possible to suppress the monotonization of the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

Next, as shown in the distribution table for the second result display unit of FIG. 8B, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types based on the second starting port 34 are 8R normal jackpot and 16R normal jackpot. A jackpot, an 8R probability variation jackpot, and a 16R probability variation jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second result display unit, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 2" corresponds to 8R normal jackpot, and "3 to 8" corresponds to 16R normal. It corresponds to the jackpot, "9 to 14" corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot, and "15 to 29" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won is the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning of the first starting port 33 and the second. It is different from the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning of the starting port 34.

On the other hand, in both the distribution table for the first result display unit and the distribution table for the second result display unit, the probability of being distributed to the probabilistic jackpot is the same when the jackpot is won. That is, in both the distribution table for the first result display unit and the distribution table for the second result display unit, the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 assigned to the 16R probability variation jackpot and the allocation to the 8R probability variation jackpot. The total number of the values of the jackpot type counter C2 is the same, 21 in each case. However, the probability of occurrence of the 16R probability variation jackpot, which has the highest degree of advantage for the player among the probability variation jackpots, is higher when the jackpot is won based on the winning of the second starting port 34. It will be higher than if you win a big hit based on the prize.

As described above, the distribution mode of the jackpot type between the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is provided with a clear difference in the advantage for the player. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting that the second starting port 34 of the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 will be awarded a prize. If the result is lost in the winning / failing lottery, the mode does not shift to the open / close execution mode, and the winning / losing lottery mode and the support mode do not change.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to perform the jackpot type. Further, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop the symbol displayed on the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. To determine. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 238, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. Specifically, the update value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first start port 33, and the game ball is stored in the second start port 34. At the timing of winning, the updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 64. Then, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is moved to the execution area AE, and then the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is moved. It is collated with the reach determination table stored in, and it is determined whether or not to generate reach. However, when the jackpot is won as a result of the jackpot lottery and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that for some of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, some combinations of symbols corresponding to the jackpot may be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It is a display state in which the symbols are displayed and the remaining symbols are displayed in a variable manner in that state. The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 4B, the symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3 to form a reach line. In the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol is varied and displayed in the symbol row Z2 to reach the reach. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, with the reach line formed, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to produce a reach effect. A combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. Further, when the reach effect is performed or whether or not the notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed before the reach display is performed, the reach random number counter C3 or other counters are used to determine. You may.

Next, the details of the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 62 to determine the display duration in the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b and the display duration of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired when the fluctuation pattern is determined at the start of the fluctuation display on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b and at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. When determining the display duration in the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b, the display duration table stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, the details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 249, and after reaching the maximum value, the counter returns to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric service holding area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the value of the stored electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the closed state.

The combination of one set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit corresponds to the hold information related to the first start port 33, and is the first. 2. A combination of a set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the hold area Rb for the result display unit corresponds to the hold information related to the second start port 34, and these hold information. However, it corresponds to the special information in the present invention.

A3. Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in order to advance the game of each game time will be described. The MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal in addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, but description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main control device 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, each of them is used. Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S104.

In step S104, the winning process for the starting port accompanying the winning of the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is executed. The details of the winning process for the starting port in step S104 will be described later. After executing step S104, the process proceeds to step S105.

In step S105, a winning process for through is executed in association with winning the through gate 35. The details of the winning process for the through in step S105 will be described later. After executing step S105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Prize processing for starting port>
Next, the winning process for the starting port will be described. The winning process for the start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9: S104).

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a winning process for the starting port. In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first starting port 33 (starting winning) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33. If it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has won the first starting port 33 (S201: YES), the process proceeds to step S202, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. To set. Then, the process proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 33. Then, the process proceeds to step S204.

In step S204, the start hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold number RaN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, is read, and the first start hold number RaN is read. RaN is set as the target of the process described later. The first start hold number RaN indicates the hold number based on the winning of the first start port 33. Then, the process proceeds to step S209.

If it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the first starting port 33 (S201: NO), the process proceeds to step S205, and has the game ball won the second starting port 34 (starting prize)? Whether or not it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

If it is determined in step S205 that the game ball has won the second starting port 34 (S205: YES), the process proceeds to step S206, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out four game balls. To set. Then, the process proceeds to step S207. On the other hand, in step S205, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the second starting port 34 (S205: NO), the winning process for the main starting port ends.

In step S207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step S208.

In step S208, the start hold number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as the second start hold number RbN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, is read out, and the second start hold number RbN is read. RbN is set as a target for processing described later. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on the winning of the second start port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step S209.

In step S209, it is determined whether or not the start hold number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S204 or step S208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step S209, if the starting hold number N is not less than the upper limit value (S209: NO), the winning process for the main starting port is terminated. On the other hand, in step S209, if the start hold number N is less than the upper limit value (S209: YES), the process proceeds to step S210, and after adding 1 to the start hold number N of the corresponding result display hold area, The process proceeds to step S211 and 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reserved quantity CRN). The total hold quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first start hold quantity RaN and the second start hold quantity RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step S212.

In step S212, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are stored in the first storage area of the corresponding free storage areas for the result display unit holding area, that is, step. In S210, 1 is added and stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved number. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as the processing target, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are set to the first value. 1 It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the result display unit reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN to which 1 is added in step S210. When the second start pending number RbN is set as the processing target, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are displayed as the second result. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the part reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step S210. After executing step S212, the process proceeds to step S213.

In step S213, the process of setting the hold command is executed. Specifically, the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the hold command. After that, the winning process for the main starting port is completed. The hold command is a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device, which are control devices on the sub side, for the fact that a prize has been generated in the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 and the hold information acquired based on the prize. In addition to making 100 recognize, whether the pending information related to this prize corresponds to the jackpot, if it corresponds to the jackpot, what type of jackpot corresponds to, and whether it corresponds to the reach occurrence This is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to confirm whether or not the hold information is before the target of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60. This hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the external output process (FIG. 12: step S402) of the normal process described later, and the voice emission control device 90 that has received the hold command receives the confirmation process (FIG. 27 :) described later. According to step S1602, FIG. 29), whether or not the pending information related to the current prize corresponds to the jackpot, and if it corresponds to the jackpot, which type of jackpot corresponds to, and the reach occurrence. Whether or not the hold information is held is confirmed before the hold information is subject to the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60.

Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the winning of the first start port 33, the number of hold display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 is increased. A command for making a change corresponding to the above is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the winning of the second start port 34 is received, the voice emission control device 90 increases the number of holds the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. A command for making a change corresponding to the above is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds.

The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 wins the prize this time based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the storage area by the prize winning this time. Confirmation process to confirm whether the pending information related to is compatible with the jackpot, if it is compatible with the jackpot, what type of jackpot is supported, whether it is compatible with the reach occurrence, etc. ( The same process as the confirmation process in steps S1602 and 29 in FIG. 27) may be executed, and the confirmed result may be set in the hold command. In this case, the confirmation process by the voice emission control device 90 (FIG. 27: step S1602, FIG. 29) can be omitted.

<Prize processing for through>
Next, the winning process for through will be described. The winning process for through is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9: S105).

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a winning process for thru. In step S301, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 35. If it is determined in step S301 that the game ball has won the through gate 35 (S301: YES), the process proceeds to step S302, and whether or not the number of reserved characters SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Is determined. The number of reserved items SN is a value indicating the number of winnings to the through gate 35 that is reserved for performing the electric accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved items SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S301 that the game ball has not won the through gate 35 (S301: NO), the winning process for this through is terminated.

If it is determined in step S302 that the value is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the number of reserved items SN (S302: YES), the process proceeds to step S303, and 1 is added to the number of reserved items SN. Then, the process proceeds to step S304. On the other hand, in step S302, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is not less than the upper limit value (S302: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is equal to or more than the upper limit value, The winning process for this through is completed without storing the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4.

In step S304, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the electric service holding area 64c of the RAM 64. After that, the winning process for this through is completed.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal process, the main process of the game is executed.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S401, the start-up process is executed. Specifically, the initial setting of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S402.

In step S402, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previously executed normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when commands related to the effect such as fluctuation commands and type commands are set, they are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After executing step S402, the process proceeds to step S403.

In step S403, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variable type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S404.

In step S404, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, a game turn control process for controlling the game in each game turn is executed. In the game times control process, a jackpot lottery, setting of a symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first result display unit 37a, the second result display unit 37b, and the like are performed. The details of the game time control process will be described later. After executing step S405, the process proceeds to step S406.

In step S406, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. The details of the game state transition process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S407.

In step S407, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is in the open state. The details of the processing for electric service support will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S408.

In step S408, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (strictly speaking, the start of the external output process in step S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached. If it is determined in step S408 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal process (S408: NO), in steps S409 and S410 until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached. Within the remaining time of, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S409, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step S410, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S408 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (S408: YES), the process returns to step S402 and each process from step S402 to step S407 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step S402 to step S407 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, the values of these counters can be randomly updated by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process will be described. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 12: S405) of the normal process.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the game time control process. In step S501, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag is stored in the open / close execution mode flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. The open / close execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is deleted when the open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process.

If it is determined in step S501 that the open / close execution mode is in progress (S501: YES), the game round control process ends without executing any of the processes after step S502. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the game round is not started regardless of whether or not a prize has been generated in the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S501 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S501: NO), the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, it is determined whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b is in the variable display. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the variable display flag is stored in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. The variation display flag is stored when the variation display is started for either the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b, and is deleted when the variation display ends.

If it is determined in step S502 that the main display unit 45 is not in the variable display (S502: NO), the process proceeds to the game round start process of steps S503 to S505. In step S503, it is determined whether or not the total number of reserved items CRN is "0". When the total number of reserved items CRN is "0", it means that the number of items on hold for starting is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Therefore, if it is determined in step S503 that the total number of reserved cards CRN is "0" (S503: YES), the game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S503 that the total number of reserved items CRN is not "0" (S503: NO), the process proceeds to step S504.

In step S504, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and in step S505, the data setting process is executed. move on. The details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S505, a fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display on the main display unit 45 and the fluctuation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. After that, the game times control process is terminated. The details of the fluctuation start processing will be described later.

If it is determined in step S502 that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display (S502: YES), the game round progress processing of steps S506 to S509 is executed.

In step S506, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game times has elapsed. As described above, the variation display time is the time from when the symbol sequence starts to fluctuate until all the symbol sequences stop, and is a part of the display duration. Specifically, in step S506, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation display time information stored in the fluctuation display time counter area of the RAM 64 is "0". The value of the variable display time information is set in the display duration setting process (FIG. 15: S714) described later. The value of the set fluctuation display time information is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started.

If it is determined in step S506 that the variation display time has not elapsed (S506: NO), the process proceeds to step S507 to execute the variation display process. The variable display process is a process for changing the display mode in the result display unit related to the current game round. After executing step S507, the game times control process ends.

If it is determined in step S506 that the variation display time has elapsed (S506: YES), the process proceeds to step S508 to execute the variation end processing. The variation end process displays the result display unit so that the mode of the symbol to be displayed on the result display unit determined in the variation start process (S505) described later is displayed on the result display unit related to the current game round. Control. After executing step S508, the process proceeds to step S509.

In step S509, the variable end command is set. The variation end command set in step S509 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The voice emission control device 90 ends the effect in the game round based on the received variable end command. Further, the variation end command is transmitted from the voice emission control device 90 to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 receives the variation end command to confirm and display the final stop symbol in the game round (final stop). Display). After executing step S509, the game times control process ends.

The pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to use the variable end command. In this case, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 measure the elapsed time from the start of the game round with a timer counter or the like, and based on the elapse of a predetermined time, in the game round. The effect may be terminated, or the final stop symbol in the game round may be confirmed and displayed (final stop display).

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 13: S504) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step S601, it is determined whether or not the second start hold quantity RbN stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is “0”. If it is determined in step S601 that the second start pending number RbN is "0" (S601: YES), the data setting process for the first result display unit of steps S602 to S607 is executed, while the data setting process is executed. When it is determined that the second start pending number RbN is not "0" (S601: NO), the data setting process for the second result display unit of steps S608 to S613 is executed.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the total number of reserved pieces CRN is 1 or more as described with reference to FIG. 13 (see FIG. 13: S503). In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start hold quantity RbN is "0", and if it is not "0", that is, the hold information for variable display is stored in the second result display unit 37b. If this is the case, the data stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is targeted for this data setting process regardless of whether or not the first start hold quantity RaN is 1 or more. As a result, when the hold information is stored in both the hold area Ra for the first result display unit and the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, it is for the second result display unit corresponding to the second start port 34. The hold information stored in the hold area Rb has priority.

In step S602, after subtracting 1 from the first start hold number RaN of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, the process proceeds to step S603 and the total hold number CRN is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S604. In step S604, the data stored in the first area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step S605.

In step S605, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step S605, the process proceeds to step S606.

In step S606, when the second result display unit flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 64e, the flag is deleted, and when it is not stored, the state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is information for identifying whether the target for starting the variation display this time is the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b. Then, the process proceeds to step S607.

In step S607, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, that is, the first start port 33. A shift command including information indicating that the above is supported is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S607 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The voice emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command. To do. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

If it is determined in step S601 that the second start pending number RbN is not "0" (S601: NO), the data setting process for the second result display unit of steps S608 to S613 is executed as described above. To do.

In step S608, the second start hold number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S609. In step S609, the total number of reserved CRNs is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S610, and the data stored in the first area of the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

In step S611, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second result display unit holding area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step S611, the process proceeds to step S612.

In step S612, if the second result display unit flag is not stored in the second result display unit flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 64e, the flag is stored, and if it is stored, the flag is stored. Maintain the state. Then, the process proceeds to step S613.

In step S613, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, that is, the second start port 34 A shift command including information indicating that the above is supported is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S613 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The voice emission control device 90 gives a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command. Send. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described. The variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 13: S505) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. In step S701, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high-probability mode flag is stored in the high-probability mode flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode. After that, if you win the normal jackpot, it will be deleted.

If it is determined in step S701 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the high probability mode (S701: NO), the process proceeds to step S702, and the winning / failing determination is made with reference to the winning / failing table for the low probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 7A. Is determined. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that the mode is in the high probability mode (S701: YES), the process proceeds to step S703, and the pass / fail determination is made with reference to the pass / fail table for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 7 (b). Is determined. After executing step S702 or step S703, the process proceeds to step S704.

In step S704, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination (big hit lottery) in step S702 or step S703 is a big hit winning. In step S704, when the result of the winning / failing determination is a big hit (S704: YES), in steps S705 to S712, in order to set the process for setting the game result in the case of the big hit winning and the stop result. Executes the processing of.

In step S705, it is determined whether or not the second result display unit flag is stored in the RAM 64. If it is determined in step S705 that the second result display unit flag is not stored (S705: NO), the process proceeds to step S706, and the distribution table for the first result display unit (see FIG. 8A). The distribution is determined with reference to. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variation jackpot, and the numerical range of the 16R probability variation jackpot. Determine if it is included in.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S705 that the second result display unit flag is stored (S705: YES), the process proceeds to step S707, and the distribution table for the second result display unit (FIG. 8B). Refer to) to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variation jackpot, and the numerical range of the 16R probability variation jackpot. Determine if it is included in. After executing the process of step S706 or step S707. The process proceeds to step S708.

In step S708, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot distributed in step S706 or step S707 is a probabilistic jackpot. If it is determined in step S708 that the game result is a probabilistic jackpot (S708: YES), the process proceeds to step S709.

In step S709, the stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the probabilistic jackpot varies depending on which stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the current game round in which the probabilistic jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variation jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step S706 or step S707 can be obtained. It is acquired and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S709, the process proceeds to step S710.

In step S710, the flags corresponding to the jackpot types assigned in step S706 or step S707 (big hit type flags) are stored in the corresponding areas in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. Specifically, the 8R probability variation flag is stored in the case of an 8R probability variation jackpot, and the 15R probability variation flag is stored in the case of a 15R probability variation jackpot. Then, the process proceeds to step S714.

In step S708, when it is determined that the type of jackpot distributed in step S706 or step S707 is not a probabilistic jackpot (S708: NO), that is, when the type of jackpot distributed is a normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step S711.

In step S711, a stop result setting process for a normal jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the normal jackpot varies depending on which stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the current game round in which the normal jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step S706 or step S707 can be obtained. It is acquired and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S711, the process proceeds to step S712.

In step S712, the flags corresponding to the jackpot types assigned in step S706 or step S707 (big hit type flags) are stored in the corresponding areas in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. Specifically, the 8R normal flag is stored in the case of an 8R normal jackpot, and the 15R normal flag is stored in the case of a 15R normal jackpot. Then, the process proceeds to step S714.

In step S704, if the result of the big hit lottery in step S702 or step S703 is not a big hit (S704: NO), the process proceeds to step S713, and the stop result setting process for the time of loss is executed. The stop result setting process for the time of disengagement is to end the variation display in the state where either the stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the current game time which is the disengagement result. This is a process for setting. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for when the stop result table is stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S713, the process proceeds to step S714.

In step S714, the display duration setting process is executed. The display duration setting process sets the display duration, which is the time required for the current game round in the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b, based on the presence / absence of a big hit and the presence / absence of a reach. It is a process to do. The details of the display duration setting process will be described later. After executing step S714, the process proceeds to step S715.

In step S715, it is determined whether or not the second result display unit flag is stored in the RAM 64. If it is determined in step S715 that the second result display unit flag is not stored in the RAM 64 (S715: NO), the process proceeds to step S716 to set the first variation command. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning of the first start port 33, and whether or not reach has occurred. Information and information on the display duration set in step S714 are included. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S715 that the second result display unit flag is stored (S715: YES), the process proceeds to step S717 to set the second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34, and whether or not a reach has occurred. Information and information on the display duration set in step S714 are included. After executing step S716 or step S717, the process proceeds to step S718.

In step S718, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence / absence of a jackpot and the result of the distribution determination. That is, the type command includes 8R probability variation jackpot information, 16R probability variation jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, or loss result information as the jackpot type information.

The variation command and the type command set in steps S716 to S718 are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step S718, the process proceeds to step S719.

In step S719, of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b, the result display unit corresponding to the current game times is started to display the variation of the symbol. Specifically, when the second result display unit flag is not stored in the RAM 64, it is specified that the result display unit corresponding to the current game times is the first result display unit 37a, and the variable display is started. , When the second result display unit flag is stored, it is specified that the result display unit corresponding to the current game times is the second result display unit 37b, and the variable display is started. After executing step S719, this fluctuation start process ends.

<Display duration setting process>
Next, the display duration setting process will be described. The display duration setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 15: S714) of the variation start process.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a display duration setting process. In step S801, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired and stored in the register of the MPU 62. Then, the process proceeds to step S802.

In step S802, it is determined whether or not reach occurs in this game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 64, and if any of the flags is stored, it is determined that reach occurs (S802: YES). ), Proceed to step S803. Even if none of the above flags are stored, reach occurs when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach. Then, it is determined (S802: YES), and the process proceeds to step S803. When specifying whether or not reach has occurred using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In step S803, the display duration information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation display duration table stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After that, the process proceeds to step S804, and the variable display time information included in the display duration information is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the display duration setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S802 that reach does not occur in the current game round (S802: NO), the process proceeds to step S805, and the display duration table for non-reach stored in the display duration table storage area 63d is displayed. The display duration corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time is acquired with reference to. After that, the process proceeds to step S806, and the variable display time information included in the display duration information is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the display duration setting process ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display duration information stored in the reach non-generation display duration table is set so that the display duration becomes shorter as the total number of reserved CRNs increases. There is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration that does not depend on the total number of reserved quantity CRNs may be used, and the display duration may be set to be shorter as the total number of reserved quantity CRNs is smaller. .. When the second start hold number RbN is "0", the display duration becomes shorter as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases, and when the second start hold number RbN is "1" or more. May be set so that the display duration becomes shorter as the number of the second start pending number RbN increases. When the second start hold number RbN is "0", the display duration becomes longer as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases, and when the second start hold number RbN is "1" or more. The display duration may be longer as the number of the second start reserved numbers RbN increases, or may be set to be constant without depending on the respective reserved numbers RaN and RbN.

Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach is not selected so that the shorter display duration is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. A display duration table for occurrence may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected display duration may be the same, and the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the display duration when a reach occurs, and the display duration that is easy to be selected and the display duration that is difficult to be selected are different between when the jackpot is won and when the reach is lost. It may be configured. Further, the display duration table for the probabilistic jackpot, the display duration table for the normal jackpot, the display duration table for the missed reach, and the display duration table for the complete miss may be set individually. As described above, the display duration of each game is determined by using the presence / absence of a big hit, the presence / absence of a reach, the number of pending information, and the value of the fluctuation type counter as parameters.

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 12: S406) of the normal process.

FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram showing a game state transition process. In step S901, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined in step S901 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S901: NO), the process proceeds to step S902, and the variation display of the symbol on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b of one game is displayed. It is determined whether or not it is the end timing. If it is determined in step S902 that the timing is not the end of the variation display (S902; NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S902 that the variation display has ended (S902: YES), the process proceeds to step S903, and the game result (big hit lottery result) of this game time shifts to the open / close execution mode. Determine if it corresponds. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 8R probability variation flag, the 16R probability variation flag, the 8R normal flag, and the 16R normal flag is stored in the RAM 64. If it is determined that none of the above flags is stored (S903: NO), the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S903 that any of the above flags is stored (S903: YES), the process proceeds to step S904, and the round display start process for notifying the type of the opening / closing execution mode this time is performed. Execute. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the above address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is specified from the specified stop result data. Confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round display unit 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step S904, the process proceeds to step S905.

In step S905, the number of rounds of the opening / closing execution mode this time is determined. Specifically, the jackpot type flags (16R probability variation flag, 16R normal flag, 8R probability variation flag, 8R normal flag) stored in the RAM 64 are confirmed. If it is determined in step S905 that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is a 16R probability variation flag or a 16R normal flag (S905: YES), the process proceeds to step S906 and is provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Set "16" in the first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S905 that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is an 8R probability variation flag or an 8R normal flag (S905: NO), the process proceeds to step S907 and is provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. "8" is set in the first round counter area RC1. After executing step S906 or step S907, the process proceeds to step S908.

In step S908, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 12). This opening command contains information on the number of rounds in this open / close execution mode. The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step S908, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S901 that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress (S901: YES), the process proceeds to step S909 to execute the large winning opening opening / closing process. Specifically, when the large winning opening 36a is closed, the variable winning driving unit 36c is set to the driving state on condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more, and the large winning prize is won. The mouth 36a is opened. Further, when the large winning opening 36a is open, the variable winning driving unit is provided on the condition that the opening limit time has elapsed from the opening of the large winning opening 36a or the opening limit number has been won. The driving state of 36c is stopped, and the large winning opening 36a is closed. The details of the opening and closing process of the big winning opening will be described later. After executing step S909, the process proceeds to step S910.

In step S910, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S910: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S910: YES), the process proceeds to step S911, and the ending command is set. This set ending command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The voice emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on receiving the ending command. After executing step S911, the process proceeds to step S912.

In step S912, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed. The transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is a process for setting various modes of the game after the end of the current open / close execution mode. The details of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described later. After executing step S912, the process proceeds to step S913.

In step S913, the round display end process is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is terminated so that the round display unit 39 of the main display unit 45 is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step S914 to execute the end processing of the open / close execution mode. Specifically, if the 16R probability variation flag, the 8R probability variation flag, the 16 normal flag, and the 8R normal flag are stored, these flags are deleted, and if these flags are not stored, the state is maintained. To do. After executing step S914, the game state transition process is terminated.

<Opening and closing of the winning opening>
Next, the opening / closing process of the large winning opening will be described. The winning opening opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 17: S909) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening / closing process. In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning driving unit 36c. If it is determined in step S1001 that the large winning opening 36a is not open (S1001: NO), the process proceeds to step S1002, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined in step S1002 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S1002: YES), the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1002 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1002: NO), the process proceeds to step S1003.

In step S1003, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the large winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1003 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S1003: NO), the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1003 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S1003: YES), the process proceeds to step S1004, and the variable winning drive unit is used to open the large winning opening 36a. The 36c is in the driving state. Then, the process proceeds to step S1005.

In step S1005, the setting process for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, since all the set winning modes are high-frequency winning modes, "15000" (that is, 30 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Further, in order to count the number of winnings of the game ball to the large winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. If the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low-frequency winning mode, for example, "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1 and "6" is set in the winning counter area PC. May be set. After executing step S1005, the process proceeds to step S1006.

In step S1006, a release command is set. After that, the opening / closing process of the winning opening is completed. The release command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are the control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the opening of the large winning opening 36a has started, and is a command of normal processing. It is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by the external output process (FIG. 12: step S402). The voice emission control device 90 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has started based on the received opening command, and also displays the production contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 on the large winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the start of opening. Further, the voice emission control device 90 transmits the release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has started based on the received opening command, and at the same time, the opening of the large winning opening 36a indicates the effect content of the symbol display device 41. Update to the content corresponding to what was started.

If it is determined in step S1001 that the large winning opening 36a is open (step S1001: YES), the process proceeds to step S1007, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". To do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the large winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1007 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S1007: NO), the process proceeds to step S1008.

In step S1008, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening 36a based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36. If it is determined in step S1008 that no winning has occurred (S1008: NO), the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1008 that a prize has been generated (S1008: YES), the process proceeds to step S1009, and the value of the prize counter area PC is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S1010.

In step S1010, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is “0”. If it is determined in step S1010 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0" (S1010: NO), the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is.

When it is determined in step S1007 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S1007: YES), or when it is determined in step S1010 that the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". (S1010: YES), the process proceeds to step S1011 to execute the large winning opening closing process. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 36c is set to the non-driving state in order to close the large winning opening 36a. Then, the process proceeds to step S1012.

In step S1012, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is subtracted by 1. After that, the process proceeds to step S1013, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined in step S1013 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S1013: YES), the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1013 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1013: NO), "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the large winning opening 36a. After executing step S1014, the process proceeds to step S1015 to set the closure command. After that, the opening and closing process of the big winning opening is completed.

This set closing command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are the control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the opening of the large winning opening 36a has been completed, and is a normal process. In the external output process (FIG. 12: step S402), the sound is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Based on the received closing command, the voice emission control device 90 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed, and at the same time, displays the effects of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 on the large winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the end of opening. Further, the voice emission control device 90 transmits the closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 identifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed, and at the same time, the opening of the large winning opening 36a has been completed with the effect content of the symbol display device 41. Update to the content corresponding to what you did.
Execute the corresponding process.

<Transition processing at the end of open / close execution mode>
Next, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described. The transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 17: S912) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is stored in the RAM 64 as the jackpot type flag. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 64.

If it is determined in step S1101 that the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 64 (S1101: YES), the process proceeds to step S1102 to execute the flag erasing process. The flag erasing process is a process of erasing information for specifying the game state. Specifically, if the open / close execution mode flag, the high probability mode flag, and the high frequency support flag are stored, they are deleted, and if these flags are not stored, the state is maintained. To do. After executing step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1103.

In step S1103, the high probability mode flag is stored, and then the process proceeds to step S1104 to store the high frequency support flag. As a result, after ending the open / close execution mode, the game state shifts to the game state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. In addition, these high-probability modes and high-frequency support modes are maintained at least until the next big hit. Then, the process proceeds to step S1105.

In step S1105, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. To do. After that, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1101 that the 16R normal flag or the 8R normal flag is stored in the RAM 64 (S1101: NO), the process proceeds to step S1106 to execute the flag erasing process. Then, the process proceeds to step S1107.

In step S1107, after storing the high-frequency support flag, the process proceeds to step S1108, and "100" is set in the game count counter area provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the game count counter area is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. As a result, after ending the open / close execution mode, the game state shifts to the game state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. However, in this case, the high-frequency support mode ends after the game times are executed 100 times, and after that, the game shifts to the normal game state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. .. After executing step S1108, the transition process at the end of the main open / close execution mode ends.

<Processing for electrical support>
Next, the processing for electric service support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 12: S407) of the normal process.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the electric service support process. In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag is stored in the supported flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. The supporting flag is a flag that is stored when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened and is cleared when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S1201 that the supporting flag is not stored (S1201: NO), the process proceeds to step S1202.

In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag is stored in the support winning flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is deleted when the supporting flag is stored. .. If it is determined in step S1202 that the support winning flag is not stored (S1202: NO), the process proceeds to step S1203.

In step S1203, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the display duration of the normal diagram unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

If it is determined in step S1203 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1203: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1203: YES), the process proceeds to step S1204.

In step S1204, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display of the symbol in the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step S1204 that it is the end timing of the variable display (S1204: YES), the process proceeds to step S1205, the off display is set, and then the main electric service support process is terminated. By setting the off display, the variable display of the symbol in the normal drawing unit 38 is terminated in the state where the off display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1204 that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation display (S1204: NO), the process proceeds to step S1206.

In step S1206, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0". If it is determined in step S1206 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is "0" (S1206: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1206 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0" (S1206: YES), the process proceeds to step S1207.

In step S1207, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step S1208 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If the mode is not the open / close execution mode (S1207: NO) in step S1207 and the high-frequency support mode is set in step S1208 (S1208: YES), the process proceeds to step S1209 and the electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Then, the process proceeds to step S1210.

In step S1210, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step S1209 is a support winning. If it is determined in step S1210 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is the support winning (S1210: YES), the process proceeds to step S1211 to store the support winning flag and to be provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Set "3" in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S1212. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1210 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not the support winning (S1210: NO), the process proceeds to step S1212 without executing the process of step S1211.

In step S1212, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S1212 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode (S1212: YES), the process proceeds to step S1213. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1212 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S1212: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is.

In step S1213, it is determined whether or not the game count counter area is "0". The game count counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S1213 that the game count counter area is not "0" (S1213: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1213 that the game count counter area is "0", the process proceeds to step S1214 and the high frequency support flag is cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step S1215.

In step S1215, a low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. To do. After that, the processing for electric service support is terminated.

The low-frequency support command set in step S1215 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the external output process (FIG. 12: step S402) of the normal process. The voice emission control device 90 identifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on receiving the low frequency support command, and executes the corresponding process.

If it is determined in step S1207 that the open / close execution mode is set (S1207: YES), or if it is determined in step S1218 that the mode is not in the high frequency support mode (S1208: NO), the process proceeds to step S1216 and the electric accessory opening lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric service holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. You will be elected. Further, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. Then, the process proceeds to step S1217.

In step S1217, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step S1216 is the support winning. If it is determined in step S1217 that the support is not won (S1217: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1217 that the support is won (S1217: YES), the process proceeds to step S1218, the support winning flag is stored, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. Ends the main electric service support process.

If it is determined in step S1202 that the support winning flag is stored (S1202: YES), the process proceeds to step S1219, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the display duration of the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step S1219 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1219: NO), the pattern is being displayed in a variable manner in the normal drawing unit 38. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1219 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1219: YES), the process proceeds to step S1220.

In step S1220, the hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the pattern in the normal drawing unit 38 is terminated in the state where the hit display is stopped and displayed. After that, the process proceeds to step S1221 to store the supporting flag and clear the support winning flag. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1201 that the supporting flag is stored (S1201: YES), the process proceeds to step S1222 to execute the electric function opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 34a. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

<Electric service opening / closing process>
Next, the electric service opening / closing process will be described. The electric service opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 20: S1222) of the electric service support process.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the electric service opening / closing process. In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in the driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (S1301: YES), the process proceeds to step S1302.

In step S1302, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S1302 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1302: NO), the main electric service opening / closing process is terminated as it is. That is, if the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the main electric accessory opening / closing process ends.

If it is determined in step S1302 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1302: YES), the process proceeds to step S1303, and a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state is performed. “250” (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S1303, the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S1305 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step S1305 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S1305: NO), the main electric service opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1305 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S1305: YES), the process proceeds to step S1306 and the supporting flag is cleared. After that, the main electric service opening / closing process is completed.

If it is determined in step S1301 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (S1301: NO), the process proceeds to step S1307 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S1307 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1307: NO), the main electric service opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1307 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1307: YES), the process proceeds to step S1308, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state is executed. .. Then, the process proceeds to step S1309.

In step S1309, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, and if it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is not in progress (S1309: NO), the process proceeds to step S1310 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. To do.

If it is determined in step S1310 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (S1310: YES), the process proceeds to step S1311, and "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electric service opening / closing process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1309 that the open / close execution mode is set (S1309: YES), or if it is determined in step S1310 that the mode is not in the high frequency support mode (S1310: NO), the process proceeds to step S1312 and the second step is performed. “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the main electric service opening / closing process is completed.

A4. Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configurations of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Some configurations of the power supply device 85 and the like are omitted. The MPU 92 is mounted on the voice emission control board 91 provided in the voice emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element having a built-in ROM 93, RAM 94, interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data input / output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs, fixed value data, tables, and the like executed by the MPU 92. For example, a part of the area of ROM 93 includes a hold confirmation table storage area 93a, a déjà vu notice generation table storage area 93b, a déjà vu notice notice effect table storage area 93c, and a stop symbol table storage for déjà vu notice. An area 93d, a variable display pattern table storage area 93e, and the like are provided. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, a lottery counter area 94c, a déjà vu advance notice effect storage area 94d, and the like. Details of these will be described later. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. An effect operation button 24, a speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and a display control device 100 is connected to the output side.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 102, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the voice emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 102.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and share them with each character ROM 106 to store image data and the like. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the voice emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound light side MPU 92 and the sound light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound / light side RAM 94 are also referred to, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as a display side MPU 102.

A5. Déjà vu notice:
A5-1. Summary of déjà vu notice:
Next, an outline of the déjà vu notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 23 is a time chart showing an example of a déjà vu notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the symbol display device 41 when the déjà vu notice is executed. The déjà vu notice is to give the player a déjà vu that the déjà vu has the same content multiple times by executing at least one déjà vu element with the same content multiple times. It is a production to give. The effect element is a unit that constitutes the game effect. For example, a cut-in notice effect that displays a predetermined image (still image or moving image) in front of the background image, a predetermined object image such as a mini character is used as the background. Object notice effect to be displayed in front of the image (mini character notice effect), background change notice effect to change the background image to a different mode from the normal time, character notice effect to make a predetermined character perform a predetermined operation, various types A lamp emission effect that causes the lamp to emit light in a predetermined pattern, a symbol sequence variation effect that changes the symbol sequence in a predetermined scroll pattern, and the remaining one symbol with two identical symbols stopped on at least one effective line. Examples thereof include a reach effect of changing a row, a symbol pseudo stop effect of pseudo-stopping a predetermined symbol combination, a symbol complete stop effect of completely stopping a predetermined symbol combination, and the like.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, that is, whether or not to generate the déjà vu notice, based on the hold information. Then, when it is determined that the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, the pachinko machine 10 is required to complete the game round related to the hold information determined that the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied. , At least one effect element is executed multiple times with the same content. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied before the reserved information subject to the determination is subject to the jackpot lottery. ..

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment confirms that the following conditions are satisfied when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 and the holding information is acquired. Then, the lottery process for generating a déjà vu notice, which will be described later, is executed. If you win the lottery process for generating déjà vu notice, the conditions for generating déjà vu notice will be satisfied.
(Condition 1) The hold information already stored does not include the hold information corresponding to the jackpot. (Condition 2) If the game ball wins in the first starting port 33, it is related to this prize. The total number of holdings CRN including the holding information is 2 or more (Condition 3) When the game ball wins the second starting port 34, the second starting holding number RbN including the holding information related to this winning Is 2 or more

The reason for condition 1 is that even if the production element with the same content is executed multiple times by using the game times related to the hold information corresponding to the jackpot and the game times related to the hold information that won the prize this time, the jackpot is supported. This is because the jackpot effect is executed after the game times related to the reserved information to be performed, so that the continuity of the effect elements having the same content executed a plurality of times is interrupted, and it becomes difficult to give the player a sense of déjà vu. The reason for the condition 2 and the condition 3 is that if the number of reserved items including the reserved information related to the current prize is 2 or more, the déjà vu notice can be executed over a plurality of game times. The reason why the second start hold number RbN is the standard in the condition 3 is that in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the hold information acquired by winning the second start port 34 is the first start port 33. This is because the jackpot lottery is given priority over the pending information obtained by winning the prize. However, these conditions are examples, and other conditions may be imposed or may not be present. For example, in the case where the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times in one game, these conditions may not be necessary.

In the déjà vu notice generation lottery process of the present embodiment, the déjà vu notice is given only when the hold information related to this prize is the hold information that will result in a big hit or reach when it is later targeted for a big hit lottery. You can win the outbreak. The reason for this is that a relatively long display duration is set in the game times related to the hold information that causes a big hit or reach, so that it is easy to execute a suggestion effect, a battle effect, or the like, which will be described later. Then, when the lottery process for generating the déjà vu notice is won, the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, and the pachinko machine 10 is held for determining that the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied. By the time the game rounds related to the information are completed, at least one effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content.

In Example 1 shown in FIG. 23 (A), the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 33 at the timing when the total reserved number CRN is 2, and the total reserved number CRN becomes 3, based on the reserved information related to the winning. As a result of the above determination, the case where the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied is shown. Then, the game time P03 shown as the third game time is the game time related to the reserved information determined that the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied.

In Example 1 shown in FIG. 23 (A), the pachinko machine 10 selects a cut-in notice effect A having the same content as the effect element A to be executed a plurality of times with the same content, and cut-in the same content. The notice effect A is executed once in each of the three game times P01, P02, and P03. That is, the pachinko machine 10 executes the cut-in notice effect A in all of the consecutive game times by the end of the game times related to the hold information determined that the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied. There is.

Further, in Example 1 shown in FIG. 23, the pachinko machine 10 completely stops the out-of-design symbol A (for example, a combination of the symbols of “1, 2, 3”) in the first game round P01. Is executed, and also in the second game round P02, the symbol complete stop effect of completely stopping the same off symbol A is executed. That is, the pachinko machine 10 selects, as an effect element to be executed a plurality of times with the same content, a symbol complete stop effect having the same content of completely stopping the same off symbol A, and completely stops the symbol with the same content. The production is executed multiple times.

Further, in Example 1 shown in FIG. 23, the pachinko machine 10 executes a symbol pseudo-stop effect that pseudo-stops the detached symbol A after executing the cut-in notice effect A in the third game round P3. There is. Strictly speaking, the symbol pseudo stop effect is different from the symbol complete stop effect in that the symbol is not completely stopped. However, the mode of the effect that the player can recognize is very similar between the case where the combination of symbols is stopped in a pseudo manner and the case where the combination of symbols is completely stopped. Therefore, in the present specification, if the content of the combination of the symbols to be pseudo-stopped is the same, the symbol pseudo-stop effect is regarded as an effect element having the same content as the symbol complete stop effect that completely stops the symbol. , In the following, the symbol complete stop effect and the symbol pseudo stop effect are collectively referred to as a symbol stop effect.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes a suggestion effect suggesting to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. .. In the example shown in FIG. 24, the suggestion effect causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image in which a female character throws a message such as "Maybe deja vu !?" This is a mode in which the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are output. However, the suggestion effect may be in another mode as long as it can suggest to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed multiple times. For example, "Maybe dejab?" , "Is it dejab?", "Dejab?", "Is dejab a precursor to a big hit?", "This production is familiar!" Images containing messages such as "This is déjà vu !?" and "You'll get bored with the same production ..." are displayed on the symbol display device 41, and voices containing these messages are output from the speaker 46. It may be a directing effect or the like.

In the example shown in FIG. 23, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect, then performs a battle effect in which the player-side character and the enemy-side character confront each other, and then the result corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery. Execute the production (winning production if you win the jackpot, defeating production if you lose the result, etc.). In the example shown in FIG. 24, in the battle effect, an image in which a female character on the player side and a male character on the enemy side confront each other is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the sound and light associated with the image are transmitted to the speaker 46. And various lamps 47 are output. However, the battle effect may be in another mode or may be omitted. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 24, in the victory effect, an image in which the female character on the player side is pleased with the victory is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the sound and light associated with the image are displayed on the speaker 46 and various lamps 47. It is a mode to output to. However, the winning effect as the result effect may be in another mode or may be omitted. After that, if the jackpot is won, the jackpot production corresponding to the type of jackpot is executed.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, the player has a sense of déjà vu that the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times. Can be given. A player who recognizes the déjà vu will have a feeling of expectation that the déjà vu may have a special meaning, for example, that he may win a big hit. Further, when the player experiences that the effect element having the same content is executed multiple times and then wins the jackpot, the effect element is executed in the expectation that the effect element having the same content is executed multiple times. Every time it is done, I always have a high expectation and pay attention to the production elements. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player is made to pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same contents are executed a plurality of times, and the player's attention to the effect elements to be sequentially executed is paid. It can be suitably enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, different reliability (expectation degree) can be set for each type of effect element executed in a single shot, so that, for example, the highly reliable effect element has the same content. When executed multiple times, the player strongly expects that the jackpot is very likely to be won, while the unreliable production element is executed. However, the player comes to expect that the effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content, and the player's attention to the effect element can be suitably increased.

In addition, even if an effect that directly suggests that there is a high possibility of winning a big hit, for example, an effect of lighting a look-ahead hold lamp or the like in a color different from the normal time is not executed, the same content is used. It is possible to add a game of paying attention to whether or not the effect element of is executed a plurality of times.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the player has the same content. It is possible to convince the player that the effect element has been executed multiple times has a special meaning. Then, when the player has executed the effect element having the same content multiple times, is it just a coincidence that the effect element having the same content is executed multiple times, or is it a déjà vu accompanied by a suggestion effect? Whether it was a notice will be confirmed by whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and it is expected that the suggestion effect will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can execute an operation acceptance effect element (button effect) including a content suggesting acceptance of the operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player as the effect element. When the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, the button effect is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times. The reason for this will be explained. When the button effect is executed a plurality of times, the button effect is executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player (for example, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.). May occur. Therefore, even if the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied and the pachinko machine 10 executes the same type of button effect a plurality of times, the buttons may be affected depending on the mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. The production may be executed with different contents, and it may not be possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the button effect is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, different contents are executed depending on the mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player. It is possible to suppress the storage, and it is possible to surely give the player a sense of déjà vu. However, even when the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, the pachinko machine 10 cancels the execution of the déjà vu notice when the button effect is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times. It may be configured.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied before the pending information is subject to the jackpot lottery, and has already been determined. When it is determined that the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, the pending information determined that the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied is the target to be executed multiple times before the target of the jackpot lottery. Starts the execution of the effect element that is. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for déjà vu over a plurality of game times.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines the display duration, which is the time required for each game round, immediately before the start of each game round. Therefore, the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, and if the type of the effect element (for example, the cut-in notice effect) to be executed a plurality of times in the déjà vu notice is randomly selected, the display duration of each game time is reached. In some cases, a production element with a length that cannot be executed may be selected. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can be executed with the shortest display duration or less among the display durations that can be selected in each game when the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied. An element is selected as a target effect element to be executed a plurality of times, and the selected effect element is executed in each game time. By doing so, even if the display duration determined for each game time is different, it is possible to reliably execute the effect element having the same content in each game time.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the length of the display duration of the game times for which the selected effect element is executed is a length that allows the selected effect element to be executed a plurality of times. , The effect element having the same selected content is executed a plurality of times in the one game.

In Example 2 shown in FIG. 23 (B), the display duration T2 of the second game round P02 is longer than twice the time required for the effect element A (for example, the cut-in notice effect A). , The pachinko machine 10 executes the same effect element A twice in the game round P02. It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 has the same outlier symbol A as the outlier symbol A stopped in the first game round P01 after the end of the first effect element A in the second game round P02 (for example, "1, 2". The symbol pseudo-stop effect of pseudo-stopping the combination of symbols of "3") is executed once. Therefore, the déjà vu given to the player can be further strengthened.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute an effect element having the same content (hereinafter, also referred to as an effect element for déjà vu notice), which is a target to be executed a plurality of times, more times. , It is possible to make the player strongly recognize the feeling of déjà vu. Further, since the number of times the effect element for déjà vu is executed increases or decreases depending on the length of the display duration of one game, it is possible to give an intonation to the player's expectation.

Further, since the déjà vu advance notice element is an effect element that can be executed with the shortest display duration or less among the display durations that can be determined for each game, the time required for one execution is long. 1. It is less than or equal to the length of the display duration of one game. Therefore, even if the effect element for déjà vu warning is executed once in one game, an extra time may occur in the display duration. According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the length of the display duration of one game is long enough to execute the effect element for déjà vu (the effect element having the same content) multiple times. In the above, since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times in the one game, the surplus time of the display duration can be minimized.

In the above example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the effect element A in all of the consecutive game times by the end of the game times related to the hold information determined that the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied. Although it is executed, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect element having the same content a plurality of times. For example, the effect element A may be executed only in the game times P01 and the game times P03.

In the following, in particular, when a specific advance notice effect is selected as an effect element to be executed a plurality of times with the same content in the déjà vu advance notice, the selected advance notice effect is also referred to as a “déjà vu advance notice effect”. In addition, when a symbol stop effect that completely stops or pseudo-stops a specific combination of symbols is selected as an effect element to be executed multiple times with the same content in the déjà vu notice, the selected symbol stop effect A combination of specific symbols to be stopped or to be stopped in a pseudo manner is also called a "stop symbol for déjà vu notice".

A5-2. Control related to déjà vu notice:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-mentioned déjà vu notice in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed with a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec). Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described.

In step S1401, the command storage process is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound / light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main MPU 62, and the commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Read sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step S1401, the process proceeds to step S1402.

In step S1402, a command correspondence process for performing a process corresponding to the received command is executed. The details of the command handling process will be described later. After executing step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403.

In step S1403, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the command correspondence process in step S1402. After executing step S1403, the process proceeds to step S1404.

In step S1404, the audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the voice output control process, the voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the voice output data read in the command correspondence process in step S1402. After executing step S1404, the timer interrupt process ends.

<Command support processing>
Next, the command correspondence process will be described. The command correspondence process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 25: S1402).

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the command correspondence process. As described above, in the command correspondence process, the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. The processing of each step executed in the command correspondence processing will be described below.

In step S1501, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1501 that the hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1501: YES), the process proceeds to step S1502 to execute the hold command correspondence process. In the hold command correspondence process, the above-mentioned process related to the déjà vu notice is executed based on the information set in the hold command. The details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step S1502, the process proceeds to step S1503. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1501 that the hold command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1501: NO), the process proceeds to step S1503 without executing step S1502.

In step S1503, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1503 that the variation command and the type command have been received (S1503: YES), the process proceeds to step S1504 to execute the effect setting process. In the effect setting process, a notice effect to be executed in this game round, a stop symbol, a variable display pattern, and the like are set. The details of the effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S1504, the process proceeds to step S1505. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1503 that the variation command and the type command have not been received (S1503: NO), the process proceeds to step S1505 without executing step S1504.

In step S1505, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1505 that the opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1505: YES), the process proceeds to step S1506 to execute the opening effect setting process. In the opening effect setting process, the type of jackpot included in the opening command received this time is specified, the content of the opening effect corresponding to the type of jackpot is set, and the information corresponding to the effect content is set. The opening effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. Then, the process proceeds to step S1507. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1505 that the opening command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1505: NO), the process proceeds to step S1507 without executing step S1506.

In step S1507, it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received. If it is determined in step S1507 that the ending command has been received (S1507: YES), the process proceeds to step S1508 to execute the ending effect setting process. In the ending effect setting process, the content of the game state after the open / close execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, the content of the ending effect corresponding to the content of the game state is set, and the content of the effect is set. The ending effect command in which the corresponding information is set is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. Then, the process proceeds to step S1509. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1507 that the ending command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1507: NO), the process proceeds to step S1509 without executing step S1508.

In step S1509, other setting processing is executed. In other setting processes, for example, the effect content corresponding to the open command and the effect content corresponding to the close command are set. Further, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed, an effect operation command for recognizing that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed is transmitted to the display side MPU 102.

<Processing for pending commands>
Next, the pending command correspondence process will be described. The hold command correspondence process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command correspondence process (FIG. 26: S1502).

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the pending command correspondence process. As described above, the hold command correspondence process is a process executed when the hold command is received from the main MPU 62. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the processing corresponding to the pending command will be described.

In step S1601, the update process at the time of winning is executed. In the update process at the time of winning, the number of hold information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33, the number of holding information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34, and the holding of these A process for making the total number of pieces of information identifiable on the sound light side MPU 92 is executed. The details of the update process at the time of winning in step S1601 will be described later. In the following, the number of hold information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33 is also referred to as the "first holding number", and the number of holding information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34 is referred to as the "first holding number". It is also referred to as "second reserved quantity", and the total number of the first reserved quantity and the second reserved quantity is also referred to as "total reserved quantity". After executing step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1602.

In step S1602, the confirmation process is executed. In the confirmation process, a process is executed so that the sound / light side MPU 92 can specify whether or not the hold command to be read this time corresponds to the jackpot, whether or not it corresponds to the reach generation, and the like. The details of the confirmation process in step S1602 will be described later. After executing step S1602, the process proceeds to step S1603.

In step S1603, the déjà vu warning process is executed. In the déjà vu notice processing, a process for determining whether or not the above-mentioned déjà vu notice generation condition is satisfied is executed, and when the déjà vu notice generation condition is satisfied, the déjà vu notice is already seen. Execute the setting process for executing the impression notice. The details of the déjà vu warning process in step S1603 will be described later. After executing step S1603, the process corresponding to this hold command is terminated.

<Update process at the time of winning>
Next, the update process at the time of winning will be described. The update process at the time of winning is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 27: S1601) of the hold command corresponding process.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an update process at the time of winning. In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the winning of the first starting port 33. If it is determined in step S1701 that the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the winning of the first start port 33 (S1701: YES), the process proceeds to step S1702, and the sound is emitted. The update process of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the side RAM 94 is executed. The first reserved quantity counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reserved information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33 in the sound light side MPU 92. In the update process of the first hold quantity counter area, the information of the first hold quantity counter area is updated to the information of the hold quantity included in the hold command to be read this time. After executing step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1704.

In step S1701, when it is determined that the hold command to be read this time is not transmitted based on the winning of the first start port 33 (S1701: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start port. If it is determined that the command was transmitted based on the winning of 34, the process proceeds to step S1703, and the update process of the second reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94 is executed. .. The second reserved quantity counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reserved information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34 in the sound light side MPU 92. In the update process of the second reserved quantity counter area, the information of the second reserved quantity counter area is updated to the information of the reserved quantity included in the command to be read this time. After executing step S1703, the process proceeds to step S1704.

The reason why the processes of steps S1702 and S1703 are performed as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, whereas the backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the voice emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, if the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information relating to the winning of the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the hold information is stored in the main control device 60. While the memory is retained, the voice emission control device 90 grasps that the number of reserved information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first hold quantity counter area or the second hold count counter area is counted up each time the voice emission control device 90 receives a hold command, the main control device 60 actually holds the hold storage. There may be a problem that the number of reserved information being held does not match the number of reserved information grasped by the voice emission control device 90. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment described above, the main control device 60 transmits the hold command including the information on the number of holds, and the voice emission control device 90 sends the hold command each time the hold command is received. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the number of reserved items to be included is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

In step S1704, the update process of the total number of reserved counter areas provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94 is executed. The total number of reserved information counter area is the sum of the number of reserved information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33 and the number of reserved information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34. It is a counter area for identification in the side MPU 92. In the update process, the information of the total reserved quantity counter area is the sum information of the information of the reserved quantity measured in the first reserved quantity counter area and the information of the reserved quantity measured in the second reserved quantity counter area. Update to. After executing step S1704, the update process at the time of the final winning is completed.

<Confirmation process>
Next, the confirmation process will be described. The confirmation process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 27: S1602) of the hold command corresponding process. As described above, if the hold command has already been set with information such as whether or not a jackpot has been won, the type of jackpot, and whether or not a reach has occurred, this confirmation process can be omitted.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the confirmation process. As described above, the confirmation process is a process executed when it is determined that the hold command is received from the main MPU 62. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the confirmation processing will be described. The contents of each table stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound / light side ROM 93 described in each of the following steps include the pass / fail table storage area 63a of the main ROM 63, the distribution table storage area 63b, and the distribution table storage area 63b. It is the same as the contents of each table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c.

In step S1801, the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hold command to be read this time is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step S1802, and it is determined whether or not the current winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode. Specifically, when the high-probability mode flag is not stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light side RAM 94, it is determined that the mode is low-probability mode, and when the high-probability mode flag is stored, it is determined. , It is determined that the mode is not the low probability mode, that is, the high probability mode. The high-probability mode flag is stored when a high-probability mode command is received from the main MPU 62.

If it is determined in step S1802 that the mode is in the low probability mode (S1802: YES), the process proceeds to step S1803, and the pass / fail table for the low probability mode stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound light side ROM 93 is displayed. refer. After that, the process proceeds to step S1805, and as a result of referring to the hit / fail table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1802 that the mode is not the low probability mode (S1802: NO), the process proceeds to step S1804, and the high probability mode pass / fail table stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound light side ROM 93. Refer to. After that, the process proceeds to step S1805, and as a result of referring to the hit / fail table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

If it is determined in step S1805 that the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot (S1805: YES), the process proceeds to step S1806, and the hold command to be read this time is set. Grasp the information of the value of the included jackpot type counter C2. After that, the process proceeds to step S1807, and the distribution table stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. Specifically, when the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the winning of the first starting port 33, the second starting port distribution table is referred to. If it is transmitted based on the winning of the starting port 34, the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to.

In step S1808, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step S1808 that the probability variation jackpot is supported (S1808: YES), the process proceeds to step S1809, and the probability variation jackpot information is temporarily stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. After that, this confirmation process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1808 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (S1808: NO), the process proceeds to step S1810, and the normal jackpot information is temporarily stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. After that, this confirmation process ends.

If it is determined in step S1805 that the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S1805: NO), the process proceeds to step S1811, and the hold command to be read this time is set. The information of the value of the included reach random number counter C3 is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step S1812, and the reach determination table stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step S1813, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value information of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the reach generation.

If it is determined in step S1813 that the reach generation is supported (S1813: YES), the process proceeds to step S1814, and the reach generation information is temporarily stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. After that, this confirmation process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1813 that the reach generation is not supported (S1813: NO), the confirmation process is terminated as it is.

<Processing for déjà vu notice>
Next, the process for notifying the déjà vu will be described. The déjà vu warning process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 27: S1603) of the process corresponding to the hold command.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the déjà vu warning process. In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the winning of the first starting port 33. In step S1901, when it is determined that the hold command to be read this time is not transmitted based on the winning of the first starting port 33 (S1901: NO), that is, the winning of the second starting port 34 If it is determined that the transmission was performed based on the above, the process proceeds to step S1902.

In step S1902, it is determined whether or not the first déjà vu warning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light side RAM 94. The first déjà vu notice flag is stored when the above-mentioned déjà vu notice is started triggered by the hold information based on the winning of the first starting port 33, and is deleted when the déjà vu notice is terminated. It is a flag to be done.

If it is determined in step S1902 that the first déjà vu notice flag is stored (S1902: YES), the process proceeds to step S1903, the first déjà vu notice flag is erased, and the process proceeds to step S1904. Set "0" in the counter area for déjà vu warning of the sound / light side RAM 94. Then, the process proceeds to step S1905.

When the counter area for déjà vu notice is set to execute the déjà vu notice, the sound light side MPU 92 specifies how many times the déjà vu notice is executed thereafter. It is a measuring means for doing so. As will be described later, information on the number of reserved items is set in the counter area for déjà vu advance notice, and is updated so as to be decremented by 1 each time a new game round is started. Then, when the information stored in the déjà vu warning counter area is the initial value "0" after the update, the déjà vu warning flag stored at that time is deleted.

Here, if the hold command is transmitted based on the winning of the second starting port 34, in other words, when there is a winning of the second starting port 34, the first déjà vu notice flag The reason for erasing is explained. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the hold information related to the winning of the second starting port 34 is subject to the jackpot lottery with priority over the holding information of the winning of the first starting port 33. If there is a prize in the starting port 34, the order of the jackpot lottery for the reserved information will be changed, and the premise of the déjà vu notice that has already been set with the winning in the first starting port 33 will be broken. It ends up. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the second starting port 34 is won, the first déjà vu notice flag is erased, so that the premise is broken. I decided to cancel the execution.

If it is determined in step S1902 that the first déjà vu warning flag is not stored (S1902: NO), the process proceeds to step S1905 without executing steps S1903 and S1904.

If it is determined in step S1901 that the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the winning of the first start port 33 (S1901: YES), step S1902, step S1903 and step. The process proceeds to step S1905 without executing S1904, that is, without executing the elimination of the first déjà vu warning flag.

In the processes from step S1905 to step S1911, which will be described next, the process related to the jackpot hold flag is executed. Therefore, prior to the description of the processes from step S1905 to step S1911, the jackpot hold flag, the first erase counter area and the second erase counter area used for determining whether or not to erase the jackpot hold flag will be described. To do.

The jackpot hold flag includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot in the hold information held and stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit of the main control device 60. If so, it is information for specifying it in the sound light side MPU 92. In the jackpot hold flag erasure process, in the situation where the jackpot hold flag is stored, both the information stored in the first erasure counter area and the second erasure counter area, which will be described later, are initial values of "0". It is executed when is.

In the first erasing counter area, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, the hold information becomes the start target of the game round and is used for the first result display unit. This is a measuring means for specifying the timing of being erased from the holding area Ra by the sound light side MPU 92. The information on the number of hold items set in the first erasure counter area is used for the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit (that is, winning a prize in the first start port 33), as will be described later. (Holding information acquired based on) is updated so that it is deducted by 1 each time a new game round is started.

In the second erasing counter area, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, the hold information becomes the start target of the game round and is used for the second result display unit. This is a measuring means for specifying the timing of erasing from the holding area Rb by the sound light side MPU 92. The information on the number of hold items set in the second erasure counter area is used for the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit (that is, for winning a prize in the second start port 34), as will be described later. (Holding information acquired based on) is updated so that it is deducted by 1 each time a new game round is started. The following returns to the description of the processing related to the jackpot hold flag.

In step S1905, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time is a hold command corresponding to a jackpot. If it is determined in step S1905 that the hold command to be read this time is a hold command corresponding to a jackpot (S1905: YES), the process proceeds to step S1906, and the hold command to be read this time is the first. 1 It is determined whether or not the command is transmitted based on the winning of the starting port 33.

If it is determined in step S1906 that the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the winning of the first starting port 33 (S1906: YES), the process proceeds to step S1907, and this time. The information on the number of first holdes included in the hold command to be read is specified, and the information on the number of first holds specified is set in the first erasing counter area. After executing step S1907, the process proceeds to step S1909.

In step S1906, when it is determined that the hold command to be read this time is not transmitted based on the winning of the first start port 33 (S1906: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start port. If it is determined that the command was transmitted based on the winning of 34, the process proceeds to step S1908, and the information on the second reserved number included in the command to be read this time is specified, and the specified second is specified. 2 Information on the number of pending items is set for the second erasing counter area. After executing step S1908, the process proceeds to step S1909.

In step S1909, it is determined whether or not the jackpot hold flag is stored in the sound light side RAM 94. If it is determined in step S1909 that the jackpot hold flag is stored (S1909: YES), the process corresponding to this hold command is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1909 that the jackpot hold flag is not stored (S1909: NO), the process proceeds to step S1910, and the jackpot hold flag is stored in the sound light side RAM 94. After executing step S1910, the process proceeds to step S1912.

If it is determined in step S1905 that the hold command to be read this time is not a hold command corresponding to the jackpot (S1905: NO), the process proceeds to step S1911, and the jackpot hold flag is stored in the sound light side RAM 94. Judge whether or not.

If it is determined in step S1911 that the jackpot hold flag is not stored in the sound light side RAM 94 (S1911: NO), the process proceeds to step S1912. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1911 that the jackpot hold flag is stored in the sound / light side RAM 94 (S1911: YES), the process corresponding to this hold command is terminated as it is.

As described in the processes from step S1905 to step S1911, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot hold flag is already stored (S1909: YES, S1911: YES), the feeling of déjà vu Various settings for executing the notice are not made. As a result, in a situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is already stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit of the main control device 60, the first start port 33 or the first start port 33 or the first. 2 Even if new hold information is acquired based on the winning of the starting port 34, various settings for executing the déjà vu notice are not made.

In step S1912, it is determined whether or not the first déjà vu warning flag is stored in the sound / light side RAM 94. If it is determined in step S1912 that the first déjà vu notice flag is stored (S1912: YES), the process corresponding to this hold command is terminated as it is. That is, when the first déjà vu notice flag is stored, the déjà vu notice generation lottery process in step S19 is not executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1912 that the first déjà vu warning flag is not stored (S1912: NO), the process proceeds to step S1913.

In step S1913, it is determined whether or not the second déjà vu warning flag is stored in the sound / light side RAM 94. If it is determined in step S1913 that the second déjà vu notice flag is stored (S1913: YES), the process for responding to this hold command is terminated as it is. That is, when the second déjà vu notice flag is stored, the déjà vu notice generation lottery process in step S1917 is not executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1913 that the second déjà vu warning flag is not stored (S1913: NO), the process proceeds to step S16.

That is, in a situation where it has already been set to execute the déjà vu notice based on either the hold information related to the winning of the first starting port 33 or the holding information related to the winning of the second starting port 34. Does not make a new setting for executing the déjà vu notice even if a new hold command is received.

In step S1914, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the winning of the first starting port 33. If it is determined in step S1914 that the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the winning of the first start port 33 (S1914: YES), the process proceeds to step S1915 and the total hold is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved pieces measured in the number counter area is two or more.

If it is determined in step S1915 that the total number of reserved items is two or more (S1915: YES), the process proceeds to step S1917 to execute the déjà vu notice generation lottery process. The details of the lottery process for generating déjà vu notice will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1915 that the total number of pending commands is not two or more (S1915: NO), the process corresponding to this pending command is terminated without executing the déjà vu notice generation lottery process in step S1917. ..

In step S1914, when it is determined that the hold command to be read this time is not transmitted based on the winning of the first start port 33 (S1914: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start port. If it is determined that the command was transmitted based on the winning of 34, the process proceeds to step S1916, and it is determined whether or not the number of reserved items measured in the second reserved number counter area is 2 or more. ..

If it is determined in step S1916 that the number of second reserved pieces is two or more (S1916: YES), the process proceeds to step S1917 to execute the déjà vu notice generation lottery process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1916 that the number of second reserved items is not two or more, the déjà vu notice generation process is terminated without executing the déjà vu notice generation lottery process in step S1917.

That is, when the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the winning of the first start port 33, the déjà vu notice is given only when the total number of hold commands is 2 or more. The generation lottery process is executed. On the other hand, when the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the winning of the second start port 34, the déjà vu is felt only when the number of the second hold is 2 or more. Execute the notice generation lottery process. The reason for this is that the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment uses two or more game times to execute the déjà vu notice. When the hold command is transmitted based on the winning of the second start port 34, the reason for using the second hold number as a reference is that in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the second start port 34 This is because the hold information acquired by winning the prize is subject to the jackpot lottery in preference to the hold information acquired by the prize of the first starting port 33.

<Lottery process for déjà vu notice>
Next, the lottery process for generating a déjà vu notice will be described. The déjà vu notice generation lottery process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 30: S1917) of the déjà vu notice generation process.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a lottery process for generating a déjà vu notice. In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time corresponds to a jackpot or reach occurrence. If it is determined in step S2001 that neither the jackpot nor the occurrence of reach is supported (S2001: NO), the lottery process for generating the déjà vu notice is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2001 that the jackpot or reach is generated (S2001: YES), the process proceeds to step S2002, and the déjà vu advance notice random number counter is displayed from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound light side RAM 94. The value (numerical information) is read out, and the déjà vu notice generation table stored in the déjà vu notice generation table storage area 93b of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to, and in step S2003, the read déjà vu notice generation table is used. It is determined whether or not the random number counter value corresponds to the winning of the déjà vu notice.

The probability of winning the déjà vu notice can be set arbitrarily. For example, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to refer to the déjà vu notice generation table for the jackpot when a hold command corresponding to the jackpot is received, and the déjà vu for the jackpot is referred to. The notice generation table is set so that the hold notice generation winning is won with a probability of 7/10. On the other hand, when a hold command corresponding to the occurrence of reach is received, it is configured to refer to the déjà vu notice generation table for reach, and the déjà vu notice generation table for the reach is 10 minutes. It is set so that there is a probability of 1 that the hold notice will be won.

If it is determined in step S2003 that the random number counter value for déjà vu notice does not correspond to the déjà vu notice occurrence winning (S2003: NO), the déjà vu notice occurrence lottery process ends. On the other hand, in step S2003, when it is determined that the random number counter value for déjà vu notice corresponds to the winning of déjà vu notice (S2003: YES), the condition for generating déjà vu notice is satisfied. And proceed to step S2004.

In step S2004, a process of determining the advance notice effect for déjà vu notice is executed. Specifically, the random number counter value (numerical information) for the advance notice effect is read from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound light side RAM 94, and is stored in the advance notice effect table storage area 93c for the déjà vu side ROM 93. Refer to the déjà vu notice notice effect table, and determine the déjà vu notice notice effect corresponding to the random number counter value for the déjà vu notice. The déjà vu notice notice effect table includes the contents of the notice effect that can be executed with the shortest display duration or less of the display duration stored in the display duration table of the main ROM 63, and a random number counter for the notice effect. The value is stored in association with it. In the present embodiment, the random number counter value for the advance notice effect determined by the lottery and the advance notice effect table for the déjà vu advance notice are used to determine the advance notice effect for the déjà vu advance notice. The predetermined advance notice effect may be used as a advance notice effect for déjà vu advance notice. In this case, the predetermined advance notice effect is a notice effect that can be executed with the shortest display duration or less of the display durations stored in the display duration table of the main ROM 63. Further, for example, the advance notice effect for the déjà vu notice this time is the advance notice effect A, and the advance notice effect for the déjà vu notice to be determined when the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied next time is the advance notice effect B. In addition, the order of the advance notice effect for the déjà vu notice to be determined may be set in advance. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 can intentionally and actively determine the type and content of the advance notice effect for déjà vu advance notice to be executed in each game time by adopting various methods.

After executing step S2004, the process proceeds to step S2005, and the determined type information of the déjà vu advance notice effect is stored in the déjà vu advance notice effect storage area 94d of the sound light side RAM 94. Then, the process proceeds to step S2006.

In step S2006, the process of determining the stop symbol for déjà vu notice is executed. Specifically, the random number counter value (numerical information) for the stop symbol is read from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound light side RAM 94, and is stored in the stop symbol table storage area 93d for déjà vu notice of the sound light side ROM 93. Refer to the stop symbol table for déjà vu notice, and determine the stop symbol corresponding to the random number counter value for the stop symbol. As the stop symbol for the déjà vu notice, the stop symbol for the disengagement result is determined. After executing step S2006, the process proceeds to step S2007, and the determined type information of the stop symbol for déjà vu warning is stored in the sound / light side RAM 94. Then, the process proceeds to step S2008.

In step S2008, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the winning of the first starting port 33. If it is determined in step S2008 that the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the winning of the first start port 33 (S2008: YES), the process proceeds to step S2009, and the sound is emitted. The first déjà vu warning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the side RAM 94. After that, the process proceeds to step S2010, and the information stored in the total reserved number counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is set in the déjà vu warning counter area of the sound light side RAM 94. After that, the process for notifying the déjà vu is completed. As a result, the state in which the déjà vu notice should be executed is set with the hold information related to the first start port 33 as an opportunity.

If it is determined in step S2008 that the hold command to be read this time is not transmitted based on the winning of the first start port 33 (S2008: NO), the process proceeds to step S2011, and the sound light side The second déjà vu warning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the RAM 94. After that, the process proceeds to step S2012, and the information stored in the second reserved number counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is set in the déjà vu warning counter area of the sound light side RAM 94. After that, the process for notifying the déjà vu is completed. As a result, the state in which the déjà vu notice should be executed is set with the hold information related to the second start port 34 as an opportunity.

<Production setting process>
Next, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 26: S1504) of the command correspondence process.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process. As described above, the effect setting process is a process executed when it is determined that the variation command and the type command have been received, and is a process for setting the content of the effect executed in the current game round. .. Hereinafter, specific processing of the effect setting processing will be described.

In step S2101, the variable command received this time is read, the information on the presence / absence of reach occurrence and the information on the display duration are specified from the command, the type command received this time is read, and the 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained from the command. The information of the result of the jackpot lottery such as the information, the information of the 8R probability variation jackpot, the information of the 16R normal jackpot, the information of the 8R normal jackpot, or the information of the loss result is specified. Then, in step S2101, from the above-specified information, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the type of jackpot if the jackpot has been won, information on whether or not a reach has occurred if the jackpot has not been won, and the display duration. Information is grasped, and the grasped information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. After executing step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102.

In step S2102, it is determined whether or not the déjà vu warning flag is stored in the sound / light side RAM 94. If it is determined in step S2102 that the déjà vu notice flag is stored (S2102: YES), that is, if the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2103 and the déjà vu notice is felt. Executes the setting process of the effect corresponding to the notice. In this process, in the current game round in which the déjà vu notice is executed, the déjà vu notice notice effect determined in S2004 of FIG. 31 is executed, and the déjà vu notice determined in S2006 of FIG. 31 is executed. It is set to execute the symbol stop effect using the stop symbol for. The details of the effect setting process corresponding to the déjà vu notice will be described later.

If it is determined in step S2102 that the déjà vu notice flag is not stored (S2102: NO), the process proceeds to step S2104, and the notice effect generation lottery process is executed. In the advance notice effect generation lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to execute the normal advance notice effect in this game round. The normal advance notice effect can occur in both the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed is better than the case where the reach display is not performed. Is set to occur with a high probability. Further, in the advance notice effect generation lottery process, the advance notice effect is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to the big hit than in the game times corresponding to the missed result, and further, the advance notice effect with a low appearance rate is more likely to occur. Lottery will be held. After executing step S2104, the process proceeds to step S2105.

In step S2105, as a result of the advance notice effect generation lottery process in step S2104, it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect generation has been won. If it is determined in step S2105 that the advance notice effect has been won (step S2105: YES), the process proceeds to step S2106, and the winning advance notice effect is set to be executed in this game round. Then, the process proceeds to step S2107. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2105 that the advance notice effect generation has not been won (step S2105: NO), the process proceeds to step S2107 without executing step S2106.

In step S2107, the stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the jackpot lottery of this game round is 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, or 8R normal jackpot, the same symbol is displayed on the effective line L. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as the information of the stop symbol this time. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game round is a 16R probability variation jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot, the same odd-numbered symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, and the same. A combination of even symbols can be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the selectivity is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the same combination of even-numbered symbols, but instead, the former is selected over the latter. The configuration may have a high rate, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot. Further, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game round is 16R normal jackpot or 8R normal jackpot, the same even-numbered symbol combination is selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the jackpot lottery of this game is a deviation result, it is determined whether or not reach has occurred from the content of the variable command. When it is determined that the reach is generated, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the effective line L, and the stop result is that the reach symbol combination is established on the effective line L. The information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L, and the combination of the reach symbols is not established on the effective line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the stop symbol this time. After executing step S2107, the process proceeds to step S2108.

In step S2108, a process for determining the variation display pattern of the current game times is executed. In the process, the information on the display duration of the current game is specified from the content of the variable command received this time, the information on the display duration, the information on the variable display time included in the display duration, and the information on the variable display time included in the display duration. And the variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of the information of the stop symbol specified in step S2107 is selected. When selecting the variation display pattern, the variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93e of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to.

After executing the effect setting process corresponding to the déjà vu notice in step S2103, or after setting the variation display pattern in step S2108, the process proceeds to step S2109.

In step S2109, the type information of the advance notice effect, the number of times the advance notice effect is executed, the type information of the stop symbol, and the type information of the variable display pattern set in the current game round are set in the effect command. After that, the process proceeds to step S2110, and the effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect content corresponding to the received effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S2110, the process proceeds to step S2111, the update process at the start of fluctuation is executed, and then the effect setting process ends. The details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later.

<Production setting process corresponding to déjà vu notice>
Next, the setting process of the effect corresponding to the déjà vu notice will be described. The effect setting process corresponding to the déjà vu notice is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 32: S2103) of the effect setting process.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a setting process of the effect corresponding to the déjà vu notice. As described above, this setting process is a process executed when the current game time is one of a plurality of game times for executing the déjà vu notice, and is executed in the current game time. It is a process of setting a notice effect, a symbol stop effect, and a variable display pattern. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in this setting processing will be described.

In step S2201, the type information of the déjà vu advance notice effect stored in the déjà vu advance notice effect storage area 94d of the sound light side RAM 94 is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step S2202, and the type information of the stop symbol for déjà vu notice stored in the sound / light side RAM 94 is grasped. Then, the process proceeds to step S2203.

In step S2203, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the déjà vu warning counter area of the sound / light side RAM 94 is “1”. That is, it is determined whether or not the game times executed this time are the game times related to the reserved information that satisfies the condition for generating the déjà vu notice. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game times related to the hold information for which the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied are the game times related to the big hit or the occurrence of reach. Therefore, in the case of the game times related to the reserved information that satisfies the condition for generating the déjà vu notice, a relatively long display duration is set.

In step S2203, when it is determined that the value stored in the déjà vu counter area is not "1" (S2203: NO), that is, the game times executed this time are the conditions for generating the déjà vu notice. If it is not the game times related to the satisfied hold information, the process proceeds to step S2204, and within the display duration of the game times executed this time, the advance notice effect for déjà vu notice grasped in step S2201 can be executed a plurality of times. Judge whether or not.

If it is determined in step S2204 that the advance notice effect for déjà vu notice cannot be executed a plurality of times within the display duration (S2204: NO), the process proceeds to step S2205, and the advance notice effect for déjà vu notice is set to 1. Set to run once. Then, the process proceeds to step S2208.

If it is determined in step S2204 that the déjà vu advance notice effect can be executed a plurality of times within the display duration (S2204: YES), the process proceeds to step S2206 to perform the déjà vu advance notice effect. Set to run multiple times. Specifically, if the advance notice effect for the déjà vu notice can be executed twice within the display duration, the advance notice effect is set to be executed twice, and the déjà vu notice effect is executed within the display duration. When the advance notice effect for advance notice can be executed three times, the advance notice effect is set to be executed three times. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is set so that the advance notice effect for déjà vu notice is executed up to three times in one game. However, the maximum number of times of the advance notice effect executed in one game may be set to once or twice, or may be set to four or more times.

In addition, the number of times the notice effect for déjà vu notice can be executed within the display duration in this game time is set to M times, and the actual number of times the notice effect for déjà vu notice is executed in this game time is N. In the case of times, the relationship between M and N is not limited to M = N. The value of N can be arbitrarily set as long as the relationship of M ≧ N ≧ 1 is satisfied. For example, if the number of times the notice effect for déjà vu notice can be executed is 5 times within the display duration in this game, the actual number of times the notice effect for déjà vu notice is executed is 5 times or more. It can be set arbitrarily within a single range. The value of N can be determined by various methods such as determination by lottery and determination using table data in which M and N are associated with each other. In this way, the number of executions of the effect elements having the same content can be intentionally and actively determined.

After executing step S2206, the process proceeds to step S2207, and in this game round, after executing the advance notice effect for the déjà vu notice, the stop symbol for the déjà vu notice grasped in step S2202 is pseudo-stopped. Set to execute the symbol pseudo stop effect. Then, the process proceeds to step S2208.

After executing step S2205 or step S2207, in step S2208, as the stop symbol in the current game round, the stop symbol for déjà vu notice grasped in step S2202 is set. Then, the process proceeds to step S2212.

In step S2203, when it is determined that the value stored in the déjà vu notice counter area is "1" (S2201: YES), that is, the game times executed this time are the conditions for generating the déjà vu notice. If the game times are related to the reserved information in which is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2209, and the advance notice effect for déjà vu advance notice is set to be executed once, and the above-mentioned suggestion effect, battle effect, jackpot, or It is set to execute the result production corresponding to the out-of-order result in this game round. As described above, since the game times related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the déjà vu notice are the game times related to the big hit or the occurrence of reach, a relatively long display duration is set. When selecting each type of suggestion effect, battle effect, and result effect, within the time required for the advance notice effect for déjà vu notice from the display duration set in this game. Select a combination of feasible effects. After executing step S2209, the process proceeds to step S2210.

In step S2210, after executing the notice effect for déjà vu notice in this game round, the symbol pseudo stop effect for pseudo-stopping the stop symbol for déjà vu notice grasped in step S2202 is executed. Set to. Then, the process proceeds to step S2211.

In step S2211, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery of this game round is set. Since the details of the stop symbol setting process are the same as the process in step S2107 of FIG. 32, the description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process proceeds to step S2212.

In step S2212, a process for determining the variation display pattern of the current game times is executed. In the process, the information on the display duration of the current game is specified from the content of the variable command received this time, the information on the display duration, the information on the variable display time included in the display duration, and the information on the variable display time included in the display duration. And the variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of the information of the stop symbol for déjà vu notice specified in step S2202 is selected. When selecting the variation display pattern, the variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93e of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step S2212, this setting process ends.

<Update process at the start of fluctuation>
Next, the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of the fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 32: S2111) of the effect setting process.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an update process at the start of fluctuation. In the processes from step S2301 to step S2311 described below, the counter values of the various hold number counter areas are updated and the process related to the elimination of the jackpot hold flag is executed with the start of the game round.

As described above, the jackpot hold flag is a jackpot in the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit of the main control device 60. A flag that is stored when the corresponding pending information is included. Further, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored in the first erasure counter area, the order in which the hold information is the start target of the game round in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is. Information for identifying is stored. Further, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored in the second erasure counter area, the order in which the hold information is the start target of the game round in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is in what order. Information for identifying is stored. Therefore, when both the value of the first erasing counter area and the value of the second erasing counter area are "0" as the initial value, the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the main control device 60 or It means that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is not included in the hold information held and stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, and in this case, the jackpot hold flag is deleted. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described.

In step S2301, the information in the total hold quantity counter area is updated so that the total hold quantity stored in the total hold quantity counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S2302.

In step S2302, it is determined whether or not the variation command received this time is the first variation command. If it is determined in step S2302 that the command is for the first variation (S2302: YES), the process proceeds to step S2303, and the number of holds stored in the first hold number counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is decremented by 1. As such, the information of the first reserved quantity counter area is updated. Then, the process proceeds to step S2304.

In step S2304, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the first erasing counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is 1 or more. If it is determined in step S2304 that the value stored in the first erasing counter area is 1 or more (S2304: YES), the process proceeds to step S2305 and the value stored in the first erasing counter area is stored. Is updated by 1 so that the information in the first erasing counter area is decremented. Then, the process proceeds to step S2309.

If it is determined in step S2304 that the value stored in the first erasing counter area is not 1 or more (S2304: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312 without executing steps S2305 and 09 to S2311.

If it is determined in step S2302 that it is not the first fluctuation command (S2302: NO), that is, if the fluctuation command received this time is the second fluctuation command, the process proceeds to step S2306, and the sound light side RAM 94 The information in the second reserved quantity counter area is updated so that the reserved quantity stored in the second reserved quantity counter area is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S2307.

In step S2307, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the second erasing counter area of the sound / light side RAM 94 is “1” or more. If it is determined in step S2307 that the value stored in the second erasing counter area is 1 or more (S2307: YES), the process proceeds to step S2308, and the value stored in the second erasing counter area is stored. Is updated by 1 so that the information in the second erasing counter area is updated. Then, the process proceeds to step S2309.

If it is determined in step S2307 that the value stored in the second erasing counter area is not 1 or more (S2307: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312 without executing steps S2308, 09 to S2311.

In step S2309, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the first erasing counter area is "0". If it is determined in step S2309 that the value stored in the first erasing counter area is "0" (S2309: YES), the process proceeds to step S2310. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2309 that the value stored in the first erasing counter area is not "0" (S2309: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312 without executing steps S2310 and S2311. ..

In step S2310, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the second erasing counter area is “0”. If it is determined in step S2310 that the value stored in the second erasing counter area is "0" (S2310: YES), the process proceeds to step S2311 to erase the jackpot hold flag. That is, when the value stored in the first erasing counter area is "0" and the value stored in the second erasing counter area is "0", the jackpot hold flag is erased. .. Then, the process proceeds to step S2312. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2310 that the value stored in the second erasing counter area is not "0" (S2310: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312 without executing step S2311.

In the processes from step S2312 to step S2317 described below, a process related to erasing the déjà vu warning flag is executed. Hereinafter, specific processing will be described.

In step S2312, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the déjà vu warning counter area of the sound / light side RAM 94 is “1” or more. If it is determined in step S2312 that the value stored in the déjà vu warning counter area is not "1" or more (S2312: NO), the update process at the start of this fluctuation is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2312 that the value stored in the déjà vu warning counter area is "1" or more (S2312: YES), the process proceeds to step S2313.

In step S2313, the information in the déjà vu counter area is updated so that the value stored in the déjà vu counter area of the sound / light side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S2314.

In step S2314, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the déjà vu warning counter area of the sound / light side RAM 94 is “0”. If it is determined in step S2314 that the value stored in the déjà vu warning counter area is not "0", the update process at the start of this fluctuation is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value stored in the déjà vu warning counter area is "0", the process proceeds to step S2315.

In step S2315, it is determined whether or not the variation command received this time is the first variation command. If it is determined in step S2315 that the command is for the first variation, the process proceeds to step S2316, and the first déjà vu warning flag of the sound / light side RAM 94 is erased. After that, the update process at the start of this fluctuation is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2315 that the command is not the first fluctuation command, that is, if the fluctuation command received this time is the second fluctuation command, the process proceeds to step S2317, and the sound light side RAM 94 is second-viewed. Clear the feeling warning flag. After that, the update process at the start of this fluctuation is terminated.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, the process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly the main process that is repeatedly executed from the time the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and the process that is executed when a command is received from the voice emission control device 90. There are a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes the main process after the power is turned on, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, the main process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the main process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described.

In step S2401, the initial setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the character information in the compressed format stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, the information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also, make other settings necessary for initialization. Then, the process proceeds to step S2402.

In step S2402, the interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt enable setting is executed, infinite loop processing is executed in the main processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process executed every time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

<Command interrupt processing>
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S2501, the command storage process is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed by detecting the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105. In the V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is given every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Therefore, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed, so that the drawing of a new image can be started or displayed during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information inside is stored. Hereinafter, the processing details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described.

In step S2601, command correspondence processing is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt processing (FIG. 36), and the processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when an effect command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode specified by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, and when it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of drawing and displaying an image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command correspondence process (S2601), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so that there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the voice emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop symbol set by the voice emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the mode. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41.

In step S2602, the display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command correspondence process (S2601) or the like. .. Then, the process proceeds to step S2603.

In step S2603, task processing is executed. In the task process, the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting process (S2602). In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step S2604.

In step S2604, the drawing process is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S2603), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on this information, and together with a drive signal, displays an image drawn based on the information received at the time of the previous V interrupt process on the symbol display device 41. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process proceeds to step S2605, other processing is executed, and then the V interrupt processing is terminated.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, it is said that the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times for the player. It can give a feeling of déjà vu. A player who recognizes the déjà vu has a feeling of expectation that the déjà vu may have a special meaning, for example, a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the effect element having the same content is executed multiple times and then wins the jackpot, the effect element is executed in the expectation that the effect element having the same content is executed multiple times. Every time it is done, I always have a high expectation and pay attention to the production elements. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements to be executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied and the déjà vu notice is to be executed, the type and content of the effect element to be executed a plurality of times are intended. Can be set. It is also possible to intentionally set the number of executions of the effect element having the same content. Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability (frequency of occurrence) of the déjà vu notice when the jackpot is won or the reach occurs can be arbitrarily set.

The pachinko machine 10 may control the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may increase the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times with the passage of time. Hereinafter, specific examples will be described with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 38 is a time chart showing an example in which the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times is increased with the passage of time. In the example shown in FIG. 38, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect element A in the first game time P01, and also executes the effect element A in the next game time P02. The number of elements is one. Further, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect element B in addition to the effect element A in the game time P02, and also executes the effect element A and the effect element B in the next game time P03. The number of production elements of the content will be two. That is, the pachinko machine 10 increases the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times with the passage of time. In this way, the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the déjà vu increases with the passage of time, so that the player's expectation can be increased with the passage of time.

In the example shown in FIG. 38, the control for increasing the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times has been described, but the control for decreasing the number may be performed. The pachinko machine 10 increases or decreases the player's expectation by increasing or decreasing the number of production elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times, and gives the player's expectation, such as giving an intonation to the player's expectation. Can make a difference.

B. Second embodiment:
Next, the second embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment is the processing content related to the déjà vu notice. In the following description, the déjà vu notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be mainly described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

FIG. 39 is a time chart showing an example of a déjà vu notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 39 (A) and 39 (B) show Examples 1 and 2, which are two examples of déjà vu notice in the present embodiment.

In Example 1, a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 33 at a timing when the total number of reserved pieces CRN is 2, and the total number of held pieces CRN becomes 3, and the hold information related to the winning determines the condition for generating the déjà vu notice. It shows the case where it is satisfied. That is, the game time P03 shown as the third game time is the game time related to the reserved information satisfying the condition for generating the déjà vu notice.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the hold information related to the game time P03 satisfies the condition for generating the déjà vu notice, the pachinko machine 10 has a game time before the game time P03 related to the hold information satisfying the condition for generating the déjà vu notice. The content of the game effect A executed in P01 is stored. That is, the pachinko machine 10 stores the content of the game effect A to be executed in the game time P01 to be executed after determining that the hold information of the game time P03 satisfies the occurrence of the déjà vu notice. Then, the game times P02, which is the game times after the game time P01 in which the content of the game effect A is stored, and is the game times before the game time P03 related to the hold information satisfying the condition for generating the déjà vu notice. And in the game time P03, the content of the game effect A memorized in the game time P01 is reproduced.

In the first embodiment, as a déjà vu notice, the "directing element" having the same content is executed a plurality of times, but in the present embodiment, it is composed of a combination of the directing elements executed in the game time P01. "Game production" is executed multiple times as one unit. That is, exactly the same game effect as that of the game time P01 is reproduced as it is for a certain period in each game time of the game time P02 and the game time P03. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a déjà vu.

Further, in the game round P03, after the game effect A is executed, the suggestion effect, the battle effect, and the result effect (winning effect in this example) are executed as in the first embodiment. Then, after stopping the jackpot symbol in the game round P03, the jackpot effect is executed.

Specific processing will be described. When it is determined that the hold information related to the game time P03 satisfies the condition for generating the déjà vu notice, the voice emission control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 executes the game effect A for the game effect A of the game time P01 to be executed thereafter. Stores various setting data for this purpose. The various setting data includes setting data for operating hardware that actually executes the effect such as various lamps 47, data for command setting to be transmitted to the display control device 100, and the like.

After the game time P01 is completed, the voice emission control device 90 actually executes the game effect (various types) based on the various setting data for executing the stored game effect A at the start of the game time P02. It controls the lamp 47, the speaker 46, etc.). Immediately before the start of the game time P02, the game effect B to be executed is determined based on the hold information related to the game time P02, but the voice emission control device 90 hardens the game effect B at the start of the game time P02. The game effect A is preferentially executed without being executed in a manner that appears in the behavior of the hardware. The processing based on the setting data of the game effect B is executed as an internal process within a range that does not appear in the behavior of the hardware (various lamps 47, speakers 46, etc.) that executes the game effect.

As shown in FIG. 39 (A), when the display duration of the game time P02 is longer than the time for executing the game effect A, the voice emission control device 90 performs the game in the game time P02. At the same time as the execution of the effect A is completed, the process based on the setting data of the game effect B, which was executed as an internal process within the range that does not appear as the behavior of the hardware, is switched to the process that appears as the behavior of the hardware. That is, in the game turn P02, the player recognizes that the game effect B is executed from the middle after the game effect A is executed. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment. In this way, the pachinko machine 10 executes the déjà vu notice shown in Example 1.

Next, Example 2 of the déjà vu notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 39 (B). In Example 2, as in Example 1, the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 33 at the timing when the total number of reserved pieces CRN is 2, and the total number of reserved pieces CRN becomes 3, and the hold information related to the winning is already seen. It shows the case where the condition for generating the feeling notice is satisfied. That is, the game time P13 shown as the third game time is the game time related to the reserved information satisfying the condition for generating the déjà vu notice.

In Example 2, the voice emission control device 90 stores the content of the game effect C1 which is the game effect for a part of the game effect C0 executed in the game time P11. Then, the game times P12, which is the game times after the game times P11 in which the content of the game effect C1 is stored, and is the game times before the game times P13 related to the hold information satisfying the condition for generating the déjà vu notice. And in the game times P13, the contents of the memorized game effect C1 are reproduced. Specifically, since the display duration of the game time P12 is shorter than the time required to execute the game effect C1, the voice emission control device 90 plays the game for a part of the stored game effect C1 in the game time P12. The game production C1a, which is a production, is reproduced. On the other hand, since the display duration of the game time P13 is longer than the time required to execute the game effect C1, the voice emission control device 90 reproduces all the contents of the game effect C1 memorized in the game time P13. Further, in the game round P13, after the game effect C1 is executed, the suggestion effect, the battle effect, and the result effect (winning effect in this example) are executed. Then, after stopping the jackpot symbol in the game round P03, the jackpot effect is executed.

As a specific process, when it is determined that the hold information related to the game time P13 satisfies the condition for generating the déjà vu notice, the voice emission control device 90 executes the game after satisfying the condition for generating the déjà vu notice. Various setting data for executing the game effect C1 which is the game effect for a part of the game effect C in the time P11 is stored. The various setting data includes setting data for operating hardware that actually executes the effect such as various lamps 47, data for command setting to be transmitted to the display control device 100, and the like. In the present embodiment, when the length (time) of the game effect to be stored is set in advance, the display duration of the game effect C0 is longer than the set length, so that a part of the game time C0 The game production C1 which is the game production of the period is memorized.

Further, since the display duration of the game time P12 is shorter than the time required to execute the stored game effect C1, the voice emission control device 90 is a part of the stored game effect C1 in the game time P12. Reproduce the game production C1a. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment. In this way, the pachinko machine 10 gives the déjà vu notice shown in Example 2.

In the above description, the voice emission control device 90 stores the setting data transmitted to the display control device 100 to reproduce the game effect executed in the game times P01 in the game times after the game time P01. However, the display control device 100 stores the moving image data reproduced by the symbol display device 41 in the game times P01 as it is in the buffer, and in the game times after the game time P01, the stored moving image data is displayed and controlled again. The device 100 may transmit to the symbol display device 41 and reproduce the data.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the content of the executed game effect is memorized and reproduced. Therefore, at least for a part of the period, the game effect having exactly the same content is played. One will experience. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a déjà vu.

Further, as in the first embodiment, the player who recognizes the déjà vu may have a special meaning for the déjà vu, for example, a privilege may be given. You will have a sense of expectation. When the player experiences that the privilege is given after the game effect of the same content is executed multiple times, the game effect is executed in the expectation that the game effect of the same content is executed multiple times. Every time, he always pays attention to the game production with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the game effect having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the game effect to be executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

As shown in FIGS. 39 (A) and 39 (B), in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has the same suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the game effect having the same content has been reproduced. Execute after the game production of the contents of is reproduced. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game production of the same content has been reproduced, and to convince the player that the reproduction of the game production of the same content has a special meaning. be able to.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment may not select the operation acceptance effect including the content suggesting the acceptance of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player as the target of the game effect to be memorized and reproduced. When the operation acceptance effect is reproduced as a game effect, the operation acceptance effect may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu. Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not select the operation acceptance effect as the game effect to be memorized and reproduced, it is possible to suppress that different contents are executed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu.

C. Third Embodiment:
Next, the third embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment is the processing content related to the déjà vu notice. In the following description, the déjà vu notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be mainly described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

FIG. 40 is a time chart showing an example of a déjà vu notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 40 (A) and 40 (B) show Examples 1 and 2, which are two examples of déjà vu notice in the present embodiment. In Example 1, a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 33 at a timing when the total number of reserved pieces CRN is 3, and the total number of held pieces CRN becomes 4, and the hold information related to the winning determines the condition for generating the déjà vu notice. It shows the case where it is satisfied. That is, the game time P04 shown as the fourth game time is the game time related to the reserved information satisfying the condition for generating the déjà vu notice.

In the pachinko machine 10 in Example 1, when the hold information related to the game time P04 satisfies the condition for generating the déjà vu notice, the pachinko machine 10 is continuous before the game time P04 related to the hold information satisfying the condition for generating the déjà vu notice. The total time of the shortest display durations that can be determined as the display durations T1, T2, T3, and T4 of the plurality of game times P01, game times P02, game times P03, and game times P04 is calculated. The display duration of each game time P01 to P04 actually determined is set to Tre (Tre = T1 + T2 + T3 + T4), and the shortest display duration that can be determined as the display duration of each game time P01 to P04. Assuming that the total time is Tsum, the relationship of Tsum ≤ Tre is established.

Then, the pachinko machine 10 provides a production element having the same content that can be executed a plurality of times within the calculated total time Tsum by the end of the game round P04 related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the déjà vu notice. Run multiple times. In Example 1 shown in FIG. 40, the pachinko machine 10 is an effect element having the same content that can be executed a plurality of times within a time Tsum equal to or less than the time Tre, which is the display duration of each of the game times P01 to P04 actually determined. A, the effect element B, and the effect element C are executed. Further, in the game round P04, after the game effect A is executed, the suggestion effect, the battle effect, and the result effect (winning effect in this example) are executed.

The pachinko machine 10 of Example 1 executes the effect element A four times, the effect element B three times, and the effect element C twice within the time Tsum. More specifically, the effect elements to be executed a plurality of times are, first, only the effect element A, then the effect element A and the effect element B, and then the effect element A, the effect element B, and the effect element C. The number of effect elements with the same content to be executed multiple times is increased with the passage of time.

Further, as shown in the figure, in the pachinko machine 10 of Example 1, the effect element A to be executed in the second, third, and fourth times is executed across the game times. That is, the timing at which the variation display of the symbol is stopped is different from the timing at which one effect element A ends. Hereinafter, it will be described with reference to FIG. 41.

FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display surface 41a when the déjà vu notice is executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, when the déjà vu notice is executed, the display surface 41a is divided into a display area 41aS and a display area 41aL. Then, in the display area 41aS, the variable display and the stop display of the symbol are executed. The variable display and the stop display of the symbol in the display area 41aS are executed in the same cycle as the display duration of each of the game times P01 to P04.

On the other hand, in the display area 41aL, the display corresponding to the effect element A, the effect element B, and the effect element C is displayed. As the effect element A, for example, an effect element based on an image using the entire display area 41aL is displayed. More specifically, a moving image is displayed as a background image of the display area 41aL, and a moving image composed of a combination of the background image and an object image displayed in front of the background image is displayed. As the effect element B and the effect element C, for example, a cut-in notice effect for displaying a predetermined image in front of the background image, an object notice effect for displaying a predetermined object image in front of the background image, and a background image are usually used. Background change notice effect that changes to a different mode from time, character notice effect that causes a predetermined character to perform a predetermined operation, lamp light emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a predetermined pattern, and a symbol sequence with a predetermined scroll pattern. Examples include a variable symbol sequence variation effect, and a reach effect in which the remaining one symbol sequence is varied while two identical symbols are stopped on at least one effective line. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot effect executed after the end of the game round P04 is executed by displaying a moving image using the entire display surface 41a.

As described with reference to FIG. 41, for example, the display surface 41a is divided into a display area 41aS and a display area 41aL, and the variation display and stop display of the symbol in the display area 41aS and the effect element in the display area 41aL. By executing the display in different cycles, the cycle of the variable display and the stop display of the symbol (that is, the cycle synchronized with the actual display duration) and the effect element A, the effect element B, and the effect element C are executed. It is possible to have a different mode from the cycle.

Next, Example 2 of the déjà vu notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 40 (B). In Example 2, as in Example 1, the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 33 at the timing when the total number of reserved pieces CRN is 3, and the total number of reserved pieces CRN becomes 4, and the hold information related to the winning is already seen. It shows the case where the condition for generating the feeling notice is satisfied. That is, the game time P14 shown as the fourth game time is the game time related to the reserved information satisfying the condition for generating the déjà vu notice.

In Example 2, the time required for the effect element A, which is the target to be executed a plurality of times, is longer than the display duration of the game times P11. That is, the pachinko machine 10 executes one effect element A across the game times. The pachinko machine 10 of Example 2 executes the effect element A as an effect element that can be executed three times in the total time Tsum of the shortest display duration that can be determined as the display duration of the four game times P11 to P14. .. As shown in Example 2, the number of game times required to execute the effect element having the same content multiple times (in Example 2, the game times are 4 times) and the number of times the effect element having the same content is executed (Example 2). Then, the effect element A may be different from (3 times). The type of effect element to be executed a plurality of times as the same content and the number of times the effect element is executed may be determined according to the calculated total time Tsum value. In this case, the type of the effect element to be executed a plurality of times as the same content and the number of executions thereof may be determined by using the table data in which the total time Tsum is associated with the type of the effect element and the number of executions.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the same content that can be executed a plurality of times within the total time (Tsum) of the shortest display duration that can be determined as the display duration of each game. Since the effect element of is executed, one effect element to be executed multiple times can be completed within the display duration (T1, T2, T3, T4), which is the time actually required for one game. Not limited. That is, it is possible to execute the effect element having the same content a plurality of times across a plurality of consecutive game times before the game time related to the hold information satisfying the condition for generating the déjà vu notice. As shown in Example 2, it is also possible to execute one time of the effect element A, which is the target to be executed a plurality of times, across the game times. Therefore, it is possible to select the effect element to be executed a plurality of times without considering the relationship between the execution time of one effect element and the display duration of one game time.

Furthermore, since the effect element having the same content that can be executed multiple times is executed multiple times within the total time (Tsum) of the shortest display duration that can be determined, the effect element having the same content can be executed multiple times. The required time is equal to or less than the total display duration (Tre) of each actual game round. Therefore, when the production element having the same content is executed multiple times across a plurality of consecutive game times before the game time related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the déjà vu notice, the time will be insufficient. It is possible to avoid it and surely execute the effect element having the same content multiple times.

Further, as in the first embodiment, since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times (at least twice), it is already seen that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times for the player. It can give a feeling (déjà vu). A player who recognizes the déjà vu has a feeling of expectation that the déjà vu may have a special meaning, for example, a privilege may be given. When the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element having the same content is executed multiple times, the effect element is executed in the expectation that the effect element having the same content is executed multiple times. Every time, I always have a high expectation and pay attention to the production elements. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements to be executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

As shown in FIGS. 40A and 40B, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has the same suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the effect elements having the same contents have been reproduced. It is executed after the effect element of the contents of is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed multiple times, and it is a game that the effect element having the same content has been executed multiple times has a special meaning. Can be convinced.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment may not select the operation acceptance effect element including the content suggesting the acceptance of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times. When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu. Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not select the operation acceptance effect element as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the execution of the effect element having different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 is composed of a display of a moving image as a background image of the display area 41aL and a combination of a background image and an object image displayed in front of the background image as an effect element to be executed a plurality of times with the same content. Video display, cut-in notice effect, notice effect by displaying an object image such as a predetermined character in front of the background image, background change notice effect that changes the background image to a different mode from normal, reach effect, In addition, the player has already seen the effect using various effect elements such as the effect of the physically moving accessory provided on the front door frame 14 and the game board 30, and the effect of lighting and blinking by various lamps 47. Can give a feeling. Therefore, it is possible to direct the player's attention to various production elements as to whether or not the production elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times.

The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment controls the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times. In Example 1 of the present embodiment, first, the effect element A is executed, the number of effect elements having the same content is one, and then the game effect B is executed, and the number of effect elements having the same content is two. Then, the effect element C is executed, and the number of effect elements having the same content becomes three. In the present embodiment, control is performed to increase the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times, but control may be performed to decrease the number. The pachinko machine 10 increases or decreases the player's expectation by increasing or decreasing the number of production elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times, and gives the player's expectation, such as giving an intonation to the player's expectation. Can make a difference.

Further, in Example 1 of the present embodiment, first, only the effect element A, then the effect element A and the effect element B, and then the effect element A, the effect element B, and the effect element C, and so on. The same content to be executed multiple times in the period from the determination that the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied to the end of the game times (game times P04) related to the hold information satisfying the conditions for generating the déjà vu notice. The number of production elements is increasing over time. Therefore, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the déjà vu increases with the passage of time, the expectation of the player can be increased with the passage of time.

D. Fourth Embodiment:
Next, the fourth embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment is the processing content related to the déjà vu notice. In the following description, the déjà vu notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be mainly described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted. Hereinafter, specific processing in this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 42 is a time chart showing an example of a déjà vu notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. In the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu notice based on the hold information is satisfied before the hold information is subject to the jackpot lottery. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, it is determined whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu notice based on the hold information is satisfied when the hold information is the target of the jackpot lottery. That is, it is determined whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu notice based on the hold information is satisfied, and the jackpot lottery based on the hold information is performed immediately before the start of the game round P01 related to the hold information.

Further, in the first embodiment, as an embodiment of the déjà vu notice, the effect elements having the same contents are executed a plurality of times over a plurality of game times. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, as an aspect of déjà vu notice, an effect element A, an effect element B, and an effect element C that can be executed a plurality of times within the display duration of the game times are provided. , It is executed a plurality of times in one game round P01 related to the hold information determined to satisfy the condition for generating the déjà vu notice. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect element A four times, the effect element B three times, and the effect element C twice in the game times P01. More specifically, the effect elements to be executed a plurality of times are, first, only the effect element A, then the effect element A and the effect element B, and then the effect element A, the effect element B, and the effect element C. The number of effect elements with the same content to be executed multiple times is increased with the passage of time.

Similar to the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the effect element A a plurality of times to suggest to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. Will be executed later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 executes a battle effect and a result effect (victory effect) after executing the suggestion effect. Then, after the end of the game round P01, the jackpot effect is executed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in at least one game time, the effect elements that can be executed a plurality of times within the display duration of the game time are performed a plurality of times with the same content. Since it is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu in one game. Further, as in the first embodiment, since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, the player is given a déjà vu that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times. Can be given. A player who recognizes the déjà vu has a feeling of expectation that the déjà vu may have a special meaning, for example, a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element having the same content is executed multiple times, the effect element is expected to be executed multiple times with the same content. Every time it is executed, he always pays attention to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements to be executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect suggesting to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after executing the effect element having the same content a plurality of times. To do. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed multiple times, and it is a game that the effect element having the same content has been executed multiple times has a special meaning. Can be convinced.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment may not select the operation acceptance effect element including the content suggesting the acceptance of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times. When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu. Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not select the operation acceptance effect element as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the execution of the effect element having different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu.

The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment controls the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times. In the present embodiment, first, the effect element A is executed, the number of effect elements with the same content is one, then the game effect B is executed, and the number of effect elements with the same content is two. By executing the effect element C, the number of effect elements having the same content becomes three. In the present embodiment, control is performed to increase the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times, but control may be performed to decrease the number. The pachinko machine 10 increases or decreases the player's expectation by increasing or decreasing the number of production elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times, and gives the player's expectation, such as giving an intonation to the player's expectation. Can make a difference.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same effect element A is executed first, then the effect element A and the effect element B, and then the effect element A, the effect element B, and the effect element C, and so on. The number of production elements of the content is increased with the passage of time. Therefore, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the déjà vu increases with the passage of time, the expectation of the player can be increased with the passage of time.

E. Fifth embodiment:
Next, the sixth embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment is the processing content related to the déjà vu notice. In the following description, the déjà vu notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be mainly described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

In the above embodiment, the display duration of each game is not controlled based on the determination of whether or not to execute the déjà vu notice. In the present embodiment, when the déjà vu notice is executed, at least two of the game times before the game times related to the hold information for which the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied are Control is performed so as to secure a display duration of a predetermined length. Then, in each game in which the display duration of the predetermined length is secured, the effect elements having the same contents that can be executed within the display duration of the predetermined length are executed. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an outline of processing executed by the main control device 60 and the voice emission control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes the processing content executed by the voice emission control device 90 as the hold command corresponding processing in the first embodiment. That is, the main control device 60 executes the déjà vu notice generation lottery process. Then, when the lottery for generating the déjà vu notice is won, for example, when the déjà vu notice is executed using three game times, the display duration of the three game times is the déjà vu. Reserve a predetermined length for the execution of the notice. Specifically, when the main control device 60 determines the display duration of each of the three game times for executing the déjà vu notice, the value of the variable type counter CS related to each of the three game times and the value of the variable type counter CS. In the collation with the display duration table stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, the déjà vu notice execution stored in advance in the display duration table storage area 63d as the display duration table used for collation. Use the display duration table for.

The main control device 60 controls and determines the display duration of the three game times to the length for executing the déjà vu notice, and then emits voice by using the information of the display duration of each determined game time as a command. It is transmitted to the control device 90. The voice emission control device 90 determines an effect element having the same content that can be executed within the display duration of each game time reserved for execution of the déjà vu notice in the main control device 60. By doing so, it is possible to control the length of the display duration of the game times for executing the déjà vu notice.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display duration of a predetermined length is secured for executing the déjà vu notice, and the display duration of a predetermined length is secured. Since the effect elements with the same content that can be executed in each game time are executed, it is possible to avoid a shortage of time required to execute the same effect element in each game time, and surely the same content in each game time. It is possible to execute the production element of.

In addition, as the effect elements used for the visual feeling notice, a cut-in notice effect for displaying a predetermined image in front of the background image, an object notice effect for displaying a predetermined object image in front of the background image, and a background image are used. Background change notice effect that changes to a different mode from normal time, character notice effect that causes a predetermined character to perform a predetermined operation, lamp light emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a predetermined pattern, symbol sequence with a predetermined scroll pattern A symbol row variation effect that fluctuates, a reach effect that fluctuates the remaining one symbol row while two identical symbols are stopped on at least one effective line, and a symbol stop that stops a predetermined combination of symbols. It is possible to adopt a production or the like. Since it is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu by using various production elements, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the same content is executed multiple times for various production elements. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, a suggestion effect suggesting to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times as a déjà vu notice is executed after the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times. To do. It is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed multiple times, and to inform the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed multiple times has a special meaning. You can be convinced.

Further, as in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 may control the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times. By increasing or decreasing the number of production elements with the same content that are executed multiple times, it is possible to change the player's expectation, such as increasing or decreasing the player's expectation or giving inflection to the player's expectation. it can.

Further, in the period from the determination that the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied to the end of the game round related to the reserved information satisfying the condition for generating the déjà vu notice, the production of the same content to be executed a plurality of times The number of elements may be increased over time. Since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the déjà vu increases with the passage of time, the expectation of the player can be increased with the passage of time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display duration of each game time for executing the déjà vu notice is first determined, and then the effect element to be executed as the déjà vu notice is executed based on the determined display duration. Although it is decided, other processing forms can be adopted without being limited to such a processing form.

For example, it is possible to first determine the effect element to be executed as the déjà vu notice, and then secure the display duration of the length that can execute the effect element to be executed as the déjà vu notice in each game. .. As a specific process, for example, when the main control device 60 performs a déjà vu notice generation lottery process and decides to execute the déjà vu notice, the production of the same content to be executed first as the déjà vu notice is produced. Determine the element. After that, the main control device 60 secures a display duration of a length capable of executing the effect element having the same content as a déjà vu notice in each game. Then, the main control device 60 transmits to the voice emission control device 90 as a command the display duration of each game time for executing the déjà vu notice and the content of the effect element to be executed as the déjà vu notice.

By adopting such a processing form, it is possible to secure a display duration of a length that allows the same effect element to be executed in each game, so that the time required to execute the same effect element can be secured. However, it is possible to avoid a shortage in each game time, and to surely execute the production element having the same content in each game time.

F. Sixth Embodiment:
Next, the sixth embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment is that the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a function of acquiring time information and processing contents related to déjà vu notice. In the following description, the déjà vu notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be mainly described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a function of acquiring time information, and also has a function of executing a time-linked effect element, which is an effect element that is continuously executed with the passage of time based on the acquired time information. .. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 includes an RTC module (RTC: Real Time Clock) and acquires time information from the RTC module. The acquisition of the time information is not limited to the acquisition from the RTC module, and other methods that are technically possible for the acquisition of the time information, such as acquisition from the outside of the pachinko machine 10, may be adopted.

Further, in this description, among the effect elements executed by the pachinko machine 10, the effect elements that are continuously executed with the passage of time based on the time information are referred to as "time-linked effect elements" and are based on the time information. An effect element that is executed without a time is called a "non-time-linked effect element".

FIG. 44 is a time chart showing an example of a déjà vu notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 44 also shows a time-linked effect element executed by another pachinko machine of the same model as the pachinko machine 10 installed in the same game hall as the pachinko machine 10 for comparison.

As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 and other pachinko machines start executing the time-linked effect element at time T0. Then, the pachinko machine 10 and other pachinko machines continuously execute the time-linked effect element with the passage of time. In this description, the other pachinko machine executes a series of preset time-linked effect elements. For convenience of explanation, in order to indicate the time position of a series of time-linked effect elements, the series of time-linked effect elements executed by other pachinko machines has a time position as an index indicating the time position of the time-linked effect element. TP1 to TP20 are shown. It should be noted that each temporal position shown in the figure is described in a format in which the reference numeral of "TP" is omitted.

As shown in the figure, in the pachinko machine 10, the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 33 at the timing when the total number of reserved numbers CRN is 3, and the total number of reserved numbers CRN becomes 4, and the hold information related to the winning is already visible. It shows the case where the condition for generating the feeling notice is satisfied and the déjà vu notice is executed. That is, the game time P04 shown as the fourth game time is the game time related to the reserved information satisfying the condition for generating the déjà vu notice.

The pachinko machine 10 stores the time position TP of the time-linked effect element executed at the timing when the game round P01 is started after determining that the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied as a specific time position. .. In the example shown in FIG. 44, the pachinko machine 10 stores the time position TP3 of the time-linked effect element as a specific time position. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is a game time in which execution is started after it is determined that the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, and the game time P04 or earlier related to the hold information which is determined to satisfy the condition for generating the déjà vu notice. With the timing of starting each of the game times P01, the game time P02, the game time P03, and the game time P04, which are the game times of the above, the time at which the time-linked effect element is stored in advance at a specific time position. The target position TP3 is used as the starting position.

Further, as shown in the figure, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 satisfies the condition for generating the déjà vu notice, and the non-time interlocking effect element is executed together with the time interlocking effect element, the pachinko machine 10 is time interlocked. The effect element and the non-time interlocking effect element are executed multiple times. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect suggesting to the player that the same effect element has been executed a plurality of times after executing the effect element (time-linked effect element and non-time-linked effect element) a plurality of times. To do. Then, after executing the suggestion effect, the battle effect and the result effect (victory effect) are executed.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 can control the number of non-time interlocking effect elements to be executed a plurality of times. In the present embodiment, the non-time interlocking effect element to be executed a plurality of times is only the non-time interlocking effect element A in the game time P01, the non-time interlocking effect element A and the non-time interlocking effect element B in the game time P02, and the game time P03. Then, the non-time interlocking effect element A, the non-time interlocking effect element B, the non-time interlocking effect element C, the non-time interlocking effect element A, the non-time interlocking effect element B, and the non-time interlocking effect element C in the game time P04. The number of non-time-linked effect elements having the same content to be executed multiple times is increased with the passage of time.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time-linked effect elements executed during at least a part of the period are executed a plurality of times, so that the player can perform an effect with a new interest. Can be provided. In addition, since the time-linked effect element executed during at least a part of the period is executed a plurality of times, the player has a sense of déjà vu that the time-linked effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times. Can be given. A player who recognizes the déjà vu has a feeling of expectation that the déjà vu may have a special meaning, for example, a privilege may be given.

Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the time-linked effect element is executed a plurality of times, the time-linked effect element is executed in the expectation that the time-linked effect element is executed a plurality of times. Every time, he always has a high expectation and pays attention to the time-linked production element. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the time-linked effect element is executed a plurality of times, and to preferably increase the player's attention to the time-linked effect element executed based on the time information. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when a plurality of pachinko machines having the same characteristics as the pachinko machine 10 are installed in the game hall like the other pachinko machines shown in FIG. 44, the pachinko machines satisfying the condition for generating the notice of sighting. Even if the same time-linked effect is started from the same time T0 between the machine 10 and the pachinko machine that does not satisfy the condition for generating the notice of sighting, there is a time difference in the time-linked effect element to be executed ( Misalignment) occurs. As a result, in addition to the player of the pachinko machine 10, the players of the surrounding pachinko machines also recognize that the déjà vu notice has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who is playing the game with the pachinko machine 10 that satisfies the condition for generating the déjà vu notice.

Further, since the pachinko machine 10 executes the time-linked effect element with the time position TP3, which is a specific time position, as the start position in each game time of the game times P01 to the game times P04, the pachinko machine 10 is directed to the player. , It is possible to recognize a strong déjà vu for the portion after the time position TP3, which is a specific time position of the time-linked effect element. Further, the pachinko machine 10 synchronizes the start timing of the time-linked effect element to be executed a plurality of times with the start timing of each game round (game round P01 to game round P04) to provide a stronger déjà vu. Can be given to a person.

Further, if the start position of the time-linked effect element that starts at the start timing of each game is set in advance as the processing of the déjà vu notice, even once among the time-linked effect elements. There is a possibility that the déjà vu notice using the time-linked effect element may be executed from a time position that has not been executed. For example, if it is set to execute the time-linked effect element from a specific time position "TP10" each time, triggered by the start timing of each game time from the game time P01 to the game time P04, the game time P01 The time-linked effect element that was executed as a continuous series of flows (temporal positions TP1 to TP2) until the first game time P01 of the game times P04 is started is the start of the first game time P01. The time-linked effect element is started and executed from a specific temporal position TP10 that has never been executed, as well as being suddenly interrupted at the timing of. In addition, the temporal positions TP3 to TP9 will not be executed.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is executed at the timing when the game time P01, which is started after the time when the process of determining that the game time P04 satisfies the condition for generating the visual sensation notice is executed, is started. The time position TP3 of the time-linked effect element is memorized as a specific time position, and the memorized specific time position TP3 is executed a plurality of times after the second time (game times P02 to game times P04). Since it is the start position of the time-linked effect element, it is executed once as a continuous series of flow of the time-linked effect element (temporal positions TP1 to TP5), and the second and subsequent times of the time-linked effect element to be executed multiple times. The temporal position TP3 can be set as the start position of. Therefore, the time-linked effect element that has been executed as a continuous series of flows (temporal positions TP1 to TP2) until the first game times 01 of the game times P01 to the game times P04 is started is the first. It is possible to avoid a sudden interruption at the start timing of the game round P01, and to prevent the time-linked effect element from being started / executed from a specific temporal position TP10 that has never been executed. In addition, all parts of the time-linked effect element (temporal positions TP1 to TP20) will be executed, allowing the player to experience all parts of the time-linked effect element.

Further, since the pachinko machine 10 executes the non-time-linked effect element a plurality of times in addition to the time-linked effect element, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of déjà vu. Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment can control the number of non-time interlocking effect elements to be executed a plurality of times. Therefore, by increasing or decreasing the number of non-time-linked effect elements to be executed multiple times, the player's expectation can be increased or decreased, or the player's expectation can be changed by inflection. Can be done. In the pachinko machine 10, since the number of non-time-linked effect elements increases with the passage of time, the player's expectation can be increased with the passage of time.

The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment may not select the operation acceptance effect element including the content suggesting the acceptance of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player as the non-time interlocking effect element to be executed a plurality of times. When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu. Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not select the operation acceptance effect element as the non-time interlocking effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent the effect element having different contents from being executed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. can do. Further, since the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggestion effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect elements (time-linked effect element, non-time-linked effect element) having the same content have been executed a plurality of times. At the same time, it is possible to convince the player that the fact that the effect elements having the same content are executed multiple times has a special meaning.

G. Seventh Embodiment:
The pachinko machine 10 of the first to sixth embodiments has a configuration in which an operation acceptance effect element is not selected as an effect element for déjà vu notice, but the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a déjà vu advance notice. As an effect element for use, a button effect, which is one of the operation acceptance effect elements, may be selected. In the following, a case where the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, and the button effect is executed a plurality of times will be described.

<Example 1 of déjà vu notice using button effect>
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a flow when the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XA as the effect element for déjà vu notice and executes the button effect XA twice. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect modes XA1 and XA2 and the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XA.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts the execution of the first button effect XA, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect mode XA1 including the content suggesting the player to press the effect operation button 24 (S2701). In the example shown in FIG. 46, the effect mode XA1 is an effect mode in which an image of the treasure box is displayed and characters and an image prompting the pressing of the effect operation button 24 are displayed. However, the effect mode XA1 may be another mode.

If the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time after executing the effect mode XA1 (S2702: YES), the effect mode XA1 and the effect mode XA1 are triggered by the press of the effect operation button 24. Executes a different production mode XA2 (S2703). In the example shown in FIG. 46, the effect mode XA2 is an effect mode in which a female character appears from the treasure chest. However, the effect mode XA2 may be another mode. On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within a predetermined time (S2702: NO), the effect mode XA2 is not executed while the effect mode XA1 is being executed.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts the execution of the second button effect XA, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect mode XA1 (S2704 or S2707) as in the case of the first button effect XA. Then, when the effect mode XA2 was executed when the first button effect XA was executed, the effect operation button 24 was pressed or not after the effect mode XA1 was executed (S2704). In any case (S2705), the effect mode XA2 is executed (S2706). Specifically, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S2705: YES), the effect mode XA2 is executed with the effect button 24 being pressed (S2705: YES). S2706). On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S2705: NO), the effect mode XA2 is executed with the elapse of the predetermined time (S2706).

On the other hand, when the effect mode XA2 was not executed when the first button effect was executed, the effect operation button 24 was pressed or not after the effect mode XA1 was executed (S2707). In any case (S2708), the effect mode XA2 is not executed while the effect mode XA1 is being executed.

When the second button effect XA is completed, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XA having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (twice in the above example). The effect F is executed (S2709). In the example shown in FIG. 46, the suggestion effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as "Maybe deja vu !?" to the player. However, the suggestion effect F may be in another mode. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the above-mentioned battle effect.

When the button effect XA is executed three or more times, the same control as when the second button effect XA is executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestion effect F is executed after the end of the last button effect XA. Good.

As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, the button effect is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, the presence / absence of pressing the effect operation button 24, the timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.). May be done. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the button effect XA is executed a plurality of times as an effect element for déjà vu advance notice, when the effect mode XA2 is executed in the first button effect XA, the player inputs. Regardless of the operation mode of the operation, if the effect mode XA2 is executed in the second and subsequent button effect XA, while the effect mode X-like A2 is not executed in the first button effect XA, the player inputs. Regardless of the operation mode of the operation, the effect mode XA2 is not executed in the second and subsequent button effect XA. Therefore, even when the button effect XA is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XA to be executed the first time and the second and subsequent times can be the same. Then, as in the above embodiment, it is possible to give the player a déjà vu that the button effect XA having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

A player who recognizes the déjà vu has a feeling of expectation that the déjà vu may have a special meaning, for example, a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element having the same content is executed multiple times, the effect element is expected to be executed multiple times with the same content. Every time it is executed, he always pays attention to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements to be executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect F is executed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the button effect XA having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the same. It is possible to convince the player that the button effect XA of the content is executed a plurality of times has a special meaning. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestion effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestion effect F.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the effect mode XA2 is triggered by the press of the effect operation button 24. Since it is executed, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XA, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the player does not press the effect operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the effect mode XA2 is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed. can do. Further, even if the player does not press the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the effect mode XA2 is executed, so that the game can be given unexpectedness and the interest of the game can be improved. Can be done. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the effect mode XA2 at a predetermined timing without pressing the effect operation button 24 or the elapse of a predetermined time.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, the button effect XA is selected as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, and the button effect XA is performed a plurality of times. When executing, the time parameter indicating whether or not the pressing of the effect operation button 24 is within the acceptable time is not displayed. The reason for this will be explained. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player recognizes that the effect operation button 24 is pressed at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, and the button effects have the same contents. Even if is executed a plurality of times, the player may not feel a sense of déjà vu for the button effect executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as an effect element for déjà vu notice, so that the player does not easily feel the déjà vu. It is possible to prevent it from being stored. However, when the pachinko machine 10 satisfies the condition for generating the déjà vu notice, the button effect is selected as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, and the button effect is executed a plurality of times, the time is required. It may be configured to display parameters.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied before the pending information is subject to the jackpot lottery, and the déjà vu notice is generated. When it is determined that the conditions are satisfied, the button effect XA, which is the target to be executed multiple times before the pending information determined to satisfy the conditions for generating the déjà vu notice is subject to the jackpot lottery. Starts executing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for déjà vu over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied when the hold information is subject to the jackpot lottery, and the button effect is produced in one game round related to the hold information. It may be configured to execute XA a plurality of times.

The pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a changing means for changing the mode of the effect operation button 24 to a mode when the effect is pressed (that is, a mode recessed by pressing). Then, the changing means had the effect operation button 24 pressed when the effect operation button 24 was not pressed (S2705: NO) and when the effect mode XA2 was executed (S2706). It is advisable to change the mode in the case. If such a changing means is provided, the mode of the effect operation button 24 is changed, so that the game can be given unexpectedness, and the effect mode XA2 can be used even though the effect operation button 24 is not pressed. It can be persuasive to be carried out. The changing means can be realized, for example, by providing an actuator such as a solenoid or a motor inside the effect operation button 24.

In the present embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XA is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the effect operation button 24 may be used. Control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XA may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition such as the time and the number of times the button is pressed. ..

Further, in the above example, the effect operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation accepting means for accepting the input operation by the player, but the operation accepting means is not limited to this. For example, as an operation receiving means, a stick or lever operated by the player back and forth or left and right, a button for detecting the hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting the hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, etc. are adopted. Can be done. Hereinafter, an example of the processing of the button effect XA will be described.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when the button effect XA is executed as an effect element (notice effect) for déjà vu advance notice. In step S2801, it is determined whether or not the first executed flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light side RAM 94. For the first executed flag, after the déjà vu notice flag is stored, that is, after the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, the déjà vu notice notice effect (button effect XA) has already been executed once. It is a flag for specifying whether or not it has been completed in the sound light side MPU 92.

In step S2801, when it is determined that the first executed flag is not stored (S2801: NO), that is, when the button effect XA is not executed even once after the déjà vu notice flag is stored. , Step S2802, the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect executing means are made to execute the above-described effect mode XA1. The effect mode XA1 includes a content that suggests the player to press the effect operation button 24. Then, the process proceeds to step S2803.

In step S2803, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S2803 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S2803: YES), the process proceeds to step S2804, and the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect execution means are described above. The production mode XA2 is executed. After executing step S2804, the process proceeds to step S2805, and the button pressing flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound / light side RAM 94. The button pressing flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 that the effect operation button 24 was pressed when the first button effect XA was executed. After executing step S2805, the process proceeds to step S2807.

If it is determined in step S2803 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S2803: NO), the process proceeds to step S2806 to determine whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S2806 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S2806: NO), the process returns to step S2803, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of pressing the effect operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time elapses. If it is determined in step S2806 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S2806: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time, the step S2804 and step S2805 are not executed. Proceed to S2807.

In step S2807, after the first executed flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light side RAM 94, the first button effect XA is ended.

In step S2801, when it is determined that the first executed flag is stored (S2801: YES), that is, when the button effect XA has already been executed at least once after the déjà vu notice flag is stored. Proceeds to step S2808, and causes the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect executing means to execute the effect mode XA1. Then, the process proceeds to step S2809.

In step S2809, it is determined whether or not the button press flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light side RAM 94. In step S2809, when it is determined that the button pressing flag is not stored (S2809: NO), that is, when the effect operation button 24 is not pressed when the first button effect XA is executed, the effect operation button 24 is not pressed. The process proceeds to step S2810, and the process waits until the predetermined time elapses, after which the second and subsequent button effect XA ends without executing the effect mode XA2 (step S2812).

In step S2809, when it is determined that the button pressing flag is stored (S2809: YES), that is, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed when the first button effect XA is executed. , Step S2811, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed in the button effect XA being executed this time.

If it is determined in step S2811 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S2811: YES), the process proceeds to step S2812, and the effect mode XA2 is applied to the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect execution means. Is executed, and then the second and subsequent button effect XA is finished.

If it is determined in step S2811 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S2811: NO), the process proceeds to step S2813 to determine whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S2813 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S2813: NO), the process returns to step S2811 to determine whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of pressing the effect operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time elapses. If it is determined in step S2813 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S2813: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S2812 to display the symbol as the effect execution means. After the device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 are made to execute the effect mode XA2, the second and subsequent button effect XA are finished.

According to the above processing, the button effect XA can be executed a plurality of times with the same content regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. The process described above is an example, and the button effect XA process may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 2 of déjà vu notice using button effect>
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a flow when the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XB as the effect element for déjà vu notice and executes the button effect XB twice. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect modes XB1, XB2, XB3 and the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XB.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts the execution of the first button effect XB, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect mode XB1 including the content suggesting the player to press the effect operation button 24 (S2901). In the example shown in FIG. 49, the effect mode XB1 is an effect mode in which an image of the treasure box is displayed and characters and an image prompting the pressing of the effect operation button 24 are displayed. However, the effect mode XB1 may be another mode.

If the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time after executing the effect mode XB1 (S2902: YES), the effect mode XB1 and the effect mode XB1 are triggered by the press of the effect operation button 24. Executes a different production mode XB2 (S2903). In the example shown in FIG. 49, the effect mode XB2 is an effect mode in which a female character appears from the treasure chest. However, the effect mode XB2 may be another mode. On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S2902: NO), the effect mode XB3, which is different from the effect mode XB1 and the effect mode XB2, is executed (S2907). .. In the example shown in FIG. 49, the effect mode XB3 is an effect mode in which the fish character carries away the treasure chest. However, the effect mode XB3 may be another mode.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts the execution of the second button effect XB, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect mode XB1 (S2904 or S2908) as in the case of the first button effect XB. Then, when the effect mode XB2 is executed when the first button effect XB is executed, the effect operation button 24 may or may not be pressed after the effect mode XB1 is executed (S2904). In any case (S2905), the effect mode XB2 is executed (S2906). Specifically, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S2905: YES), the effect mode XB2 is executed with the effect button 24 being pressed (S2905: YES). S2906). On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S2905: NO), the effect mode XB2 is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed (S2906).

On the other hand, when the effect mode XB3 was executed when the first button effect XB was executed, the effect operation button 24 was pressed or not after the effect mode XB1 was executed (S2908). In any case (S2909), the effect mode XB3 is executed (S2910). Specifically, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S2909: YES), the effect mode XB3 is executed with the effect button 24 being pressed (S2909: YES). S2910). On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S2909: NO), the effect mode XB3 is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed (S2910).

When the second button effect XB is completed, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XB having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (twice in the above example). The effect F is executed (S2911). In the example shown in FIG. 49, the suggestion effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as "Maybe deja vu !?" to the player. However, the suggestion effect F may be in another mode. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the above-mentioned battle effect.

When the button effect XB is executed three or more times, the same control as when the second button effect XB is executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestion effect F is executed after the end of the last button effect XB. Good.

As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, the button effect is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, the presence / absence of pressing the effect operation button 24, the timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.). May be done. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the button effect XB is executed a plurality of times as an effect element for déjà vu advance notice, when the effect mode XB2 is executed in the first button effect XB, the player inputs. Regardless of the operation mode of the operation, when the effect mode XB2 is executed in the second and subsequent button effect XBs, while the effect mode XB3 is executed in the first button effect XB, the operation mode of the input operation by the player Regardless of this, the effect mode XB3 is executed in the second and subsequent button effect XBs. Therefore, even when the button effect XB is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XB executed the first time and the second and subsequent times can be the same. Then, as in the above embodiment, it is possible to give the player a déjà vu that the button effect XB having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

A player who recognizes the déjà vu has a feeling of expectation that the déjà vu may have a special meaning, for example, a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element having the same content is executed multiple times, the effect element is expected to be executed multiple times with the same content. Every time it is executed, he always pays attention to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements to be executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect F is executed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the button effect XB having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the same. It is possible to convince the player that the button effect XB of the content is executed a plurality of times has a special meaning. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestion effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestion effect F.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the effect mode XB2 or the effect mode XB2 is triggered by the press of the effect operation button 24. Since the effect mode XB3 is executed, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XB, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the player does not press the effect operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the effect mode XB2 or the effect is triggered by the elapse of the predetermined time. Aspect XB3 can be performed. Further, even if the player does not press the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the effect mode XB2 or the effect mode XB3 is executed, so that the game can be given unexpectedness, and the game is enjoyed. It can be improved. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the effect mode XB2 or the effect mode XB3 at a predetermined timing without pressing the effect operation button 24 or the elapse of a predetermined time.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, the button effect XB is selected as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, and the button effect XB is performed a plurality of times. When executing, the time parameter indicating whether or not the pressing of the effect operation button 24 is within the acceptable time is not displayed. The reason for this will be explained. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player recognizes that the effect operation button 24 is pressed at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, and the button effects have the same contents. Even if is executed a plurality of times, the player may not feel a sense of déjà vu for the button effect executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as an effect element for déjà vu notice, so that the player does not easily feel the déjà vu. It is possible to prevent it from being stored. However, when the pachinko machine 10 satisfies the condition for generating the déjà vu notice, the button effect is selected as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, and the button effect is executed a plurality of times, the time is required. It may be configured to display parameters.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied before the pending information is subject to the jackpot lottery, and the déjà vu notice is generated. When it is determined that the conditions are satisfied, the button effect XB, which is the target to be executed multiple times before the pending information determined to satisfy the conditions for generating the déjà vu notice is subject to the jackpot lottery. Starts executing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for déjà vu over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied when the hold information is subject to the jackpot lottery, and the button effect is produced in one game round related to the hold information. It may be configured to execute XB a plurality of times.

The pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a changing means for changing the mode of the effect operation button 24 to a mode when the effect is pressed (that is, a mode recessed by pressing). Then, the changing means had the effect operation button 24 pressed when the effect operation button 24 was not pressed (S2905: NO) and when the effect mode XB2 was executed (S2906). It is advisable to change the mode in the case. If such a changing means is provided, the mode of the effect operation button 24 is changed, so that the game can be given an unexpectedness, and the effect mode XB2 can be changed even though the effect operation button 24 is not pressed. It can be persuasive to be done. The changing means can be realized, for example, by providing an actuator such as a solenoid or a motor inside the effect operation button 24.

In the present embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XB is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the effect operation button 24 may be used. Control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XB may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition such as the time and the number of times the button is pressed. ..

Further, in the above example, the effect operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation accepting means for accepting the input operation by the player, but the operation accepting means is not limited to this. For example, as an operation receiving means, a stick or lever operated by the player back and forth or left and right, a button for detecting the hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting the hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, etc. are adopted. Can be done. Hereinafter, an example of the processing of the button effect XB will be described.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when the button effect XB is executed as an effect element (notice effect) for déjà vu advance notice. In step S3001, it is determined whether or not the first executed flag is stored in the sound / light side RAM 94. In step S3001, when it is determined that the first executed flag is not stored (S3001: NO), that is, when the button effect XB is not executed even once after the déjà vu notice flag is stored. , Step S3002, the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect executing means are made to execute the above-described effect mode XB1. The effect mode XB1 includes a content that suggests the player to press the effect operation button 24. Then, the process proceeds to step S3003.

In step S3003, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3003 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3003: YES), the process proceeds to step S3004, and the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect execution means are described above. The production mode XB2 is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S3005, and the button pressing flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound / light side RAM 94.

If it is determined in step S3003 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3003: NO), the process proceeds to step S3006 to determine whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3006 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3006: NO), the process returns to step S3003, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of pressing the effect operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time elapses. If it is determined in step S3006 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3006: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S3007, and the symbol display as the effect execution means is performed. The device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are made to execute the above-described effect mode XB3. Then, the process proceeds to step S3008.

In step S3008, after the first executed flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light side RAM 94, the first button effect XB is ended.

In step S3001, when it is determined that the first executed flag is stored (S3001: YES), that is, when the button effect XB has already been executed at least once after the déjà vu notice flag is stored. Proceeds to step S3009, and causes the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect executing means to execute the effect mode XB1. Then, the process proceeds to step S3010.

In step S3010, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3010 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3010: YES), the process proceeds to step S3012. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3010 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3010: NO), the process proceeds to step S3011 to determine whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3011 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3011: NO), the process returns to step S3010 to determine whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of pressing the effect operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time elapses. If it is determined in step S3011 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3011: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S3012.

In step S3012, it is determined whether or not the button pressing flag is stored. If it is determined in step S3012 that the button pressing flag is stored (S3012: YES), the process proceeds to step S3013, and the effect mode XB2 is applied to the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect execution means. After the execution, the second and subsequent button effect XBs are finished. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3012 that the button pressing flag is not stored (S3012: NO), the process proceeds to step S3014, and the effect mode is set on the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect execution means. After executing XB3, the second and subsequent button effect XBs are finished.

According to the above processing, the button effect XB can be executed a plurality of times with the same content regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. The process described above is an example, and the button effect XB process may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 3 of déjà vu notice using button effect>
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a flow when the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XC as the effect element for déjà vu advance notice and executes the button effect XC twice. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect modes XC1 and XC2 and the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XC.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts the execution of the first button effect XC, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect mode XC1 including the content suggesting the player to press the effect operation button 24 (S3101). In the example shown in FIG. 52, the effect mode XC1 is an effect mode in which an image of the treasure box is displayed and characters and an image prompting the pressing of the effect operation button 24 are displayed. However, the effect mode XC1 may be another mode.

After executing the effect mode XC1, regardless of whether the effect operation button 24 is pressed or not (S3102), the effect mode XC2 different from the effect mode XC1 is executed (S3103). .. Specifically, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S3102: YES), the effect mode XC2 is executed with the effect button 24 being pressed (S3102: YES). S3103). In the example shown in FIG. 52, the effect mode XC2 is an effect mode in which a female character appears from the treasure chest. However, the effect mode XC2 may be another mode. On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S3102: NO), the effect mode XC2 is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed (S3103).

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts the execution of the second button effect XC, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect mode XC1 as in the case of the first button effect XC (S3104). After executing the effect mode XC1, the effect mode XC2 is executed regardless of whether the effect operation button 24 is pressed or not (S3105) (S3106). Specifically, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S3105: YES), the effect mode XC2 is executed with the effect button 24 being pressed (S3105: YES). S3106). On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S3105: NO), the effect mode XC2 is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed (S3106).

When the second button effect XC is completed, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XC having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (twice in the above example). The effect F is executed (S3107). In the example shown in FIG. 52, the suggestion effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as "Maybe deja vu !?" to the player. However, the suggestion effect F may be in another mode. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the above-mentioned battle effect.

When the button effect XC is executed three or more times, the same control as when the first and second button effect XCs are executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestion effect F is performed after the final button effect XC is completed. Just do it.

As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, the button effect is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, the presence / absence of pressing the effect operation button 24, the timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.). May be done. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, both when the button effect XC is executed for the first time and when the button effect XC is executed for the second time and thereafter, similarly, after executing the effect mode XC1, the input operation by the player The effect mode XC2 is executed regardless of the operation mode of. Therefore, even when the button effect XC is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XC executed the first time and the second and subsequent times can be the same. Then, as in the above embodiment, it is possible to give the player a déjà vu that the button effect XC having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

A player who recognizes the déjà vu has a feeling of expectation that the déjà vu may have a special meaning, for example, a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element having the same content is executed multiple times, the effect element is expected to be executed multiple times with the same content. Every time it is executed, he always pays attention to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements to be executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect F is executed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the button effect XC having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the same. It is possible to convince the player that the button effect XC of the content is executed a plurality of times has a special meaning. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestion effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestion effect F.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the effect mode XC2 is triggered by the press of the effect operation button 24. Since it is executed, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XC, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the player does not press the effect operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the effect mode XC2 is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed. can do. Further, even if the player does not press the effect operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the effect mode XC2 is executed, so that the game can be given unexpectedness and the interest of the game can be improved. Can be done. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the effect mode XC2 at a predetermined timing without pressing the effect operation button 24 or the elapse of a predetermined time.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment forcibly executes the effect mode XC2 in the first button effect XC even if the player does not press the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined time. Therefore, a player who knows this mechanism expects that when the first button effect XC is executed, the effect mode XC2 is forcibly executed without pressing the effect operation button 24. Will be done. Further, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing the above-mentioned button effect XA and button effect XB in addition to the button effect XC, the effect mode XC2 is not forcibly executed in the first button effect. Even if there is, the player recognizes and suggests that the button effect being executed this time may be the above-mentioned button effect XA or the button effect XB, not the button effect XC. It is expected that there is a possibility that the production F will be executed. Therefore, the player can play the game with expectation for the second and subsequent button effects.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, the button effect XC is selected as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, and the button effect XC is performed a plurality of times. When executing, the time parameter indicating whether or not the pressing of the effect operation button 24 is within the acceptable time is not displayed. The reason for this will be explained. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player recognizes that the effect operation button 24 is pressed at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, and the button effects have the same contents. Even if is executed a plurality of times, the player may not feel a sense of déjà vu for the button effect executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as an effect element for déjà vu notice, so that the player does not easily feel the déjà vu. It is possible to prevent it from being stored. However, when the pachinko machine 10 satisfies the condition for generating the déjà vu notice, the button effect is selected as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, and the button effect is executed a plurality of times, the time is required. It may be configured to display parameters.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied before the pending information is subject to the jackpot lottery, and the déjà vu notice is generated. When it is determined that the conditions are satisfied, the button effect XC, which is the target to be executed multiple times before the pending information determined to satisfy the conditions for generating the déjà vu notice is subject to the jackpot lottery. Starts executing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for déjà vu over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied when the hold information is subject to the jackpot lottery, and the button effect is produced in one game round related to the hold information. It may be configured to execute XC a plurality of times.

The pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a changing means for changing the mode of the effect operation button 24 to a mode when the effect is pressed (that is, a mode recessed by pressing). Then, the changing means had the effect operation button 24 pressed when the effect operation button 24 was not pressed (S3105: NO) and when the effect mode XC2 was executed (S3106). It is advisable to change the mode in the case. If such a changing means is provided, the mode of the effect operation button 24 changes, so that the game can be given unexpectedness, and the effect mode XC2 can be used even though the effect operation button 24 is not pressed. It can be persuasive to be done. The changing means can be realized, for example, by providing an actuator such as a solenoid or a motor inside the effect operation button 24.

In the present embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XC is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the effect operation button 24 may be used. Control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XC may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition such as the time and the number of times the button is pressed. ..

Further, in the above example, the effect operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation accepting means for accepting the input operation by the player, but the operation accepting means is not limited to this. For example, as an operation receiving means, a stick or lever operated by the player back and forth or left and right, a button for detecting the hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting the hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, etc. are adopted. Can be done. Hereinafter, an example of the processing of the button effect XC will be described.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when the button effect XC is executed as an effect element (notice effect) for déjà vu advance notice. In this button effect XC, the same processing is executed depending on whether the button effect XC is executed for the first time or after the second time.

In step S3201, the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect executing means are made to execute the above-described effect mode XC1. The effect mode XC1 includes a content that suggests the player to press the effect operation button 24. Then, the process proceeds to step S3202.

In step S3202, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3202 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3202: YES), the process proceeds to step S3204, and the effect described above is applied to the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect execution means. After executing the aspect XC2, the button effect XC is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3202 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3202: NO), the process proceeds to step S3203 to determine whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3203 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3203: NO), the process returns to step S3202, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of pressing the effect operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time elapses. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3203 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3203: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S3204 and the effect execution means is used. After the design display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 are made to execute the effect mode XC2, the button effect XC is terminated.

According to the above processing, the button effect XC can be executed a plurality of times with the same content regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. The process described above is an example, and the button effect XC process may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 4 of déjà vu notice using button effect>
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a flow when the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XA as the effect element for déjà vu warning and executes the button effect XD twice. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect selection screen XD1, the effect mode XD2, and the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XD.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts the execution of the first button effect XD, it first includes a content suggesting to the player that the effect operation button 24 is pressed, and one of a plurality of options. The effect selection screen XD1 that allows the player to select an option is displayed (S3301). The effect selection screen XD1 is a selection screen in which the selection state is switched each time the effect operation button 24 is pressed. In the example shown in FIG. 55, in the effect selection screen XD1, a female character appears in the center of the screen, and a plurality of turtle characters carrying shells appear in front of the female character, and the effect operation button 24 is pressed. Each time, the turtle character moves to the left (S3302), and a new turtle character appears from the right side of the screen. In this embodiment, since the patterns of the characters of the turtles are the same, the mode of the effect selection screen XD1 does not change before and after the effect operation button 24 is pressed. However, the effect selection screen XD1 may have a mode other than that shown in FIG. 55, or may have a different mode before and after the effect operation button is pressed.

Then, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the effect mode XD2 corresponding to the option selected at the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed (S3303). In the example shown in FIG. 55, in the production mode XD2, the turtle character in front of the female character is selected at the timing when the predetermined time elapses, the shell carried by the selected turtle character opens, and the shell This is a production mode in which pearls having predetermined characteristics appear from the inside. In the present embodiment, the design of each turtle character is the same, but the characteristics of objects such as pearls appearing in the shell are different for each turtle character.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the second button effect XD, the pachinko machine 10 displays the same effect selection screen XD1 as the effect selection screen XD1 displayed in the first button effect XD (S3304). Then, each time the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the turtle character is moved to the left (S3305), and at the timing when the predetermined time elapses, it is the same as the effect mode XD2 corresponding to the first selected option. The effect mode XD2 is executed (S3306). In the example shown in FIG. 55, the turtle character in front of the female character is selected at the timing when a predetermined time elapses, the shell carried by the selected turtle character opens, and the first time from among the shells. The effect mode XD2 in which pearls having the same characteristics appear is executed.

When the second button effect XD is completed, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XD having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (twice in the above example). The effect F is executed (S3307). In the example shown in FIG. 55, the suggestion effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as "Maybe deja vu !?" to the player. However, the suggestion effect F may be in another mode. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the above-mentioned battle effect.

When the button effect XD is executed three or more times, the same control as when the second button effect XD is executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestion effect F is executed after the end of the last button effect XD. Good.

As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, the button effect is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, the presence / absence of pressing the effect operation button 24, the timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.). May be done. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the button effect XD is executed a plurality of times as an effect element for déjà vu notice, the button effect XD is executed from the second time onward regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player. In, the same effect mode as that executed in the first button effect XD is executed. Therefore, even when the button effect XD is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XD executed the first time and the second and subsequent times can be the same. Then, as in the above embodiment, it is possible to give the player a déjà vu that the button effect XD having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

A player who recognizes the déjà vu has a feeling of expectation that the déjà vu may have a special meaning, for example, a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element having the same content is executed multiple times, the effect element is expected to be executed multiple times with the same content. Every time it is executed, he always pays attention to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements to be executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect F is executed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the button effect XD having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the same. It is possible to convince the player that the button effect XD of the content is executed a plurality of times has a special meaning. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestion effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestion effect F.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect selection screen XD1 has the same mode before and after the selection state is switched. Therefore, when the button effect XD is executed a plurality of times, the effect of the same mode is produced. The same effect mode XD2 is executed from the selection screen XD1. Therefore, the déjà vu given to the player can be enhanced.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, the button effect XD is selected as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, and the button effect XD is performed a plurality of times. When executing, the time parameter indicating whether or not the pressing of the effect operation button 24 is within the acceptable time is not displayed. The reason for this will be explained. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player recognizes that the effect operation button 24 is pressed at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, and the button effects have the same contents. Even if is executed a plurality of times, the player may not feel a sense of déjà vu for the button effect executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as an effect element for déjà vu notice, so that the player does not easily feel the déjà vu. It is possible to prevent it from being stored. However, when the pachinko machine 10 satisfies the condition for generating the déjà vu notice, the button effect is selected as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, and the button effect is executed a plurality of times, the time is required. It may be configured to display parameters.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied before the pending information is subject to the jackpot lottery, and the déjà vu notice is generated. When it is determined that the conditions are satisfied, the button effect XD, which is the target to be executed multiple times before the pending information determined to satisfy the conditions for generating the déjà vu notice is subject to the jackpot lottery. Starts executing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for déjà vu over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied when the hold information is subject to the jackpot lottery, and the button effect is produced in one game round related to the hold information. It may be configured to execute XD a plurality of times.

In the present embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XD is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the effect operation button 24 may be used. Control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XD may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition such as the time and the number of times the button is pressed. ..

Further, in the above example, the effect operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation accepting means for accepting the input operation by the player, but the operation accepting means is not limited to this. For example, as an operation receiving means, a stick or lever operated by the player back and forth or left and right, a button for detecting the hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting the hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, etc. are adopted. Can be done. Hereinafter, an example of the processing of the button effect XD will be described.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when the button effect XD is executed as an effect element (notice effect) for déjà vu advance notice. In step S3401, it is determined whether or not the first executed flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light side RAM 94. In step S3401, when it is determined that the first executed flag is not stored (S3401: NO), that is, when the button effect XD is not executed even once after the déjà vu notice flag is stored. , Step S3402, the above-mentioned effect selection screen XD1 is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are made to execute the sound and light patterns corresponding to the effect selection screen XD1. The effect selection screen XD1 includes a content that suggests the player to press the effect operation button 24. Then, the process proceeds to step S3403.

In step S3403, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3403 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3403: YES), the process proceeds to step S3404, and the effect selection screen XD1 in which the selection state has been switched is displayed on the symbol display device 41. In the example shown in FIG. 55, on the effect selection screen XD1, the turtle character moves to the left and a new turtle character appears from the right side of the screen. After that, the process proceeds to step S3405, and it is determined whether or not the predetermined time has elapsed.

If it is determined in step S3405 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3405: NO), the process returns to step S3403, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of pressing the effect operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time elapses.

If it is determined in step S3405 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3405: YES), the process proceeds to step S3406, and the selected effect mode XD2 is transmitted to the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect execution means. Let it run. Then, the process proceeds to step S3407.

In step S3407, the type information of the effect mode XD2 executed in step S3406 is stored. After that, the process proceeds to step S3408, the first executed flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light side RAM 94, and then the first button effect XD is ended.

In step S3401, when it is determined that the first executed flag is stored (S3401: YES), that is, when the button effect XD has already been executed at least once after the déjà vu notice flag is stored. Steps to step S3409, the same effect selection screen XD1 as the first time is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are made to execute the sound and light patterns corresponding to the effect selection screen XD1. Then, the process proceeds to step S3410.

In step S3410, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3410 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3410: YES), the process proceeds to step S3411, and the effect selection screen XD1 in which the selection state has been switched is displayed on the symbol display device 41. After that, the process proceeds to step S3412, and it is determined whether or not the predetermined time has elapsed.

If it is determined in step S3412 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3412: NO), the process returns to step S3410, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of pressing the effect operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time elapses.

If it is determined in step S3412 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3412: YES), the process proceeds to step S3413, and the effect mode XD2 stored in step S3407 is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the effect execution means. After the various lamps 47 are executed, the second and subsequent button effect XDs are finished.

According to the above processing, the button effect XD can be executed a plurality of times with the same content regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. The process described above is an example, and the button effect XD process may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 5 of déjà vu notice using button effect>
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a flow when the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XE as the effect element for déjà vu notice and executes the button effect XE twice. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect selection screen XE1, the effect mode XE2, and the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XE.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts the execution of the first button effect XE, the pachinko machine 10 includes a content suggesting to the player that the effect operation button 24 is pressed, and one effect from a plurality of effect modes. The effect selection screen XE1 that allows the player to select the mode is displayed (S3501). The effect selection screen XE1 is a selection screen in which the selection state of the effect mode is switched over time. In the example shown in FIG. 58, the effect selection screen XE1 is a roulette type selection screen in which the selection cursor moves with the passage of time to select one effect mode from the four effect modes. In the present embodiment, the moving speed of the selection cursor is so high that the player cannot select a specific effect mode. The effect selection screen XE1 may have another aspect.

Then, regardless of whether the effect operation button 24 is pressed or not (S3502), one effect mode is selected from the plurality of effect modes, and the effect mode is selected. The effect mode XE2 is executed (S3503). Specifically, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S3502: YES), the effect operation button 24 is pressed, and the effect mode is selected from the plurality of effect modes. With one effect mode selected, the selected effect mode XE2 is executed (S3503). On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S3502: NO), one effect mode is selected from the plurality of effect modes when the predetermined time elapses. Then, the selected effect mode XE2 is executed (S3503). In the example shown in FIG. 58, the selected effect mode XE2 is a cut-in notice effect in which the turtle character is the main character. However, another effect mode may be selected as the effect mode, and each effect mode that can be selected may be another mode.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts the execution of the second button effect XE, the pachinko machine 10 displays the same effect selection screen XE1 as the effect selection screen XE1 displayed for the first time (S3504). Then, regardless of whether the effect operation button 24 is pressed or not (S3505), the same effect mode as the first selected effect mode is selected. The selected effect mode XE2 is executed (S3506). Specifically, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S3505: YES), the effect selected for the first time is triggered by the press of the effect operation button 24. The same effect mode as the aspect is selected, and the selected effect mode XE2 is executed. On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S3505: NO), the same effect mode as the first selected effect mode is selected when the predetermined time elapses. In this state, the selected effect mode XE2 is executed (S3506).

When the second button effect XE is completed, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XE having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (twice in the above example). The effect F is executed (S3507). In the example shown in FIG. 58, the suggestion effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as "Maybe deja vu !?" to the player. However, the suggestion effect F may be in another mode. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the above-mentioned battle effect.

When the button effect XE is executed three or more times, the same control as when the second button effect XE is executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestion effect F is executed after the end of the last button effect XE. Good.

As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, the button effect is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, the presence / absence of pressing the effect operation button 24, the timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.). May be done. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the button effect XE is executed a plurality of times as an effect element for déjà vu notice, the button effect XE is executed from the second time onward regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player. In, the same effect mode as that executed in the first button effect XE is selected and executed. Therefore, even when the button effect XE is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XE executed the first time and the second and subsequent times can be the same. Then, as in the above embodiment, it is possible to give the player a déjà vu that the button effect XE having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

A player who recognizes the déjà vu has a feeling of expectation that the déjà vu may have a special meaning, for example, a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element having the same content is executed multiple times, the effect element is expected to be executed multiple times with the same content. Every time it is executed, he always pays attention to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements to be executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect F is executed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the button effect XE having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the same. It is possible to convince the player that the button effect XE of the content is executed a plurality of times has a special meaning. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestion effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestion effect F.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, the button effect XE is selected as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, and the button effect XE is performed a plurality of times. When executing, the time parameter indicating whether or not the pressing of the effect operation button 24 is within the acceptable time is not displayed. The reason for this will be explained. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player recognizes that the effect operation button 24 is pressed at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, and the button effects have the same contents. Even if is executed a plurality of times, the player may not feel a sense of déjà vu for the button effect executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as an effect element for déjà vu notice, so that the player does not easily feel the déjà vu. It is possible to prevent it from being stored. However, when the pachinko machine 10 satisfies the condition for generating the déjà vu notice, the button effect is selected as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, and the button effect is executed a plurality of times, the time is required. It may be configured to display parameters.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the moving speed of the selection cursor is so high that the player cannot select a specific effect mode. Therefore, even though the player aims to stop the selection cursor in an effect mode different from the effect mode selected for the first time, the same effect mode as the effect mode selected for the first time is forcibly selected. It is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player that the cursor has been played.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied before the pending information is subject to the jackpot lottery, and the déjà vu notice is generated. When it is determined that the conditions are satisfied, the button effect XE, which is the target to be executed multiple times before the pending information determined to satisfy the conditions for generating the déjà vu notice is subject to the jackpot lottery. Starts executing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for déjà vu over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied when the hold information is subject to the jackpot lottery, and the button effect is produced in one game round related to the hold information. It may be configured to execute XE a plurality of times.

In the present embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XE is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the effect operation button 24 may be used. Control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XE may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition such as the time and the number of times the button is pressed. ..

Further, in the above example, the effect operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation accepting means for accepting the input operation by the player, but the operation accepting means is not limited to this. For example, as an operation receiving means, a stick or lever operated by the player back and forth or left and right, a button for detecting the hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting the hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, etc. are adopted. Can be done. Hereinafter, an example of the processing of the button effect XE will be described.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when the button effect XE is executed as an effect element (notice effect) for déjà vu advance notice. In step S3601, it is determined whether or not the first executed flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light side RAM 94. If it is determined in step S3601 that the first executed flag is not stored (S3601: NO), the process proceeds to step S3602, the above-mentioned roulette-type effect selection screen XE1 is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the speaker is displayed. The 46 and the various lamps 47 are made to execute the sound and light patterns corresponding to the effect selection screen XE1. The effect selection screen XE1 includes content that suggests the player to press the effect operation button 24. Then, the process proceeds to step S3603.

In step S3603, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3603 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3603: YES), the process proceeds to step S3605, the selection cursor is stopped at the timing when the effect operation button 24 is pressed, and one effect is produced. An image indicating that the aspect is selected is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Then, the process proceeds to step S3606.

If it is determined in step S3603 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3603: NO), the process proceeds to step S3604 to determine whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3604 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3604: NO), the process returns to step S3603, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of pressing the effect operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time elapses.

If it is determined in step S3604 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3604: YES), the process proceeds to step S3605, the selection cursor is stopped at the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed, and an image showing that one effect mode has been selected. Is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Then, the process proceeds to step S3606.

In step S3606, the effect mode XE2 selected in step S3605 is executed by the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect execution means. Then, the process proceeds to step S3607.

In step S3607, the type of the effect mode XE2 executed in step S3606 is stored in the sound / light side RAM 94. Then, the process proceeds to step S3608.

In step S3608, after the first executed flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light side RAM 94, the first button effect XE is ended.

In step S3601, when it is determined that the first executed flag is stored (S3601: YES), that is, when the button effect XE has already been executed at least once after the déjà vu notice flag is stored. Goes to step S3609, displays the same effect selection screen XE1 as the first time on the symbol display device 41, and causes the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 to execute the sound and light patterns corresponding to the effect selection screen XE1. Then, the process proceeds to step S3610.

In step S3610, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3610 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3610: YES), the process proceeds to step S3612, which is the timing after the effect operation button 24 is pressed and is stored in step S3607. The selection cursor is stopped at the timing when the effect mode XE2 is selected, and the symbol display device 41 displays an image indicating that the stored effect mode XE2 is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step S3613.

If it is determined in step S3610 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3610: NO), the process proceeds to step S3611 to determine whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3611 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3611: NO), the process returns to step S3610 to determine whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of pressing the effect operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time elapses.

If it is determined in step S3611 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3611: YES), the process proceeds to step S3612, and the effect mode XE2 stored in step S3607 is selected at the timing after the predetermined time has elapsed. The selection cursor is stopped at the timing, and the symbol display device 41 displays an image indicating that the stored effect mode XE2 has been selected. Then, the process proceeds to step S3613.

In step S3613, after the effect mode XE2 selected in step S3612 is executed by the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect execution means, the second and subsequent button effect XEs are terminated.

According to the above processing, the button effect XE can be executed a plurality of times with the same content regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. The process described above is an example, and the button effect XE process may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 6 of déjà vu notice using button effect>
FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a flow when the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XF as an effect element for déjà vu advance notice and executes the button effect XF twice. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect modes XF1 and XF2 and the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XF.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts the execution of the first button effect XF, the content suggesting to the player that the effect operation buttons 24 are repeatedly hit, and the predetermined parameters move in a certain direction with the passage of time. The effect mode XF1 including the changing content is executed (S3701). In the example shown in FIG. 61, the effect mode XF1 includes a content in which the character of the crab on the player side is attacked by the character of the crab on the enemy side with ink and tries to withstand the attack of the ink, and the crab This is a production mode in which the parameter indicating the physical strength of the character of the character changes in the direction of decreasing under the attack of ink. Further, in the effect mode XF1, as an example of a message suggesting to the player that the effect operation button 24 is repeatedly hit, a character such as "Repeat and endure!" Is displayed. However, the effect mode XF1 may be another mode.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the effect mode XF1 is executed, the parameters decrease with the passage of time (S3702). At this time, if the effect operation button 24 is repeatedly hit by the player, the pachinko machine 10 executes control to reduce the rate of decrease of the parameter. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 executes control so that the decrease rate of the parameter decreases as the number of presses of the effect operation button 24 per unit time increases. In this way, the player repeatedly hits the effect operation button 24 so that the number of presses of the effect operation button 24 per unit time is increased in order to reduce the rate of decrease of the parameter. In the example shown in FIG. 61, the player tries to reduce the rate of decrease of the parameter by repeatedly hitting the effect operation button 24 so that the crab character can withstand the attack of the octopus. Therefore, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XF, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game.

Then, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the effect mode XF2 after the parameters satisfy the predetermined parameter conditions (S3704). Specifically, after the parameter decreases to 0, the effect mode XF2 is executed (S3704). In the example shown in FIG. 61, the effect mode XF2 is an effect mode including the content that the crab character on the player side cannot withstand the attack of the octopus character on the enemy side and is defeated. However, the effect mode XF2 may be another mode.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts the execution of the second button effect XF, the pachinko machine 10 executes the same control as in the case of the first button effect XF. Specifically, the effect mode XF1 is executed (S3705), the parameter is decreased with the passage of time (S3706), and after the parameter becomes 0 (S3707), the effect mode XF2 is executed (S3708). That is, the effect mode XF1 and the effect mode XF2 are executed regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24.

When the second button effect XF is completed, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XF having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (twice in the above example). The effect F is executed (S3709). In the example shown in FIG. 61, the suggestion effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as "Maybe deja vu !?" to the player. However, the suggestion effect F may be in another mode. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the above-mentioned battle effect.

When the button effect XF is executed three or more times, the same control as when the second button effect XF is executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestion effect F is executed after the end of the last button effect XF. Good.

As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, the button effect is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, the presence / absence of pressing the effect operation button 24, the timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.). May be done. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, both when the button effect XF is executed for the first time and when the button effect XF is executed for the second time and thereafter, similarly, after executing the effect mode XF1, the input operation by the player Regardless of the operation mode of, the parameter is reduced to 0, and the effect mode XF2 is executed. Therefore, even when the button effect XF is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XF executed the first time and the second and subsequent times can be the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a déjà vu that the button effect XF having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

A player who recognizes the déjà vu has a feeling of expectation that the déjà vu may have a special meaning, for example, a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element having the same content is executed multiple times, the effect element is expected to be executed multiple times with the same content. Every time it is executed, he always pays attention to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements to be executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect F is executed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the button effect XF having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the same. It is possible to convince the player that the button effect XF of the content is executed a plurality of times has a special meaning. In particular, when a production mode that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a production mode in which the character on the player side is defeated) is executed as the production mode XF2, the suggestive effect is executed from a depressed feeling, and the player You can raise your expectations at once. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestion effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestion effect F.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied before the pending information is subject to the jackpot lottery, and the déjà vu notice is generated. When it is determined that the conditions are satisfied, the button effect XF, which is the target to be executed multiple times before the pending information determined to satisfy the conditions for generating the déjà vu notice is subject to the jackpot lottery. Starts executing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for déjà vu over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied when the hold information is subject to the jackpot lottery, and the button effect is produced in one game round related to the hold information. It may be configured to execute XF a plurality of times.

The pachinko machine 10 stores the process of changing the parameters when the first button effect XF is executed, and the process of changing the stored parameters when the second and subsequent button effect XFs are executed. May be reproduced. By doing so, the process of changing the parameters is the same in each of the button effect XFs executed a plurality of times, so that a stronger déjà vu can be given to the player.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a changing means for changing the mode of the effect operation button 24 to a mode when the effect is pressed (that is, a mode recessed by pressing). Then, when the pachinko machine 10 executes the first button effect XF, the pachinko machine 10 memorizes the process of changing the mode of the effect operation button 24 when the effect operation button 24 is repeatedly hit by the player, and the second and subsequent times. When the button effect XF is executed, the process of changing the mode of the stored effect operation button 24 may be reproduced by the changing means. By doing so, the mode of the effect operation button 24 is changed, so that the game can be given unexpectedness. Further, in the second and subsequent button effect XFs, the process of changing the mode of the effect operation button 24 in the first button effect XF is reproduced, so that a stronger déjà vu can be given to the player.

Further, in the above example, the example in which the parameter is changed in the direction of decreasing with the passage of time has been described, but the parameter may be changed in the direction of increasing with the passage of time. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 may perform control so that the increasing speed of the parameter increases as the number of presses of the effect operation button 24 per unit time increases. As the parameters to be increased with the passage of time, for example, the attack power parameter of the character on the player side, the power parameter, and the like can be mentioned. Then, after the parameters increase and reach a predetermined value such as the maximum value, a positive effect mode such as a victory effect may be executed. In this way, as in the above example, the parameters increase to a predetermined maximum value regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 uses the button effect XF. It can be executed multiple times with the same content. Further, the player repeatedly hits the effect operation button 24 so that the number of presses of the effect operation button 24 per unit time is increased in order to increase the rate of increase of the parameter. Therefore, as in the above example, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XF, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game.

Further, in the above example, the parameter is in the form shown in a rod shape, but is not limited to this, and may be in a form shown in another shape such as a circle, and is shown only by a numerical value. It may be in the above-mentioned embodiment.

Further, in the above example, the effect operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation accepting means for accepting the input operation by the player, but the operation accepting means is not limited to this. For example, as an operation receiving means, a stick or lever operated by the player back and forth or left and right, a button for detecting the hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting the hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, etc. are adopted. Can be done. Hereinafter, an example of the processing of the button effect XF will be described.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when the button effect XF is executed as an effect element (notice effect) for déjà vu advance notice. In this button effect XF, the same processing is executed depending on whether the button effect XF is executed the first time or after the second time.

In step S3801, the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect executing means are made to execute the above-described effect mode XF1. The effect mode XF1 includes a content that suggests the player to repeatedly hit the effect operation button 24, and a content that the physical strength parameter changes in a direction of decreasing with the passage of time. After executing step S3801, the process proceeds to step S3802.

In step S3802, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 is repeatedly hit. Specifically, for example, the number of times the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time is counted, and when the number of times of pressing is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, it is determined that the effect operation button 24 is repeatedly pressed. If it is determined in step S3802 that the effect operation button 24 is repeatedly hit (S3802: YES), the process proceeds to step S3803, and the physical strength parameter is lowered at a predetermined speed. Then, the process proceeds to step S3805.

If it is determined in step S3802 that the effect operation button 24 is not repeatedly hit (S3802: NO), the process proceeds to step S3804, and the physical strength parameter is lowered at a speed faster than the predetermined speed in step S3803. Then, the process proceeds to step S3805.

In step S3805, it is determined whether or not the physical fitness parameter has become 0. If it is determined in step S3805 that the physical strength parameter is not 0 (S3805: NO), the process returns to step S3802, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 is repeatedly hit. That is, the presence or absence of repeated hits of the effect operation button 24 is monitored until the physical strength parameter becomes 0, the physical strength parameter is lowered at a slow speed during the period when the effect operation button 24 is repeatedly hit, and the effect operation button 24 is not repeatedly hit. During the period, the health parameter is lowered at a high speed.

If it is determined in step S3805 that the physical strength parameter has become 0 (S3805: YES), the process proceeds to step S3806, and the above-described effect mode XF2 is applied to the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect execution means. Let it run. After that, the first or second and subsequent notice productions for déjà vu notice are completed.

In the above example, the speed at which the physical strength value is lowered is described as two steps depending on the presence or absence of repeated hits, but even if the speed is three or more steps depending on the number of times the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time. Good.

According to the above processing, the button effect XF can be executed a plurality of times with the same content regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. The process described above is an example, and the button effect XF process may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 7 of déjà vu notice using button effect>
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a flow when the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XG as the effect element for déjà vu notice and executes the button effect XA twice. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect modes XG1 and XG2 and the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XG.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts the execution of the first button effect XG, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect mode XG1 including the content suggesting the player to press the effect operation button 24 (S3901). In the example shown in FIG. 64, the effect mode XG1 is an effect mode in which an image of the treasure box is displayed and characters and an image prompting the pressing of the effect operation button 24 are displayed. However, the effect mode XA1 may be another mode.

If the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time after executing the effect mode XG1 (S3902: YES), the effect mode XG1 and the effect mode XG1 are triggered by the press of the effect operation button 24. Executes a different production mode XG2 (S3903). In the example shown in FIG. 64, the effect mode XG2 is an effect mode in which a female character appears from the treasure chest. However, the effect mode XG2 may be another mode. On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within a predetermined time (S3902: NO), the effect mode XG2 is not executed while the effect mode XG1 is being executed.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts the execution of the second button effect XG, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect mode XG1 (S3904 or S3908) as in the case of the first button effect XG. Then, if the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time after executing the effect mode XG1 (S3905: YES or S3909: YES), the effect trigger is that the effect operation button 24 is pressed. As the effect mode XG2 is executed (S3906 or S3910). On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within a predetermined time (S3905: NO or S3909: NO), the effect mode XG2 is not executed while the effect mode XG1 is being executed.

Then, in the pachinko machine 10, when the effect mode XG2 is executed in all of the button effect XGs executed a plurality of times (twice in the above example), or in all the button effect XGs executed a plurality of times. When XG2 is not executed even once, the suggestion effect F suggesting to the player that the button effect XG has been executed a plurality of times with the same content is executed (S3907 or S3911). In the example shown in FIG. 64, the suggestion effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as "Maybe deja vu !?" to the player. However, the suggestion effect F may be in another mode. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the above-mentioned battle effect. On the other hand, when the same content is not executed even once in the button effect XG executed a plurality of times, specifically, although the effect mode XG2 is executed in the first button effect XG, the second time. When the effect mode XG2 is not executed in the button effect XG of, and even though the effect mode XG2 is not executed in the first button effect XG, the effect mode XG2 is executed in the second button effect XG. In that case, the suggestion effect F is not executed, and the normal reach effect or the like is executed.

When the button effect XG is executed three or more times, the same control as when the second button effect XG is executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestion effect F is executed after the end of the last button effect XG. It may be judged whether or not.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player performs the same input operation in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times with the same contents, which is the same. It is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu that the button effect XG of the content of is executed a plurality of times. Further, when the button effect XG with the same content is executed multiple times, the suggestion effect F is executed, so that the player is made to recognize that the button effect XG with the same content has been executed multiple times. At the same time, it is possible to convince the player that the button effect XG having the same content is executed multiple times has a special meaning.

Further, when the player experiences the suggestion effect F after the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times with the same content, the player expects that the suggestion effect F is executed, and each time the button effect XG is executed, the player expects the suggestion effect F to be executed. The effect operation button 24 is operated so that the button effect XG is executed with the same contents by performing the same input operation, and the occurrence of the suggestion effect F is expected. Therefore, the player's attention to the button effect XG that is sequentially executed can be suitably increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the effect mode XG2 is triggered by the press of the effect operation button 24. Since it is executed, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XG, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the effect mode XG2 at a predetermined timing without triggering the pressing of the effect operation button 24.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, the button effect XG is selected as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, and the button effect XG is performed a plurality of times. When executing, the time parameter indicating whether or not the pressing of the effect operation button 24 is within the acceptable time is not displayed. The reason for this will be explained. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player recognizes that the effect operation button 24 is pressed at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, and the button effects have the same contents. Even if is executed a plurality of times, the player may not feel a sense of déjà vu for the button effect executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as an effect element for déjà vu notice, so that the player does not easily feel the déjà vu. It is possible to prevent it from being stored. However, when the pachinko machine 10 satisfies the condition for generating the déjà vu notice, the button effect is selected as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, and the button effect is executed a plurality of times, the time is required. It may be configured to display parameters.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied before the pending information is subject to the jackpot lottery, and the déjà vu notice is generated. When it is determined that the conditions are satisfied, the button effect XG, which is the target to be executed multiple times before the pending information determined to satisfy the conditions for generating the déjà vu notice is subject to the jackpot lottery. Starts executing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for déjà vu over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied when the hold information is subject to the jackpot lottery, and the button effect is produced in one game round related to the hold information. It may be configured to execute XG a plurality of times.

In the present embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XG is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the effect operation button 24 may be used. Control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XG may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition such as the time and the number of times the button is pressed. ..

Further, in the above example, the effect operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation accepting means for accepting the input operation by the player, but the operation accepting means is not limited to this. For example, as an operation receiving means, a stick or lever operated by the player back and forth or left and right, a button for detecting the hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting the hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, etc. are adopted. Can be done. Hereinafter, an example of the processing of the button effect XG will be described.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when the button effect XG is executed as an effect element (notice effect) for déjà vu advance notice. In step S4001, it is determined whether or not the first executed flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light side RAM 94.

In step S4001, when it is determined that the first executed flag is not stored (S4001: NO), that is, when the button effect XG is not executed even once after the déjà vu notice flag is stored. , Step S4002, the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect executing means are made to execute the above-described effect mode XG1. The effect mode XG1 includes a content that suggests the player to press the effect operation button 24. Then, the process proceeds to step S4003.

In step S4003, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S4003 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S4003: YES), the process proceeds to step S4004, and the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect execution means are described above. The production mode XG2 is executed. After executing step S4004, the process proceeds to step S4005, and the button pressing flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound / light side RAM 94. The button pressing flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 that the effect operation button 24 was pressed when the first button effect XG was executed. After executing step S4005, the process proceeds to step S4007.

If it is determined in step S4003 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S4003: NO), the process proceeds to step S4006 to determine whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4006 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S4006: NO), the process returns to step S4003, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of pressing the effect operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time elapses. If it is determined in step S4006 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S4006: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time, the step S4004 and step S4005 are not executed. Proceed to S4007.

In step S4007, the first executed flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the RAM 94. After that, the process proceeds to step S4008, and the suggestion effect execution flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the RAM 94, and the first button effect XG is ended.

The suggestion effect execution flag is that when the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times after the déjà vu notice flag is stored, the same effect mode XG2 is executed in all of the multiple button effect XGs. Alternatively, it is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 that the effect mode XG2 has never been executed in all of the plurality of button effect XGs.

As will be described in the processing of each step below, the suggestion effect execution flag is the second and subsequent times when the effect mode XG2 is executed in the first button effect XG after the déjà vu notice flag is stored. If the effect mode XG2 is not executed even once in the button effect XG, it is deleted. Further, the suggestion effect execution flag is the effect mode even once in the second and subsequent button effect XGs when the effect mode XG2 is not executed in the first button effect XG after the déjà vu notice flag is stored. It is erased when XG2 is executed. That is, when the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times after the déjà vu notice flag is stored, and the same effect mode XG2 is executed in all of the plurality of button effect XGs, or the plurality of times. When the effect mode XG2 is never executed in all of the button effect XG times, the suggestion effect execution flag is not erased and remains stored. In the present embodiment, when setting the content of the advance notice effect of the game times related to the hold information determined that the condition for generating the déjà vu advance notice is satisfied, it is determined whether or not this suggestion effect execution flag is stored. Then, when it is determined that the suggestion effect execution flag is stored, the suggestion effect F described above is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the suggestion effect execution flag is not stored, the suggestion effect F is not executed and the normal reach effect or the like is executed. Hereinafter, the description of the process of each step of FIG. 65 will be returned.

In step S4001, when it is determined that the first executed flag is stored (S4001: YES), that is, when the button effect XG has already been executed at least once after the déjà vu notice flag is stored. Proceeds to step S4009, and causes the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect executing means to execute the effect mode XG1. Then, the process proceeds to step S4010.

In step S4010, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S4010 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S4010: YES), the process proceeds to step S4011, and the effect mode XG2 is applied to the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect execution means. To execute. After that, the process proceeds to step S4012, and it is determined whether or not the button pressing flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound / light side RAM 94.

If it is determined in step S4012 that the button pressing flag is stored (S4012: YES), the second and subsequent button effect XGs are terminated without erasing the suggestion effect execution flag. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4012 that the button pressing flag is not stored (S4012: NO), the process proceeds to step S4015.

In step S4015, when the suggestion effect execution flag is stored, the suggestion effect execution flag is erased, and the second and subsequent button effect XGs are terminated. If the suggestion effect execution flag is not stored, the second and subsequent button effect XGs are terminated as they are.

If it is determined in step S4010 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S4010: NO), the process proceeds to step S4013 to determine whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4013 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S4013: NO), the process returns to step S4010, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of pressing the effect operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time elapses. If it is determined in step S4013 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S4013: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S4014.

In step S4014, it is determined whether or not the button pressing flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound / light side RAM 94. If it is determined in step S4014 that the button press flag is stored (S4014: YES), the process proceeds to step S4015 described above, and if the suggestion effect execution flag is stored, the suggestion effect execution flag is deleted. .. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4014 that the button pressing flag is not stored (S4014: NO), the second and subsequent button effect XGs are terminated without erasing the suggestion effect execution flag.

According to the above processing, the suggestion effect F can be executed only when the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times with the same content. The process described above is an example, and the button effect XG process may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 8 of déjà vu notice using button effect>
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a flow when the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XH as the effect element for déjà vu notice and executes the button effect XH twice. FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect modes XH1, XH2, XH3 and the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XH.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts the execution of the first button effect XH, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect mode XH1 including the content suggesting the player to press the effect operation button 24 (S4101). In the example shown in FIG. 67, the effect mode XH1 is an effect mode in which an image of the treasure box is displayed and characters and an image prompting the pressing of the effect operation button 24 are displayed. However, the effect mode XH1 may be another mode.

If the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time after executing the effect mode XH1 (S4102: YES), the effect mode XH1 and the effect mode XH1 are triggered by the press of the effect operation button 24. Executes a different effect mode XH2 (S4103). In the example shown in FIG. 67, the effect mode XH2 is an effect mode in which a female character appears from the treasure chest. However, the effect mode XH2 may be another mode. On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S4102: NO), the effect mode XH3, which is different from the effect mode XH1 and the effect mode XH2, is executed (S4109). .. In the example shown in FIG. 67, the effect mode XH3 is an effect mode in which the fish character carries away the treasure chest. However, the effect mode XH3 may be another mode.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts the execution of the second button effect XH, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect mode XH1 (S4104 or S4110) as in the case of the first button effect XH. Then, if the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time after executing the effect mode XH1 (S4105: YES or S4111: YES), the effect trigger is that the effect operation button 24 is pressed. As the effect mode XH2 is executed (S4106 or S4112). On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S4105: NO or S4111: NO), the effect mode XH3 is executed with the elapse of the predetermined time (S4107).

Then, in the pachinko machine 10, when the effect mode XH2 is executed in all of the button effect XH executed a plurality of times (twice in the above example), or in all the button effect XH executed a plurality of times. When XH3 is executed, the suggestion effect F suggesting to the player that the button effect XH has been executed a plurality of times with the same content is executed (S4108 or S4114). In the example shown in FIG. 67, the suggestion effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as "Maybe deja vu !?" to the player. However, the suggestion effect F may be in another mode. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the above-mentioned battle effect. On the other hand, when the same content is not executed even once in the button effect XH executed a plurality of times, specifically, although the effect mode XH2 is executed in the first button effect XH, the second time. When the effect mode XH3 is executed in the button effect XH of the above, and when the effect mode XH2 is executed in the second button effect XH even though the effect mode XH3 is executed in the first button effect XH. Instead of executing the suggestion effect F, a normal reach effect or the like is executed.

When the button effect XH is executed three or more times, the same control as when the second button effect XH is executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestion effect F is executed after the end of the last button effect XH. It may be judged whether or not.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player performs the same input operation in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times with the same contents, which is the same. It is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu that the button effect XH of the content of is executed a plurality of times. Further, when the button effect XH with the same content is executed a plurality of times, the suggestion effect F is executed, so that the player is made to recognize that the button effect XH with the same content has been executed a plurality of times. At the same time, it is possible to convince the player that the button effect XH having the same content is executed multiple times has a special meaning.

Further, when the player experiences the suggestion effect F after the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times with the same content, the player expects that the suggestion effect F is executed, and each time the button effect XH is executed, the player expects the suggestion effect F to be executed. The effect operation button 24 is operated so that the button effect XH is executed with the same contents by performing the same input operation, and the occurrence of the suggestion effect F is expected. Therefore, the player's attention to the button effect XH that is sequentially executed can be suitably increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the effect mode XH2 is triggered by the press of the effect operation button 24. Since it is executed, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XH, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the effect mode XH2 at a predetermined timing without triggering the pressing of the effect operation button 24.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, the button effect XH is selected as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, and the button effect XH is performed a plurality of times. When executing, the time parameter indicating whether or not the pressing of the effect operation button 24 is within the acceptable time is not displayed. The reason for this will be explained. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player recognizes that the effect operation button 24 is pressed at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, and the button effects have the same contents. Even if is executed a plurality of times, the player may not feel a sense of déjà vu for the button effect executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as an effect element for déjà vu notice, so that the player does not easily feel the déjà vu. It is possible to prevent it from being stored. However, when the pachinko machine 10 satisfies the condition for generating the déjà vu notice, the button effect is selected as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, and the button effect is executed a plurality of times, the time is required. It may be configured to display parameters.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied before the pending information is subject to the jackpot lottery, and the déjà vu notice is generated. When it is determined that the conditions are satisfied, the button effect XH, which is the target to be executed multiple times before the pending information determined to satisfy the conditions for generating the déjà vu notice is subject to the jackpot lottery. Starts executing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for déjà vu over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied when the hold information is subject to the jackpot lottery, and the button effect is produced in one game round related to the hold information. It may be configured to execute XH a plurality of times.

In the present embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XH is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the effect operation button 24 may be used. Control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XH may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition such as the time and the number of times the button is pressed. ..

Further, in the above example, the effect operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation accepting means for accepting the input operation by the player, but the operation accepting means is not limited to this. For example, as an operation receiving means, a stick or lever operated by the player back and forth or left and right, a button for detecting the hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting the hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, etc. are adopted. Can be done. Hereinafter, an example of the processing of the button effect XH will be described.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when the button effect XH is executed as an effect element (notice effect) for déjà vu advance notice. In step S4201, it is determined whether or not the first executed flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light side RAM 94.

In step S4201, when it is determined that the first executed flag is not stored (S4201: NO), that is, when the button effect XH is not executed even once after the déjà vu notice flag is stored. , Step S4202, the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect executing means are made to execute the above-described effect mode XH1. The effect mode XH1 includes a content that suggests the player to press the effect operation button 24. Then, the process proceeds to step S4203.

In step S4203, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S4203 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S4203: YES), the process proceeds to step S4204, and the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect execution means are described above. The effect mode XH2 is executed. After executing step S4204, the process proceeds to step S4205, and the button pressing flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound / light side RAM 94. The button pressing flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 that the effect operation button 24 was pressed when the first button effect XH was executed. After executing step S4205, the process proceeds to step S4207.

If it is determined in step S4203 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S4203: NO), the process proceeds to step S4206 to determine whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4206 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S4206: NO), the process returns to step S4203, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of pressing the effect operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time elapses. If it is determined in step S4206 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S4206: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S4207 to display the symbol as the effect execution means. The device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are made to execute the above-described effect mode XH3. Then, the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4208, the first executed flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the RAM 94. After that, the process proceeds to step S4209, the suggestion effect execution flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the RAM 94, and the first button effect XH is ended.

The suggestion effect execution flag is that when the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times after the déjà vu notice flag is stored, the same effect mode XH2 is executed in all of the plurality of button effect XHs. Alternatively, it is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 that the effect mode XH2 has never been executed in all of the plurality of button effect XHs.

As will be described in the processing of each step below, the suggestion effect execution flag is the second and subsequent times when the effect mode XH2 is executed in the first button effect XH after the déjà vu notice flag is stored. When the effect mode XH3 is executed even once in the button effect XH, it is deleted. Further, the suggestion effect execution flag is set to the effect mode XH2 even once in the second and subsequent button effect XHs when the effect mode XH3 is executed in the first button effect XH after the déjà vu notice flag is stored. Is erased when is executed. That is, when the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times after the déjà vu notice flag is stored, and the same effect mode XH2 is executed in all of the plurality of button effect XHs, or the plurality of times. When the same effect mode XH3 is executed in all of the button effect XH times, the suggestion effect execution flag is not erased and remains stored. In the present embodiment, when setting the content of the advance notice effect of the game times related to the hold information determined that the condition for generating the déjà vu advance notice is satisfied, it is determined whether or not this suggestion effect execution flag is stored. Then, when it is determined that the suggestion effect execution flag is stored, the suggestion effect F described above is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the suggestion effect execution flag is not stored, the suggestion effect F is not executed and the normal reach effect or the like is executed. Hereinafter, the description of the process of each step of FIG. 68 will be returned.

In step S4201, when it is determined that the first executed flag is stored (S4201: YES), that is, when the button effect XH has already been executed at least once after the déjà vu notice flag is stored. Proceeds to step S4210, and causes the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect executing means to execute the effect mode XH1. Then, the process proceeds to step S4211.

In step S4211, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S4211 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S4211: YES), the process proceeds to step S4212, and the effect mode XH2 is applied to the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect execution means. To execute. After that, the process proceeds to step S4213, and it is determined whether or not the button pressing flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound / light side RAM 94.

If it is determined in step S4213 that the button pressing flag is stored (S4213: YES), the second and subsequent button effect XHs are terminated without erasing the suggestion effect execution flag. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4213 that the button pressing flag is not stored (S4213: NO), the process proceeds to step S4217.

In step S4217, when the suggestion effect execution flag is stored, the suggestion effect execution flag is erased, and the second and subsequent button effect XHs are terminated. If the suggestion effect execution flag is not stored, the second and subsequent button effect XHs are terminated as they are.

If it is determined in step S4211 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S4211: NO), the process proceeds to step S4214 to determine whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4214 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S4214: NO), the process returns to step S4211 to determine whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of pressing the effect operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time elapses. If it is determined in step S4214 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S4214: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S4215, and the symbol display as the effect execution means is performed. The device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are made to execute the effect mode XH3. Then, the process proceeds to step S4216.

In step S4216, it is determined whether or not the button pressing flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound / light side RAM 94. If it is determined in step S4216 that the button pressing flag is stored (S4216: YES), the process proceeds to step S4217 described above, and if the suggestion effect execution flag is stored, the suggestion effect execution flag is deleted. .. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4216 that the button pressing flag is not stored (S4216: NO), the second and subsequent button effect XHs are terminated without erasing the suggestion effect execution flag.

According to the above processing, the suggestion effect F can be executed only when the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times with the same content. The process described above is an example, and the button effect XH process may be realized by another algorithm.

According to the present embodiment described above, various expectations can be given to the player. In particular, if the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which at least two or more of the above-mentioned button effects XA, XB, XC, XG, and XH can be selected as déjà vu warning effect elements, the player can select the buttons. While paying close attention to the mode of production performed in the production, various predictions are made as to what kind of button production is being executed, and the occurrence of suggestive production is expected. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

H. Eighth embodiment:
Next, the eighth embodiment will be described. The main difference between the present embodiment and the first to seventh embodiments is that a second starting port unit 200 including a second starting port is provided in the right side area of the game area GA, and 2 The point is that various types of high-frequency support modes are set. In the following description, the configuration of the second start port unit 200 included in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the control of the second start port unit 200 will be mainly described. The description of the same configuration and processing as those of the first to seventh embodiments will be omitted.

FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing a game board 30 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. In the present embodiment, as described above, the second start port unit 200 including the second start port is provided in the right side area of the game area GA. In the present embodiment, all the game balls launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 with a firing intensity equal to or higher than a predetermined value are configured to enter the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200.

FIG. 70 is an explanatory view showing the configuration of the second starting port unit 200. The second starting port unit 200 includes an opening 202 into which a game ball can enter, a path R1 provided on the left side downstream of the opening 202, and a path R2 provided on the right side downstream of the opening 202. It is provided with an alternating distribution mechanism 204 that alternately distributes a game ball that has entered the opening 202 into a path R1 on the left side and a path R2 on the right side. A through gate 206 through which a game ball can pass is provided downstream of the path R1, and an opening / closing ball entry device 208 is provided downstream of the through gate 206 and the path R2.

The alternating distribution mechanism 204 is configured to distribute the game ball that has entered the opening 202 to the path R1 and to distribute the game ball that arrives after the game ball distributed to the path R1 to the path R2. Specifically, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 includes a central piece 204a formed in the center, a left piece 204b formed on the left side of the central piece 204a, and a right side formed on the right side of the central piece 204a. A rotating shaft 204d provided between one piece 204c and the left side piece 204b and the right side piece 204c is provided. The region sandwiched between the central piece 204a and the left side piece 204b functions as a left side holding part 204e that temporarily holds the game ball. Further, the region sandwiched between the central piece portion 204a and the right side piece portion 204c functions as a right side holding portion 204f for temporarily holding the game ball. The behavior of the alternating distribution mechanism 204 when the game ball reaches the alternating distribution mechanism 204 will be described later.

The opening / closing ball entry device 208 includes an opening / closing door 208b as an electric accessory that opens and closes back and forth with the lower rotation axis as a base point, and a second starting port 208a into which a game ball can enter is provided inside the opening / closing door 208b. I have. Further, inside the opening / closing door 208b, a guide path 208c inclined toward the second starting port 208a is provided, and the game ball entering the inside of the opening / closing door 208b is the second along the guideway 208c. It is guided to the starting port 208a. The second starting port 208a has the same role as the second starting port 34 in the above embodiment. When the opening / closing door 208b is in the closed state, it is impossible for the game ball to enter the second starting port 208a. On the other hand, when the opening / closing door 208b is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port 208a. That is, the opening / closing door 208b has a function of transitioning the state of the second starting port 208a between the non-entry state and the possible entry state. In the normal state, the opening / closing door 208b is in a closed state, and the second starting port 208a is in a state in which the ball cannot enter.

The through gate 206 includes a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. When the game ball passes through the through gate 206, the main control device 60 triggers the passage of the game ball through the through gate 206 and causes an internal lottery (electric combination) as to whether or not the above-mentioned opening / closing door 208b is transitioned to the open state. Execute the open lottery). When the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is won to shift the opening / closing door 208b to the open state, the main control device 60 displays the result of the electric accessory opening lottery on the normal drawing unit 38 and closes the opening / closing door 208b. Transition from the state to the open state.

The path R1 is configured so that the distributed game ball can pass through the through gate 206, and the distributed game ball has the opening / closing door 208b of the opening / closing ball entry device 208 in an open state. In some cases, it is configured so that the ball can enter the second starting port 208a. In the present embodiment, the path R1x branched from the path R1 is provided, but the game balls distributed to the path R1 are configured to always pass through the through gate 206. However, as another embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball distributed to the path R1 does not pass through the through gate 206 but passes through the path R1x.

The path R2 is configured so that the distributed game ball cannot pass through the through gate 206, and the distributed game ball is in a state where the opening / closing door 208b of the opening / closing ball entry device 208 is open. In some cases, it is configured so that the ball can enter the second starting port 208a.

In the present embodiment, after the game ball has passed through the through gate 206, the result of the electric accessory opening lottery executed when the game ball has passed through the through gate 206 is displayed by the normal drawing unit 38. The time until (that is, the variable time from when the light emitting display unit of the normal drawing unit 38 starts the variable display to when the stop display corresponding to the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed) is the through gate of the game ball. The time is set to be shorter than the time from passing through 206 until the game ball reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 until the game ball reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208 is about 0.2 seconds, so that the normal drawing unit 38 The fluctuation time of is set to 0.05 seconds.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is the time from when the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the normal drawing unit 38 until the opening / closing door 208b of the opening / closing ball entry device 208 starts the transition from the closed state to the open state. There is no open waiting time. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the opening / closing door 208b closes immediately after the fluctuation of the electric accessory opening lottery ends and the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the ordinary drawing unit 38. The transition from the state to the open state will be started.

However, strictly speaking, there is a time required for control after the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the normal drawing unit 38 until the opening / closing door 208b starts the transition from the closed state to the open state. .. In the present embodiment, the time required for control from the result of the electric accessory opening lottery being displayed by the normal drawing unit 38 until the opening / closing door 208b of the opening / closing ball entry device 208 starts the transition from the closed state to the open state. Is about 0.004 seconds. As for the reason why it is about 0.004 seconds, as described above, the main control device 60 performs the electric service support process (FIG. 12: S407, which will be described later in FIG. 76) in the normal process (FIG. 12) for 0.004 seconds. When the electric accessory opening lottery is won and the winning result is displayed on the normal drawing unit 38 (FIG. 76: S4520), the next patrol is executed in a cycle of 0.004 seconds. This is because the opening / closing process (FIG. 77: S4698) of the opening / closing door 208b is executed in the electric service opening / closing process (FIG. 76: S4522, which will be described later in FIG. 77) of the electric service support process (FIG. 76). That is, in the present embodiment, even if the time required for control is taken into consideration in addition to the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38 and the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b, the opening / closing is turned on after the game ball has passed through the through gate 206. The time until the opening / closing door 208b of the ball device 208 starts the transition from the closed state to the open state is from the time when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 until the game ball reaches the opening / closing device 208. It will be shorter than the time.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 and wins in the electric accessory opening lottery, the main control device 60 opens and closes the game ball that triggered the execution of the electric accessory opening lottery. The opening / closing door 208b is changed from the closed state to the open state before the timing of reaching the ball device 208. As a result, when the game ball that triggered the execution of the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the game ball enters the second starting port 208a provided inside the opening / closing door 208b. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a first high-frequency support mode and a second high-frequency support mode as types of high-frequency support modes for controlling the opening / closing door 208b. In the first high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery is set to 100%, and when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the opening / closing door 208b is opened once and the opening time is 0. It is set to .5 seconds. In the second high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery is set to 100%, and when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the opening / closing door 208b is opened once and the opening time is 1. It is set to 1 second. That is, the difference between the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode is the length of time that the opening / closing door 208b maintains the open state after transitioning from the closed state to the open state, and is the game ball launching mechanism. The number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a is different in the situation where the game balls are continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds according to 81.

FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram showing the behavior of the second start port unit 200 when the first high frequency support mode is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 71, the game ball has a constant firing intensity of 0.6, which can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launching mechanism 81. It is fired continuously at second intervals. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

As shown in the state A1, when the game ball GB1 reaches the second starting port unit 200 and enters the inside of the second starting port unit 200 through the opening 202, it reaches the alternating distribution mechanism 204. In the example shown in the state A1, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the right, so that the game ball that has reached the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held by the left side holding portion 204e. Then, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 rotates about 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the rotation axis 204d due to the weight of the game ball GB1 held by the left side holding portion 204e, and enters the state A2. ..

As shown in the state A2, when the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the left, the game ball GB1 held by the left holding portion 204e falls from the left holding portion 204e and is distributed to the left path R1. .. After that, the game ball GB1 distributed to the path R1 passes through the through gate 206. When the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, the main control device 60 executes an electric accessory opening lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the electric accessory opening lottery in the first high frequency support mode is set to 100%, and when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the opening / closing ball entry device 208 The opening / closing door 208b is opened once, and the opening time is set to 0.5 seconds. Further, the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38 for displaying the lottery result of the electric accessory opening lottery is set to 0.05 seconds. As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b is not provided, and after the winning result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed on the normal drawing unit 38, the opening / closing ball entry device 208 The time required for control until the opening / closing door 208b starts the transition to the open state is about 0.004 seconds. Therefore, the opening / closing door 208b of the opening / closing ball entry device 208 transitions to the open state about 0.06 seconds after the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, and maintains the open state for 0.5 seconds. As described above, in the present embodiment, the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 until the game ball reaches the opening / closing device 208 is about 0.2 seconds, so that the through gate 206 is used. The opening / closing door 208b is in the open state at the timing when the passing game ball GB1 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208, and the game ball GB1 enters the second starting port 208a. After that, the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the path R1 enters the opening 202 and enters the state A3.

As shown in the state A3, when the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the path R1 enters the opening 202, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is in a state of being tilted to the left, so that it is alternated. The game ball GB2 that has reached the distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held by the right side holding portion 204f. Then, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is rotated about 90 degrees clockwise (clockwise) about the rotation axis 204d by the weight of the game ball GB2 held by the right side holding portion 204f, and is in the state A4.

As shown in the state A4, when the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the right, the game ball GB2 held by the right holding portion 204f falls from the right holding portion 204f and is distributed to the right path R2. .. After that, the game ball GB2 distributed to the path R2 reaches the opening / closing device 208. Here, in the present embodiment, since the interval between the game balls launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 is 0.6 seconds, the game ball GB2 opens and closes after the game ball GB1 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208. The interval until reaching the ball entry device 208 is also about 0.6 seconds. Therefore, in the first high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 208b has already shifted to the closed state at the timing when the game ball GB2 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208, so that the game ball GB2 opens / closes / enters the ball. It is not possible to enter the second starting port 208a provided inside the device 208. After that, the state A1 is reached again, and the states A1 to A4 are repeated.

That is, in the first high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, the game ball continuously reaches the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball launch mechanism 81 at a predetermined firing intensity at intervals of 0.6 seconds. When the game ball GB1 that has been distributed to the path R1 and passed through the through gate 206 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208, the opening / closing door 208b has transitioned to the open state and is distributed to the path R2. At the timing when the game ball GB2 reaches the opening / closing device 208, the opening / closing door 208b is in the closed state.

FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing the behavior of the second start port unit 200 when the second high frequency support mode is executed. The states A1 to A3 of FIG. 72 are the same as the states A1 to A3 of FIG. 71 described above. However, in the second high-frequency support mode, since the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is set to 1.1 seconds, as shown in the state A4 of FIG. 72, it is next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the path R1. The opening / closing door 208b of the opening / closing door 208 is maintained in the open state at the timing when the game ball GB2 reaches the opening / closing door 208b, and the game ball GB2 has a second starting port provided inside the opening / closing door 208b. The ball will enter 208a.

That is, in the second high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, the game ball is continuously launched at a predetermined firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball launching mechanism 81 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The opening / closing door 208b is in the open state at the timing when the game ball GB1 that has been distributed to the first path and passed through the through gate 206 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208, and the second opening / closing door 208b is in the open state. The opening / closing door 208b is maintained in the open state even at the timing when the game ball GB2 distributed to the above path reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208.

FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. For reference, FIG. 73 also describes the types of high-frequency support modes executed after the end of the open / close execution mode and their contents. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode are set as the types of the high-frequency support mode executed after the end of the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 208a, the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is set to one.

As shown in FIG. 73 (a), when the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is won and the acquired jackpot type counter C2 has a value of 0 to 9, 8R It shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends. When the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 10 to 19, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot, and the mode shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends. When the acquired jackpot type counter C2 has a value of 20 to 24, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot, and shifts to the second high-frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends. When the acquired jackpot type counter C2 has a value of 25 to 29, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and shifts to the second high-frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends.

As shown in FIG. 73 (b), when the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 208a is won and the acquired jackpot type counter C2 has a value of 0 to 5, 8R It shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends. When the acquired jackpot type counter C2 has a value of 6 to 11, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends. When the acquired jackpot type counter C2 has a value of 12 to 20, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot, and shifts to the second high-frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends. When the acquired jackpot type counter C2 has a value of 21 to 29, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and shifts to the second high-frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends.

Here, the game ball was fired in a situation where the game ball was continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity capable of reaching the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball launching mechanism 81. The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls is defined as the ball ejection rate, and the ball ejection rate when the i (i is an integer of 1 or more) high frequency support mode is executed is calculated. It is defined as the ball ratio Mi. Hereinafter, the ball ejection rate M1 when the first high frequency support mode is executed and the ball ejection rate M2 when the second high frequency support mode is executed will be described.

In the first high-frequency support mode, the game ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity capable of reaching the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball launching mechanism 81. Then, as described above, one of the two launched game balls enters the second starting port 208a of the opening / closing ball entry device 208, and one game ball is paid out as a prize ball. It will be. Therefore, the ball ejection rate M1 when the first high frequency support mode is executed is as follows.
M1 = 1/2 = 0.50

Here, the fact that the ball ejection rate is less than 1 means that the game ball has a predetermined firing intensity capable of reaching the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball launching mechanism 81, and is continuous at intervals of 0.6 seconds. It means that the number of game balls on the player's hand is reduced in the situation where the ball is being fired. Therefore, in the first high frequency support mode, it means that the number of game balls held by the player is reduced. Specifically, in the first high-frequency support mode, two game balls are fired in 1.2 seconds and one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, so that the player's own game ball is , It will decrease at a rate of 1 in 1.2 seconds.

In the second high-frequency support mode, the game ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity capable of reaching the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball launching mechanism 81. Then, as described above, two of the two launched game balls enter the second starting port 208a of the opening / closing ball entry device 208, and the two game balls are paid out as prize balls. It will be. Therefore, the ball ejection rate M2 when the second high frequency support mode is executed is as follows.
M2 = 2/2 = 1.00

Here, the fact that the ball ejection rate is 1 means that the game ball has a predetermined firing intensity that allows the game ball to reach the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball launching mechanism 81, and is continuously at intervals of 0.6 seconds. It means that the number of game balls on the player's hand does not increase or decrease in the situation where the ball is being fired. Therefore, in the second high-frequency support mode, it means that the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. Specifically, in the second high-frequency support mode, two game balls are fired in 1.2 seconds and the two game balls are paid out as prize balls, so that the player's own game ball is It will not increase or decrease.

Further, the ratio of the i-high frequency support mode being executed to the case where the big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is won and the high-frequency support mode is executed is defined as PAi. Then, the ratio PA1 in which the first high-frequency support mode is executed and the ratio PA2 in which the second high-frequency support mode is executed are as follows.

PA1 = Number of jackpot type counter C2 values (0 to 19) / jackpot that will shift to the first high frequency support mode by winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 Total number of values of type counter C2 = 20/30
PA2 = Number of jackpot type counter C2 values (20 to 29) / jackpot that will shift to the second high frequency support mode by winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 Total number of values of type counter C2 = 10/30

Further, if the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is won and the high frequency support is executed, the total ball ejection rate is defined as the first total ball ejection rate T1. , The first total ball ejection rate T1 can be defined by the following equation (1).

In the above equation (1), n is the number of types of the high frequency support mode, and in this embodiment, n = 2. Therefore, the first total ball ejection rate T1 in the present embodiment is as follows.

T1 = M1 x PA1 + M2 x PA2
= 0.50 x (20/30) +1.00 x (10/30) = 0.67

That is, the first total ball ejection rate T1 is the sum of the ball ejection rates of each high-frequency support mode executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 multiplied by the execution rate. It means the expected value of the ball rate.

Further, the ratio of the i-high frequency support mode being executed to the case where the big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 208a is won and the high-frequency support mode is executed is defined as PBi. To do. Then, the ratio PB1 in which the first high-frequency support mode is executed and the ratio PB2 in which the second high-frequency support mode is executed are as follows.
PB1 = Number of jackpot type counter C2 values (0 to 11) / jackpot that will shift to the first high frequency support mode by winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 208a Total number of values of type counter C2 = 12/30
PB2 = Number of jackpot type counters C2 values (12 to 29) / jackpot that will be entered into the second high-frequency support mode by winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 208a. Total number of values of type counter C2 = 18/30

Further, if the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 208a is won and the high frequency support is executed, the total ball ejection rate is defined as the second total ball ejection rate T2. , The second total ball ejection rate T2 can be defined by the following equation (2).

In the above equation (2), n is the number of types of the high frequency support mode, and in this embodiment, n = 2. Therefore, the second total ball ejection rate T2 in this embodiment is as follows.

T2 = M1 x PB1 + M2 x PB2
= 0.50 x (12/30) +1.00 x (18/30) = 0.80

That is, the second total ball ejection rate T2 is the sum of the ball ejection rates of each high-frequency support mode executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 208a multiplied by the execution rate. It means the expected value of the ball rate.

As described above, in the present embodiment, both the value of the first total ball ejection rate T1 and the value of the second total ball ejection rate T2 are less than 1. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it means that the number of game balls held by the player does not increase but decreases in total.

Next, an example of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, processing different from that of the first embodiment will be described, and the description of the same processing will be omitted.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a winning process for the starting port executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the processing (FIG. 10) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described.

In step S4306, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment sets a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball. Since the processing in each of the other steps is the same as the processing executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment (FIG. 10), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the processing (FIG. 19) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described.

The main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores the second high-frequency support flag in step S4404. As a result, after ending the open / close execution mode corresponding to the probability change jackpot, the support mode shifts to the gaming state which is the second high frequency support mode. The second high-frequency support flag is used to determine whether or not the second high-frequency support mode is being executed.

Further, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores the first high-frequency support flag in step S4407. As a result, after ending the open / close execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, the support mode shifts to the gaming state, which is the first high-frequency support mode. Since the processing in each of the other steps is the same as the processing executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment (FIG. 19), the description thereof will be omitted. The first high frequency support flag is used to determine whether or not the first high frequency support mode is being executed.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an electric service support process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the processing (FIG. 20) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described.

The main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment performs an electric accessory opening lottery in step S4509. As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery in the high frequency support mode is set to 100%. Specifically, since the possible value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 0 to 249, if the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 0 to 249, the electric accessory opening lottery is won. .. Further, "25" (that is, 0.05 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery.

Further, in step S4511, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores the support winning flag and sets “1” in the second round counter area RC2 provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. To do. This means that the opening / closing door 208b is opened once when the electric accessory opening lottery is won during the high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment. Since the processing in each of the other steps is the same as the processing executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment (FIG. 20), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an electric service opening / closing process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. The main difference from the process (FIG. 21) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is that different open times are set for each of the two types of high-frequency support modes. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

In step S4601, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing door 208b as an electric accessory is being opened. Whether or not the opening / closing door 208b is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in the driving state. If it is determined that the opening / closing door 208b is open (S4601: YES), the process proceeds to step S4602.

In step S4602, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the opening / closing door 208b. If it is determined in step S4602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S4602: NO), the main electric service opening / closing process is terminated as it is. That is, if the opening duration of the opening / closing door 208b has not ended, the main electric service opening / closing process ends.

If it is determined in step S4602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S4602: YES), the process proceeds to step S4603, and a closing process for controlling the opening / closing door 208b to the closed state is performed. 2 Set “25” (that is, 0.05 sec) in the timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the means for measuring the opening duration of the opening / closing door 208b is "0", the opening / closing door 208b is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is opened / closed the door 208b this time. "25" is set in the second timer counter area T2, which is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the door. After executing step S4603, the process proceeds to step S4604.

In step S4604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S4605, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step S4605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S4605: NO), the main electric service opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S4605: YES), the process proceeds to step S4606 and the supporting flag is cleared. After that, the main electric service opening / closing process is completed.

If it is determined in step S4601 that the opening / closing door 208b is not open (S4601: NO), the process proceeds to step S4607 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the opening / closing door 208b. If it is determined in step S4607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S4607: NO), the main electric service opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4607 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S4607: YES), the process proceeds to step S4608, and an opening process for controlling the opening / closing door 208b to the open state is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S4609.

In step S4609, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, and if it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is not in progress (S4609: NO), the process proceeds to step S4610, and whether or not the first high frequency support mode is set. Is determined.

If it is determined in step S4610 that the first high frequency support mode is in progress (S4610: YES), the process proceeds to step S4611, and "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electric service opening / closing process is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4610 that the mode is not in the first high frequency support mode (S4610: NO), the process proceeds to step S4612 to determine whether or not the second high frequency support mode is in progress.

If it is determined in step S4612 that the second high frequency support mode is in progress (S4612: YES), the process proceeds to step S4613, and "550" (that is, 1.1 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electric service opening / closing process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4609 that the open / close execution mode is in progress (S4609: YES), or if it is determined in step S4612 that the second high frequency support mode is not in progress (S4612: NO), step S4614 is performed. Proceed and set "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electric service opening / closing process is completed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the game ball GB1 distributed to the path R1 can pass through the through gate 206, and when the opening / closing door 208b is in the open state, the second It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 208a. On the other hand, since the game ball GB2 arriving after the game ball GB1 is distributed to the path R2, it is impossible to pass through the through gate 206, and when the opening / closing door 208b is in the open state, the second starting port 208a It becomes possible to enter the ball. That is, of the two game balls GB1 and GB2, only the game ball GB1 can pass through the through gate 206, and each of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 enters the second starting port 208a. Whether or not it depends on whether or not the opening / closing door 208b is in the open state at the timing when each of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 reaches the opening / closing entry device 208. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, among the two game balls GB1 and GB2, the number of game balls that pass through the through gate 206 is set to one, and the number of game balls that enter the second starting port 208a is set to one. It can be changed depending on the state of the opening / closing door 208b.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes the electric accessory opening lottery when the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, and based on the result of the electric accessory opening lottery. Controls the open / close door 208b. Since the game ball GB2 that arrives after the game ball GB1 does not pass through the through gate 206, the main control device 60 uses the opening / closing door 208b at the timing when each of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 reaches the opening / closing door 208b. When the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, whether the state is set to the closed state or the open state, that is, whether or not each of the game balls GB1 and GB2 is allowed to enter the second starting port 208a is triggered. It is determined by the result of the electric accessory opening lottery to be executed and the type of support mode. Therefore, a series of controls triggered by the passage of one game ball GB1 through the through gate 206 to control whether or not each of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 is allowed to enter the second starting port 208a. Can be realized with.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the variable time from when the light emitting display unit of the normal drawing unit 38 starts the variable display to when the stop display corresponding to the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed is the electric accessory. The time is set to be shorter than the time from when the first game ball GB1 that triggered the open lottery passes through the through gate 206 until the game ball GB1 reaches the open / close ball entry device 208. Therefore, the normal drawing unit 38 can display the result of the lottery before the timing when the game ball GB1 which has passed through the through gate 206 and triggered the lottery reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208. Here, since the main control device 60 starts control based on the result of the lottery after the result of the lottery is displayed by the normal drawing unit 38, the game that has passed through the through gate 206 and triggered the lottery. The control based on the result of the lottery can be started before the timing when the ball GB1 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the light emitting display unit of the normal drawing unit 38 starts the variable display, the stop display corresponding to the winning result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed, and the opening / closing door 208b of the opening / closing ball entry device 208 is displayed. The time until the transition to the open state is started is such that after the first game ball GB1 that triggered the electric accessory opening lottery has passed through the through gate 206, the game ball GB1 opens and closes. The time is set to be shorter than the time to reach 208. Therefore, the main control device 60 can realize a high-frequency support mode in which the opening / closing door 208b is in the open state at the timing when the game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 206 reaches the opening / closing / entering device 208.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the main control device 60 has a different time length for maintaining the open state after the opening / closing door 208b has transitioned from the closed state to the open state for each type of the high frequency support mode. Since it is controlled, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 can be made different for each type of high-frequency support mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the game ball GB1 distributed to the path R1 enters the second start port 208a, and the game ball GB2 that arrives after the game ball GB1 does not enter the second start port 208a. The first high-frequency support mode (ball ejection rate M1 = 0.50) and the second high-frequency support mode (ball ejection rate M2 = 1.00) in which both the game balls GB1 and GB2 enter the second starting port 208a. ) And have been realized. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, since it is possible to realize a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes having different ball output rates, it is possible to add intonation to the game and improve the interest of the game.

I. Ninth embodiment:
Next, the ninth embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the eighth embodiment is that the configuration of the second starting port unit is different and that three types of high-frequency support modes are set. In the following description, the configuration of the second start port unit 300 included in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the control of the second start port unit 300 will be mainly described. The description of the same configuration and processing as those of the first to eighth embodiments will be omitted.

FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration of a second starting port unit 300 included in the pachinko machine of the ninth embodiment. The second starting port unit 300 includes an opening 302 into which a game ball can enter, a path R1 provided on the left side downstream of the opening 302, and a path R2 provided on the right side downstream of the opening 302. It is provided with a first alternating distribution mechanism 304 that alternately distributes the game ball that has entered the opening 302 into the left path R1 and the right path R2. The second start port unit 300 further includes a second alternating distribution mechanism 305 provided downstream of the path R1, a path R11 provided on the left side downstream of the second alternating distribution mechanism 305, and a second alternating vibration. It is provided with a path R12 provided on the right side downstream of the distribution mechanism 305. A through gate 306 through which a game ball can pass is provided downstream of the path R11, and an opening / closing ball entry device 308 is provided downstream of the through gate 306, the path R12, and the path R2.

The first alternating distribution mechanism 304 is configured to alternately distribute the game ball that has entered the opening 302 into the left path R1 and the right path R2. Specifically, the alternating distribution mechanism 304 includes a central piece 304a formed in the center, a left piece 304b formed on the left side of the central piece 304a, and a right side formed on the right side of the central piece 304a. It includes a single portion 304c and a rotating shaft 304d provided between the left single portion 304b and the right single portion 304c. The region sandwiched between the central piece 304a and the left side piece 304b functions as a left side holding part 304e that temporarily holds the game ball. Further, the region sandwiched between the central piece portion 304a and the right side piece portion 304c functions as a right side holding portion 304f that temporarily holds the game ball. The behavior of the first alternating distribution mechanism 304 when the game ball arrives is the same as the behavior of the alternate distribution mechanism 204 described in the eighth embodiment.

The second alternating distribution mechanism 305 is configured to alternately distribute the game balls distributed to the path R1 to the left path R11 and the right path R12. Specifically, the second alternating distribution mechanism 305 is formed on the central piece 305a formed in the center, the left side piece 305b formed on the left side of the central piece 305a, and the right side of the central piece 305a. It is provided with a right side piece 305c and a rotating shaft 305d provided between the left side piece 305b and the right side piece 305c. The region sandwiched between the central piece 305a and the left side piece 305b functions as a left side holding part 305e that temporarily holds the game ball. Further, the region sandwiched between the central piece 305a and the right side piece 305c functions as a right side holding part 305f that temporarily holds the game ball. The behavior of the second alternating distribution mechanism 305 when the game ball arrives is the same as the behavior of the alternate distribution mechanism 204 described in the eighth embodiment.

The opening / closing ball entry device 308 includes an opening / closing door 308b that opens and closes back and forth with respect to the lower rotation axis, and a second starting port 308a into which a game ball can enter is provided inside the opening / closing door 308b. Further, inside the opening / closing door 308b, a guide path 308c inclined toward the second starting port 308a is provided, and the game ball entering the inside of the opening / closing door 308b is the second along the guideway 308c. It is guided to the starting port 308a. The second starting port 308a has the same role as the second starting port 34 in the above embodiment. When the opening / closing door 308b is in the closed state, it is impossible for the game ball to enter the second starting port 308a. On the other hand, when the opening / closing door 308b is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port 308a. That is, the opening / closing door 308b has a function of transitioning the state of the second starting port 308a between the non-entry state and the possible entry state. In the normal state, the opening / closing door 308b is in a closed state, and the second starting port 308a is in a state in which the ball cannot enter.

The through gate 306 is provided with a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. When the game ball passes through the through gate 306, the main control device 60 triggers the passage of the game ball through the through gate 306 and causes an internal lottery (electric combination) as to whether or not the above-mentioned opening / closing door 308b is changed to the open state. Execute the open lottery). As a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the opening / closing door 308b is selected to be in the open state, the main control device 60 displays the result of the electric accessory opening lottery on the normal drawing unit 38 and closes the opening / closing door 308b. Transition from the state to the open state.

The path R11 is configured so that the distributed game balls can pass through the through gate 306, and the distributed game balls are in an open state with the opening / closing door 308b of the opening / closing ball entry device 308. In some cases, it is configured so that the ball can enter the second starting port 308a. In the present embodiment, the path R11x branched from the path R11 is provided, but the game balls distributed to the path R11 are configured to always pass through the through gate 306. However, as another embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the game balls distributed to the path R11 may pass through the path R11x without passing through the through gate 306.

The route R2 and the route R12 are configured so that the distributed game balls cannot pass through the through gate 306, and the distributed game balls are formed by the opening / closing door 308b of the opening / closing ball entry device 308. It is configured so that the ball can enter the second starting port 308a when it is in the open state.

In the present embodiment, after the game ball has passed through the through gate 306, the result of the electric accessory opening lottery executed when the game ball has passed through the through gate 306 is displayed by the normal drawing unit 38. The time until (that is, the variable time from when the light emitting display unit of the normal drawing unit 38 starts the variable display to when the stop display corresponding to the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed) is the through gate of the game ball. The time is set to be shorter than the time from passing through 306 until the game ball reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 308. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 306 until the game ball reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 308 is about 0.2 seconds, so that the normal drawing unit 38 The fluctuation time of is set to 0.05 seconds.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is the time from when the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the normal drawing unit 38 until the opening / closing door 208b of the opening / closing ball entry device 208 starts the transition from the closed state to the open state. There is no open waiting time. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the opening / closing door 208b closes immediately after the fluctuation of the electric accessory opening lottery ends and the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the ordinary drawing unit 38. The transition from the state to the open state will be started.

Also in the present embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment described above, after the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the normal drawing unit 38, the opening / closing door 208b starts the transition from the closed state to the open state. There is a time required for control of about 0.004 seconds, but even if the time required for control is taken into consideration in addition to the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38 and the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b, the game is played. The time from when the ball passes through the through gate 306 until the opening / closing door 308b of the opening / closing ball entry device 308 starts the transition from the closed state to the open state is after the game ball has passed through the through gate 306. The time required for the game ball to reach the opening / closing device 308 is set to be shorter than the time required for the game ball to reach the opening / closing device 308.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the through gate 306 and is won in the electric accessory opening lottery, the main control device 60 opens and closes the game ball that triggered the execution of the electric accessory opening lottery. The opening / closing door 308b is changed from the closed state to the open state before the timing of reaching the ball device 308. As a result, when the game ball that triggered the execution of the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the game ball enters the second starting port 308a provided inside the opening / closing door 308b. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a first high-frequency support mode, a second high-frequency support mode, and a third high-frequency support mode as types of high-frequency support modes for controlling the opening / closing door 308b. ing. In the first high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery is set to 100%, and when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the opening / closing door 308b is opened once and the opening time is 0. It is set to .5 seconds. In the second high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery is set to 100%, and the opening / closing door 308b is opened once and the opening time is 1 when the electric accessory opening lottery is won. It is set to 1 second. In the third high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery is set to 100%, and the opening / closing door 308b is opened once and the opening time is 1 when the electric accessory opening lottery is won. It is set to .7 seconds. That is, the difference between the first to third high-frequency support modes is the length of time that the opening / closing door 308b maintains the open state after the transition from the closed state to the open state.

FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing the trajectory of the game ball when the game ball enters the second starting port unit 300. When the first alternating distribution mechanism 304 provided in the second starting port unit 300 is tilted to the right and the second alternating distribution mechanism 305 is tilted to the right, the first one. When the game ball GB1 enters through the opening 302, the game ball GB1 is distributed to the path R1 by the first alternating distribution mechanism 304 and to the path R11 by the second alternating distribution mechanism 305. As a result, the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 306 and enters the second starting port 308a provided inside the opening / closing door 308b if the opening / closing door 308b of the opening / closing door 308b is in the open state. It will be. That is, the locus of the first game ball GB1 is the locus L1 shown in FIG. 79.

When the second game ball GB2 following the game ball GB1 enters through the opening 302, the game ball GB2 is distributed to the path R2 by the first alternating distribution mechanism 304. As a result, the game ball GB2 reaches the opening / closing door 308 without passing through the through gate 306, and if the opening / closing door 308b of the opening / closing door 308b is in the open state, it is provided inside the opening / closing door 308b. The ball will enter the second starting port 308a. That is, the locus of the second game ball GB2 is the locus L2 shown in FIG. 79.

When the third game ball GB3 following the game ball GB2 enters through the opening 302, the game ball GB3 is distributed to the path R1 by the first alternating distribution mechanism 304 and the path by the second alternating distribution mechanism 305. It is distributed to R12. As a result, the game ball GB3 reaches the opening / closing door 308 without passing through the through gate 306, and if the opening / closing door 308b of the opening / closing door 308b is in the open state, it is provided inside the opening / closing door 308b. The ball will enter the second starting port 308a. That is, the locus of the third game ball GB3 is the locus L3 shown in FIG. 79.

When the fourth game ball GB4 following the game ball GB3 enters through the opening 302, the game ball GB4 is distributed to the path R2 by the first alternating distribution mechanism 304. As a result, the game ball GB4 reaches the opening / closing door 308 without passing through the through gate 306, and if the opening / closing door 308b of the opening / closing door 308b is in the open state, it is provided inside the opening / closing door 308b. The ball will enter the second starting port 308a. That is, the locus of the game ball GB4 that has entered the fourth ball is the locus L4 shown in FIG. 79.

In the situation where the fifth game ball following the game ball GB4 enters through the opening 302, the first alternating distribution mechanism 304 is in a state of being tilted to the right, and the second alternating distribution mechanism 305 is It is tilted to the right. Therefore, the locus of the fifth game ball is the same as the locus L1 of the first game ball GB1. That is, the second starting port unit 300 of the present embodiment returns to the original state when four game balls enter.

Here, in a situation where the game ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity capable of reaching the second starting port unit 300 by the game ball launching mechanism 81, the above-mentioned first The case where the 1st to 3rd high frequency support modes are executed will be described.

When the first high-frequency support mode is executed, the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 306 is set to 100%, and it is electric. The number of times the opening / closing door 308b is opened once and the opening time is set to 0.5 seconds when the character opening lottery is won. Therefore, the opening / closing door 308b is in an open state at the timing when the first game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 306 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 308, but the 2nd to 4th game balls GB2 to GB4 Is in a closed state at the timing of reaching the opening / closing ball entry device 308. As a result, when the first high-frequency support mode is executed, only the first game ball GB1 out of the four game balls GB1 to GB4 is provided inside the opening / closing door 308b for the second start. The ball will enter the mouth 308a.

When the second high-frequency support mode is executed, the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 306 is set to 100%, and it is electric. The number of times the opening / closing door 308b is opened once and the opening time is set to 1.1 seconds when the character opening lottery is won. Therefore, the opening / closing door 308b is in an open state at the timing when the first game ball GB1 passing through the through gate 306 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 308 and the timing when the second game ball GB2 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 308. However, the 3rd to 4th game balls GB3 to GB4 are closed at the timing when they reach the opening / closing device 308. As a result, when the second high-frequency support mode is executed, the first and second game balls GB1 and GB2 of the four game balls GB1 to GB4 are provided inside the opening / closing door 308b. The ball will enter the second starting port 308a.

When the third high-frequency support mode is executed, the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 306 is set to 100%, and it is electric. The number of times the opening / closing door 308b is opened and the opening time is set to 1.7 seconds when the character opening lottery is won. Therefore, in the opening / closing door 308b, the timing at which the first game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 306 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 308 and the timing at which the second game ball GB2 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 308 and the third The game ball GB3 is in the open state at the timing when it reaches the open / close entry device 308, but is closed at the timing when the fourth game ball GB4 reaches the open / close entry device 308. As a result, when the third high-frequency support mode is executed, the 1st to 3rd game balls GB1 to GB3 out of the 4 game balls GB1 to GB4 are provided inside the opening / closing door 308b. The ball will enter the second starting port 308a.

FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. For reference, FIG. 80 also describes the types of high-frequency support modes executed after the end of the open / close execution mode and their contents. As described above, in the present embodiment, the types of the high-frequency support mode executed after the end of the open / close execution mode are the first high-frequency support mode, the second high-frequency support mode, and the third high-frequency support mode. Is set. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the second starting port 308a is set to two.

As shown in FIG. 80 (a), when the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is won and the acquired jackpot type counter C2 has a value of 0 to 9, 8R It shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends. When the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 10 to 19, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot, and the mode shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends. When the acquired jackpot type counter C2 has a value of 20 to 24, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot, and shifts to the second high-frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends. When the acquired jackpot type counter C2 has a value of 25 to 29, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and shifts to the third high-frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends.

As shown in FIG. 80 (b), when the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 308a is won and the acquired jackpot type counter C2 has a value of 0 to 5, 8R It shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends. When the acquired jackpot type counter C2 has a value of 6 to 11, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends. When the acquired jackpot type counter C2 has a value of 12 to 20, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot, and shifts to the second high-frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends. When the acquired jackpot type counter C2 has a value of 21 to 29, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and shifts to the third high-frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends.

Here, the game ball was fired in a situation where the game ball was continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity capable of reaching the second starting port unit 300 by the game ball launching mechanism 81. The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls is defined as the ball ejection rate, and the ball ejection rate when the i (i is an integer of 1 or more) high frequency support mode is executed is calculated. It is defined as the ball ratio Mi. In the following, the ball ejection rate M1 when the first high frequency support mode is executed, the ball ejection rate M2 when the second high frequency support mode is executed, and the second high frequency support mode are executed. The ball ejection rate M3 in the case will be described.

In the first high-frequency support mode, the game ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity capable of reaching the second starting port unit 300 by the game ball launching mechanism 81. Then, as described above, one of the four launched game balls enters the second starting port 308a of the opening / closing ball entry device 308, and the two game balls are paid out as prize balls. It will be. Therefore, the ball ejection rate M1 when the first high frequency support mode is executed is as follows.
M1 = 2/4 = 0.50

Here, the fact that the ball ejection rate is less than 1 means that the game ball has a predetermined firing intensity capable of reaching the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball launching mechanism 81, and is continuous at intervals of 0.6 seconds. It means that the number of game balls on the player's hand is reduced in the situation where the ball is being fired. Therefore, in the first high frequency support mode, it means that the number of game balls held by the player is reduced. Specifically, in the first high-frequency support mode, four game balls are fired in 2.4 seconds and two game balls are paid out as prize balls, so that the player's own game ball is It will decrease at a rate of 2 in 2.4 seconds (1 in 1.2 seconds).

In the second high-frequency support mode, the game ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity capable of reaching the second starting port unit 300 by the game ball launching mechanism 81. Then, as described above, two of the four launched game balls enter the second starting port 308a of the opening / closing ball entry device 308, and the four game balls are paid out as prize balls. It will be. Therefore, the ball ejection rate M2 when the second high frequency support mode is executed is as follows.
M2 = 4/4 = 1.00

Here, the fact that the ball ejection rate is 1 means that the game ball has a predetermined firing intensity that allows the game ball to reach the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball launching mechanism 81, and is continuously at intervals of 0.6 seconds. It means that the number of game balls on the player's hand does not increase or decrease in the situation where the ball is being fired. Therefore, in the second high-frequency support mode, it means that the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. Specifically, in the second high-frequency support mode, four game balls are fired in 2.4 seconds and four game balls are paid out as prize balls, so that the player's own game ball is It will not increase or decrease.

In the third high-frequency support mode, the game ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity capable of reaching the second starting port unit 300 by the game ball launching mechanism 81. Then, as described above, three of the four launched game balls enter the second starting port 308a of the opening / closing ball opening / closing device 308, and the six game balls are paid out as prize balls. It will be. Therefore, the ball ejection rate M3 when the third high frequency support mode is executed is as follows.
M3 = 6/4 = 1.50

Here, the fact that the ball ejection rate exceeds 1 means that the game ball has a predetermined firing intensity that allows the game ball to reach the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball launching mechanism 81, and is continuous at intervals of 0.6 seconds. This means that the number of game balls on the player's hand increases in the situation where the ball is being fired. Therefore, in the third high frequency support mode, it means that the number of game balls held by the player increases. Specifically, in the third high-frequency support mode, four game balls are fired in 2.4 seconds and six game balls are paid out as prize balls, so that the player's own game ball is It will increase at a rate of 2 in 2.4 seconds (1 in 1.2 seconds).

Further, the ratio of the i-high frequency support mode being executed to the case where the big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is won and the high frequency support mode is executed is defined as PAi. To do. Then, the ratio PA1 in which the first high-frequency support mode is executed, the ratio PA2 in which the second high-frequency support mode is executed, and the ratio PA3 in which the third high-frequency support mode is executed are as follows.

PA1 = Number of jackpot type counter C2 values (0 to 19) / jackpot that will shift to the first high frequency support mode by winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 Total number of values of type counter C2 = 20/30
PA2 = Number of jackpot type counter C2 values (20 to 24) / jackpot that will shift to the second high-frequency support mode by winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 Total number of values of type counter C2 = 5/30
PA3 = Number of jackpot type counters C2 values (25 to 29) / jackpot that will shift to the third high-frequency support mode by winning a jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 Total number of values of type counter C2 = 5/30

Further, if the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is won and the high frequency support is executed, the total ball ejection rate is defined as the first total ball ejection rate T1. , The first total ball ejection rate T1 can be defined by the following equation (3).

In the above equation (3), n is the number of types of the high frequency support mode, and in this embodiment, n = 3. Therefore, the first total ball ejection rate T1 in the present embodiment is as follows.

T1 = M1 x PA1 + M2 x PA2 + M3 x PA3
= 0.50 x (20/30) +1.00 x (5/30) +1.50 x (5/30)
= 0.75

That is, the first total ball ejection rate T1 is the sum of the ball ejection rates of each high-frequency support mode executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 multiplied by the execution rate. It means the expected value of the ball rate.

Further, the ratio of the i-high frequency support mode being executed to the case where the big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 308a is won and the high-frequency support mode is executed is defined as PBi. To do. Then, the ratio PB1 in which the first high-frequency support mode is executed, the ratio PB2 in which the second high-frequency support mode is executed, and the ratio PB3 in which the third high-frequency support mode is executed are as follows.

PB1 = Number of jackpot type counter C2 values (0 to 11) / jackpot that will shift to the first high frequency support mode by winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 308a Total number of values of type counter C2 = 12/30
PB2 = Number of value (12 to 20) of the jackpot type counter C2 (12 to 20) that wins the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 308a and shifts to the second high frequency support mode / jackpot Total number of values of type counter C2 = 9/30
PB3 = Number of jackpot type counter C2 values (21-29) / jackpot that will shift to the third high-frequency support mode by winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 308a Total number of values of type counter C2 = 9/30

Further, if the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 308a is won and the high frequency support is executed, the total ball ejection rate is defined as the second total ball ejection rate T2. , The second total ball ejection rate T2 can be defined by the following equation (4).

In the above equation (4), n is the number of types of the high frequency support mode, and in this embodiment, n = 3. Therefore, the second total ball ejection rate T2 in the present embodiment is as follows.

T2 = M1 x PB1 + M2 x PB2 + M3 x PB3
= 0.50 x (12/30) +1.00 x (6/30) +1.50 x (6/30)
= 0.95

That is, the second total ball ejection rate T2 is the sum of the ball ejection rates of each high-frequency support mode executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 308a multiplied by the execution rate. It means the expected value of the ball rate.

As described above, in the present embodiment, although the third high-frequency support mode in which the ball ejection rate exceeds 1 can be executed, the value of the first total ball ejection rate T1 and the second total ball ejection rate T2 All of the values are less than 1. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it means that the number of game balls held by the player does not increase but decreases in total.

Next, an example of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, processing different from that of the eighth embodiment will be described, and the description of the same processing will be omitted.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a winning process for the starting port executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the processes (FIGS. 10 and 74) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first and eighth embodiments will be described.

In step S4706, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment sets a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out two game balls. Since the processing in each of the other steps is the same as the processing executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first and eighth embodiments (FIGS. 10 and 74), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. The main difference from the processing (FIG. 75) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment is the first to third high-frequency support corresponding to each of the three types of high-frequency support modes. This is the point to store the flag. The 1st to 3rd high frequency support flags are used to determine whether or not the 1st to 3rd high frequency support modes are being executed, respectively. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

In step S4801, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 64 as the jackpot type flag.

If it is determined in step S4801 that the 16R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 64 (S4801: YES), the process proceeds to step S4802 to execute the flag erasing process. The flag erasing process is a process of erasing information for specifying the game state. Specifically, when the open / close execution mode flag, the high probability mode flag, the first high frequency support flag, the second high frequency support flag, and the third high frequency support flag are stored, they are deleted and they are deleted. If these flags are not stored, they are maintained in that state. After executing step S4802, the process proceeds to step S4803.

In step S4803, the high probability mode flag is stored, and then the process proceeds to step S4804 to store the third high frequency support flag. As a result, after ending the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot, the winning / losing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode and the support mode shifts to the gaming state of the third high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the third high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big hit. Then, the process proceeds to step S4805.

In step S4805, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. To do. After that, the process proceeds to step S4806, and the third high-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the support mode is the third high-frequency support mode, is sent to the voice emission control device 90. Set as the command to be sent. After that, the transition process at the end of the main opening / closing execution mode is terminated. The voice emission control device 90 that has received the third high-frequency support command starts control so as to execute an effect that suggests to the player that the support mode is the third high-frequency support mode. As an effect suggesting that the support mode is the third high-frequency support mode, for example, an effect suggesting that it is advantageous for the player even in a situation where the number of game balls is increasing and it is difficult to win a big hit. Can be mentioned.

If it is determined in step S4801 that the 16R probability variation flag is not stored in the RAM 64 (S4801: NO), the process proceeds to step S4807, and whether or not the 8R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 64 as the jackpot type flag is determined. judge. If it is determined in step S4807 that the 8R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 64 (S4807: YES), the process proceeds to step S4808 to execute the flag erasing process. Then, the process proceeds to step S4809.

In step S4809, the high probability mode flag is stored, and then the process proceeds to step S4810 to store the second high frequency support flag. As a result, after ending the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot, the winning / losing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode and the support mode shifts to the gaming state of the second high frequency support mode. It should be noted that these high-probability modes and the second high-frequency support modes are maintained at least until the next jackpot winning occurs. Then, the process proceeds to step S4811.

In step S4811, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. To do. After that, the process proceeds to step S4812, and the second high-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode, is sent to the voice emission control device 90. Set as the command to be sent. After that, the transition process at the end of the main opening / closing execution mode is terminated. The voice emission control device 90 that has received the second high-frequency support command starts control so as to execute an effect suggesting that the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode. As an effect suggesting that the support mode is the second high frequency support mode, for example, the number of game balls has not increased or decreased, and even if the jackpot is difficult to win, it is not disadvantageous to the player. Suggestive effects can be mentioned.

If it is determined in step S4807 that the 8R probability variation flag is not stored in the RAM 64 (S4807: NO), the process proceeds to step S4813 to execute the flag erasing process. Then, the process proceeds to step S4814.

In step S4814, after storing the first high frequency support flag, the process proceeds to step S4815, and "100" is set in the game count counter area provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the game count counter area is a value indicating the number of games when the first high frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. As a result, after ending the open / close execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, the winning / losing lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode and the support mode shifts to the gaming state of the first high frequency support mode. However, in this case, the first high-frequency support mode ends after the game times are executed 100 times, and after that, the winning / losing lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. Transition. After executing step S4815, the process proceeds to step S4816.

In step S4816, the first high-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Set as a command of. After that, the transition process at the end of the main opening / closing execution mode is terminated. The voice emission control device 90 that has received the first high-frequency support command starts control so as to execute an effect that suggests to the player that the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode. As an effect suggesting that the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, for example, an effect suggesting that the situation where the number of game balls is decreasing and the jackpot is difficult to win is disadvantageous to the player. Can be done.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an electric service opening / closing process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. The main difference from the process (FIG. 77) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment is that different open times are set for each of the three types of high-frequency support modes. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

In step S4901, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing door 308b as an electric accessory is being opened. Whether or not the opening / closing door 308b is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in the driving state. If it is determined that the opening / closing door 308b is open (S4901: YES), the process proceeds to step S4902.

In step S4902, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the opening / closing door 308b. If it is determined in step S4902 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S4902: NO), the main electric service opening / closing process is terminated as it is. That is, if the opening duration of the opening / closing door 308b has not ended, the main electric function opening / closing process ends.

If it is determined in step S4902 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S4902: YES), the process proceeds to step S4903, and a closing process for controlling the opening / closing door 308b to the closed state is performed. 2 Set “25” (that is, 0.05 sec) in the timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the means for measuring the opening duration of the opening / closing door 308b is "0", the opening / closing door 308b is closed and the opening / closing door 308b is opened this time. "25" is set in the second timer counter area T2, which is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the door. After executing step S4903, the process proceeds to step S4904.

In step S4904, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S4905, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step S4905 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S4905: NO), the main electric service opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4905 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S4905: YES), the process proceeds to step S4906 and the supporting flag is cleared. After that, the main electric service opening / closing process is completed.

If it is determined in step S4901 that the opening / closing door 308b is not open (S4901: NO), the process proceeds to step S4907 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the opening / closing door 308b. If it is determined in step S4907 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S4907: NO), the main electric service opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4907 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S4907: YES), the process proceeds to step S4908, and an opening process for controlling the opening / closing door 308b to the open state is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S4909.

In step S4909, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, and if it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is not in progress (S4909: NO), the process proceeds to step S4910, and whether or not the first high frequency support mode is set. Is determined.

If it is determined in step S4910 that the first high frequency support mode is in progress (S4910: YES), the process proceeds to step S4911, and "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electric service opening / closing process is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4910 that the mode is not in the first high frequency support mode (S4910: NO), the process proceeds to step S4912 to determine whether or not the second high frequency support mode is in progress.

If it is determined in step S4912 that the second high frequency support mode is in progress (S4912: YES), the process proceeds to step S4913, and "550" (that is, 1.1 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electric service opening / closing process is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4912 that the second high frequency support mode is not in progress (S4912: NO), the process proceeds to step S4914 to determine whether or not the third high frequency support mode is in progress.

If it is determined in step S4914 that the third high frequency support mode is in progress (S4914: YES), the process proceeds to step S4915, and "850" (that is, 1.7 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electric service opening / closing process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4909 that the open / close execution mode is in progress (S4909: YES), or if it is determined in step S4914 that the third high frequency support mode is not in progress (S4914: NO), step S4916 is performed. Proceed and set "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electric service opening / closing process is completed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the first game ball GB1 distributed to the path R11 can pass through the through gate 306, and the opening / closing door 308b is in the open state. Can enter the second starting port 308a. On the other hand, the three game balls GB2, GB3, and GB4 that arrived after the first game ball GB1 are distributed to the path R2 or the path R12, so that they cannot pass through the through gate 306 and are opened and closed. When the door 308b is in the open state, it is possible to enter the second starting port 308a. That is, of the four game balls, only the first game ball GB1 can pass through the through gate 306, and each of the four game balls is connected to the second starting port 308a. Whether or not to enter the ball depends on whether or not the opening / closing door 308b is in the open state at the timing when each of the four game balls reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 308. Therefore, out of the four game balls, the number of game balls passing through the through gate 306 is set to one, and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 308a changes depending on the state of the opening / closing door 308b. Can be made to.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the main control device 60 controls the opening / closing door 308b based on the result of the electric accessory opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 306. Since the three game balls GB2, GB3, and GB4 that arrived after the first game ball GB1 do not pass through the through gate 306, in the main control device 60, each of the four game balls enters the opening / closing device 308. Whether to set the opening / closing door 308b to the closed state or the open state at the arrival timing, that is, whether to allow each of the four game balls to enter the second starting port 308a is determined by the first game. It is determined by the result of the electric accessory opening lottery executed when the ball GB1 passes through the through gate 306 and the type of the support mode. Therefore, control of whether or not each of the four game balls is allowed to enter the second starting port 308a is realized by a series of controls triggered by the passage of the first game ball GB1 through the through gate 306. can do.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the variable time from when the light emitting display unit of the normal drawing unit 38 starts the variable display to when the stop display corresponding to the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed is the electric accessory. The time is set to be shorter than the time from when the first game ball GB1 that triggered the open lottery passes through the through gate 206 until the game ball GB1 reaches the open / close ball entry device 208. Therefore, the normal drawing unit 38 opens the electric accessory before the timing when the first game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 306 and triggered the lottery for opening the electric accessory reaches the opening / closing device 308. The result of the lottery can be displayed. Here, since the main control device 60 starts control based on the result of the electric accessory opening lottery after the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the normal drawing unit 38, the main control device 60 passes through the through gate 306. The control based on the result of the electric accessory opening lottery can be started before the timing when the first game ball GB1 that triggered the electric accessory opening lottery reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 308. As a result, the main control device 60 realizes a high-frequency support mode in which the opening / closing door 308b is in the open state at the timing when the first game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 306 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 308. Is possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the main control device 60 has a different time length for maintaining the open state after the opening / closing door 208b transitions from the closed state to the open state for each type of the high frequency support mode. Therefore, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 308a out of the four game balls GB1 to GB4 can be made different for each type of high-frequency support mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the first game ball GB1 enters the second start port 308a, and the three game balls GB2, GB3, and GB4 that arrive after the game ball GB1 are the second start port. The first high-frequency support mode (ball exit rate M1 = 0.50) that does not enter the 308a, and the first and second game balls GB1 and GB2 enter the second starting port 308a and are the third. And the second high-frequency support mode (ball ejection rate M2 = 1.00) in which the fourth game balls GB3 and GB4 do not enter the second starting port 308a, and the first to third game balls GB1 and GB2 and GB3 enter the second starting port 308a, and the fourth game ball GB4 does not enter the second starting port 308a, and a third high-frequency support mode (ball exit rate M3 = 1.50) is realized. Has been done. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, since it is possible to realize a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes having different ball output rates, it is possible to add intonation to the game and improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, there are two stages of alternating distribution mechanisms (first alternating distribution mechanism 304, second alternating distribution mechanism 305) that alternately distribute the game ball to any one of the two paths. Since the configuration combined with the above is adopted, one game ball GB1 that has reached the second starting port unit 300 is distributed to the path R11, and three game balls GB1 and GB2 that have arrived after the game ball GB1. The function of allocating the GB3 to a route (routes R2, R12) different from the route R11 can be realized by a simple configuration as compared with a configuration realized by using electronic control or the like. As a configuration for realizing the function by using electronic control or the like, for example, a structure in which the number of game balls reaching the second starting port unit 300 is measured by using a counter or the like and is driven by an electric force. It can be mentioned that the game balls are distributed by using the above.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as a type of high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support mode is executed even though the third high-frequency support mode in which the ball output rate exceeds 1 can be executed. Since the total ball ejection rate (first total ball ejection rate T1 and second total ball ejection rate T2) is less than 1, it is necessary to give the player an uplifting feeling in the third high frequency support mode in which the number of game balls increases. By suppressing the first total ball ejection rate T1 and the second total ball ejection rate T2 to less than 1, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the gambling spirit of the player. As a result, it is possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the number of game balls held by the player increases during the period in which the third high-frequency support mode in which the ball output rate exceeds 1 is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an expectation that the third high-frequency support mode should continue for a long time. In particular, in the present embodiment, when the 16R probability variation jackpot is won, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery shifts to the high probability mode and the third high frequency support mode is executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Then, the high probability mode and the third high frequency support mode continue until the next big hit lottery is won. That is, since the high probability mode does not end until the next big hit lottery is won (so-called loop machine), it is guaranteed to win the big hit lottery during the high probability mode, and until the big hit lottery is won, The third high-frequency support mode in which the number of game balls increases will continue. Therefore, since the player is guaranteed to win the jackpot lottery during the high probability mode, he wants the third high frequency support mode to continue for a long time without winning the jackpot lottery for as long as possible. You will have a sense of expectation. As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the player with a new expectation that the third high-frequency support mode should be continued for a long time without winning the jackpot lottery for as long as possible during the high-probability mode. Because it can be done, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in such a configuration, if the winning probability of the jackpot lottery in the high probability mode is set low, the probability that the high probability mode and the third high frequency support mode will continue for a long time increases. Therefore, the expected value of the number of game balls that can be increased in the third high-frequency support mode can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

If the high-probability mode and the third high-frequency support mode adopt a configuration (so-called special time machine (ST machine)) that ends after the jackpot lottery has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 120 times), Since the player wants to continue the third high-frequency support mode for as long as possible to increase the number of game balls, he expects that he does not want to win the jackpot lottery in the game times that have just shifted to the high-probability mode. , You will have the expectation that you will win the jackpot lottery before the high probability mode ends.

Then, when the jackpot lottery is won in the game rounds shortly after the transition to the high probability mode, the player has a disappointing feeling that the third high frequency support mode has ended in a short period of time. So, after all, you will feel satisfied that you won the big hit lottery before the high probability mode ends. In addition, when the jackpot lottery was won in the game round just before the end of the high probability mode, the player was able to continue the third high frequency support mode for a long period of time and greatly increase the number of game balls. You will be satisfied and satisfied that you won the jackpot lottery before the high probability mode ends. That is, when the jackpot lottery is won in the game times just before the end of the high probability mode, the player can enjoy double satisfaction. In addition, if the jackpot lottery is not won by the end of the high probability mode, the player is satisfied that the third high frequency support mode continues for a long period of time and the number of game balls can be significantly increased. On the other hand, I have a feeling that I didn't win the jackpot lottery before the high probability mode ended. That is, since it is possible to provide the player with a complicated intonation of the feelings in the high probability mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, another example of the configuration of the second starting port unit will be described. As described below, various configurations can be adopted as the second starting port unit.

FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another example of the configuration of the second starting port unit. For reference, FIG. 84A schematically shows the second starting port unit 300 of the ninth embodiment. Further, FIG. 84 shows the order and distribution destinations of the game balls that have entered the second starting port unit.

FIG. 84 (B) schematically shows the second starting port unit 300B as Example 1. The difference from the second starting port unit 300 of the ninth embodiment shown in FIG. 84 (A) is that the game ball distributed to the path R2 has the second starting port 308a even when the opening / closing door 308b is open. It is a point that is configured so that it is impossible to enter the ball. Specifically, since the length of the opening / closing ball entry device 308 in the horizontal direction is shortened, the second and fourth game balls are used regardless of the control mode of the opening / closing door 308b in each high-frequency support mode. Is unable to enter the second starting port 308a. According to such a configuration, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 308a can be reduced among the game balls entering the opening 302 of the second starting port unit 300.

FIG. 84 (C) schematically shows the second starting port unit 300C as Example 2. Further, FIG. 85 shows a specific configuration of the second starting port unit 300C. The difference from the second starting port unit 300 of the ninth embodiment shown in FIGS. 84 (A) and 78 is that the path R2 and the path R12 merge to form one path. According to such a configuration, the second start port unit can be miniaturized, so that the mountability on the game board 30 can be improved.

FIG. 84 (D) schematically shows the second starting port unit 300D as Example 3. The difference from the second starting port unit 300 of the ninth embodiment shown in FIG. 84 (A) is that the third alternating distribution mechanism 305A is provided on the downstream side of the second alternating distribution mechanism 305. is there. The third alternating distribution mechanism 305A alternately distributes the game ball flowing down the path R11 between the left path R111 and the right path R112.

The path R111 is configured so that the distributed game balls pass through the through gate 306, and the distributed game balls are second when the opening / closing door 308b of the opening / closing ball entry device 308 is in the open state. It is configured so that the ball can enter the starting port 308a. The path R112 is configured so that the distributed game ball cannot pass through the through gate 306, and the distributed game ball is in a state where the opening / closing door 308b of the opening / closing ball entry device 308 is open. In some cases, it is configured so that the ball can enter the second starting port 308a.

According to such a configuration, only one of the eight game balls that have entered the opening 302 of the second starting port unit 300D passes through the through gate 306. In other words, after one game ball passes through the through gate 306, the following seven game balls do not pass through the through gate 306, and the ninth game ball passes through the through gate 306 again. Therefore, by setting the opening time of the opening / closing door 308b to a different length for each high-frequency support mode, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 308a can be arbitrarily set from 1 to 8. Can be set to a value. For example, when the number of game balls (number of prize balls) to be paid out as prize balls when one game ball enters the second starting port 308a is set to 2, the following eight types are used. A high frequency support mode can be realized.

・ First high frequency support mode:
Opening time of opening / closing door 308b: 0.5 seconds Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 1 piece / 8 pieces Number of game balls paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 1 piece x 2 = 2 Game ball increase / decrease: 8 game balls are fired 4.8 seconds the game ball is reduced by 6 Ball output rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 2 / 8 pieces = 0.25

・ Second high frequency support mode:
Opening time of opening / closing door 308b: 1.1 seconds Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 2/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 2 x 2 = 4 Game ball increase / decrease: 8 game balls are fired 4. Game balls decrease by 4 in 4.8 seconds Outgoing rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 4 / 8 pieces = 0.50

・ Third high frequency support mode:
Opening time of opening / closing door 308b: 1.7 seconds Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 3/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 3 x 2 = 6 Game balls increase / decrease: 8 game balls are launched The number of game balls decreases by 2 in 4.8 seconds Outgoing rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 6 / 8 pieces = 0.75

・ Fourth high frequency support mode:
Opening time of opening / closing door 308b: 2.3 seconds Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 4/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 4 x 2 = 8 Game ball increase / decrease: No increase / decrease Ball output rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 8/8 = 1.00

・ Fifth high frequency support mode:
Opening time of opening / closing door 308b: 2.9 seconds Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 5/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 5 x 2 = 10 Game ball increase / decrease: 8 game balls are launched Increase by 2 game balls in 4.8 seconds Outgoing rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 10 / 8 pieces = 1.25

・ 6th high frequency support mode:
Opening time of opening / closing door 308b: 3.5 seconds Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 6/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 6 x 2 = 12 Game balls increase / decrease: 8 game balls are launched Increase by 4 game balls in 4.8 seconds Outgoing rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 12 / 8 pieces = 1.50

・ 7th high frequency support mode:
Opening time of opening / closing door 308b: 4.1 seconds Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 7/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 7 x 2 = 14 Game balls increase / decrease: 8 game balls are launched Increase 6 game balls in 4.8 seconds Outgoing rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 14 / 8 pieces = 1.75

・ Eighth high frequency support mode:
Opening time of opening / closing door 308b: 4.7 seconds Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 8/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 8 x 2 = 16 Game balls increase / decrease: 8 game balls are launched Increase 8 game balls in 4.8 seconds Outgoing rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 16 / 8 pieces = 2.00

In this way, if the configuration of the second starting port unit 300D is adopted, the type of the high frequency support mode can be set in multiple stages. Further, if the alternating distribution mechanism is further configured in multiple stages, the number of game balls that do not pass through the through gate 306 can be further increased, and the type of the high frequency support mode can be set in more stages. It will be possible. Further, the number of game balls (number of prize balls) paid out as prize balls when one game ball enters the second starting port 308a can be set to a value other than one or two. For example, when the number of prize balls is set to 3 in the above 8 types of high-frequency support modes, each high-frequency support mode is as follows.

・ First high frequency support mode:
Opening time of opening / closing door 308b: 0.5 seconds Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 1 piece / 8 pieces Number of game balls paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 1 piece x 3 = 3 Game ball increase / decrease: 8 game balls are fired 4.8 seconds the game ball is reduced by 5 Ball output rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 3 / 8 pieces = 0.375

・ Second high frequency support mode:
Opening time of opening / closing door 308b: 1.1 seconds Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 2/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 2 x 3 = 6 Game balls increase / decrease: 8 game balls are fired 4.8 seconds the game balls decrease by 2 Ball output rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 6 / 8 pieces = 0.75

・ Third high frequency support mode:
Opening time of opening / closing door 308b: 1.7 seconds Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 3/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 3 x 3 = 9 Game balls increase / decrease: 8 game balls are launched Increase by 1 game ball in 4.8 seconds Outgoing rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 9 / 8 pieces = 1.125

・ Fourth high frequency support mode:
Opening time of opening / closing door 308b: 2.3 seconds Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 4/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 4 x 3 = 12 Game balls increase / decrease: 8 game balls are fired 4. Game balls increase by 4 in 4.8 seconds Outgoing rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 12 / 8 pieces = 1.50

・ Fifth high frequency support mode:
Opening time of opening / closing door 308b: 2.9 seconds Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 5/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 5 x 3 = 15 Game ball increase / decrease: 8 game balls are launched Increase by 7 game balls in 4.8 seconds Outgoing rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 15 / 8 pieces = 1.875

・ 6th high frequency support mode:
Opening time of opening / closing door 308b: 3.5 seconds Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 6/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 6 x 3 = 18 Game ball increase / decrease: 8 game balls are fired 4.8 Second game ball increases by 10 Ball output rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 18 / 8 pieces = 2.25

・ 7th high frequency support mode:
Opening time of opening / closing door 308b: 4.1 seconds Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 7/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 7 x 3 = 21 Game ball increase / decrease: 8 game balls are launched Increase 13 game balls in 4.8 seconds Outgoing rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 21 / 8 pieces = 2.625

・ Eighth high frequency support mode:
Opening time of opening / closing door 308b: 4.7 seconds Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 8/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 8 x 3 = 24 Game ball increase / decrease: 8 game balls are launched Increase 16 game balls in 4.8 seconds Outgoing rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 24 / 8 pieces = 3.00

FIG. 84 (E) schematically shows the second starting port unit 300E as Example 4. The difference from the second starting port unit 300D of Example 3 shown in FIG. 84 (D) is that the game ball distributed to the path R2 enters the second starting port 308a even when the opening / closing door 308b is open. It is a point that is configured so that it is impossible to make a sphere. Specifically, since the length of the opening / closing ball entry device 308 in the horizontal direction is shortened, the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth units are used regardless of the control mode of the opening / closing door 308b in each high-frequency support mode. It is impossible for the game ball to enter the second starting port 308a. According to such a configuration, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 308a can be reduced among the game balls entering the opening 302 of the second starting port unit 300E.

FIG. 84 (F) schematically shows the second starting port unit 300F as Example 5. The difference from the second starting port unit 300D of Example 3 shown in FIG. 84 (D) is that the path R2, the path R12, and the path R112 are merged into one path. According to such a configuration, the second start port unit can be miniaturized, so that the mountability on the game board 30 can be improved.

J. Tenth embodiment:
Next, the tenth embodiment will be described. The present embodiment includes the same second starting port unit 200 (FIG. 70) as the eighth embodiment. The difference from the eighth embodiment is that the mode for controlling the opening / closing door 208b is different. Hereinafter, a mode of control of the opening / closing door 208b will be mainly described. The description of the same configuration and processing as in the eighth embodiment will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, one type of high-frequency support mode is set, and there are two types of winning when the electric accessory opening lottery is won during the high-frequency support mode (type 1 electric service opening and first type). Type 2 electric service open) is set. In addition, one type of winning (type 3 electric service opening) is set when the electric accessory opening lottery is won during the low frequency support mode. The details of the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38 and the control mode of the opening / closing door 208b for each winning type of the electric accessory opening lottery are as follows.

・ Electric accessory open lottery in high frequency support mode Fluctuation time of normal figure unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 100%
As a result of winning, the ratio of being assigned to the first-class electric service opening: 50%
As a result of winning, the ratio of being assigned to the second type electric service opening: 50%
・ If you win the opening of the first-class electric service: Waiting time for opening the opening / closing door 208b: 0.05 seconds Number of times the opening / closing door 208b is opened: 1 time Opening time of the opening / closing door 208b: 0.8 seconds ・ Opening of the second-class electric service Waiting time for opening / closing door 208b: 0.25 seconds Number of opening / closing doors 208b: 1 time Opening / closing door 208b: 0.8 seconds

・ Electric accessory open lottery in low frequency support mode Fluctuation time of normal figure unit 38: 29.5 seconds Winning probability: 10%
As a result of winning, the ratio of being assigned to the third type electric service opening: 100%
・ When the third type electric service opening is won: Opening / closing door 208b opening standby time: 0.25 seconds Opening / closing door 208b opening times: 1 time Opening / closing door 208b opening time: 0.2 seconds

In the above-described control mode of the opening / closing door 208b, the difference between the case where the first type electric service opening is won and the case where the second type electric service opening is won during the high frequency support mode is a variation display of the normal drawing unit 38. Is the length of the opening standby time, which is the time from when the door is stopped until the opening / closing door 208b starts the transition to the open state. As will be described later, the game balls are spaced by the game ball launching mechanism 81 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a is different in the situation where the balls are continuously fired. The time of 0.8 seconds set as the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is longer than 0.6 seconds, which is the firing interval between the first game ball and the second game ball, and the first game. The time is shorter than 1.2 seconds, which is the firing interval between the ball and the third game ball.

FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing the behavior of the second starting port unit 200 when the first type electric service opening is won. FIG. 87 is a timing chart showing the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing ball entry device 208, and also shows the control mode of the opening / closing door 208b when the first-class electric service opening is won. In the example shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the game ball has a constant firing intensity capable of reaching the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launching mechanism 81. It is fired continuously at 0.6 second intervals. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

As shown in the state A1 of FIG. 86, when the game ball GB1 reaches the second starting port unit 200 and enters the inside of the second starting port unit 200 through the opening 202, it reaches the alternating distribution mechanism 204. In the example shown in the state A1, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the right, so that the game ball that has reached the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held by the left side holding portion 204e. Then, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about 90 degrees around the rotation axis 204d by the weight of the game ball GB1 held by the left side holding portion 204e, and is in the state of FIG. 86. It becomes A2.

As shown in the state A2 of FIG. 86, when the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the left side, the game ball GB1 held by the left side holding portion 204e falls from the left side holding portion 204e and the path R1 on the left side. It is distributed to. After that, the game ball GB1 distributed to the path R1 passes through the through gate 206. When the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, the main control device 60 executes an electric accessory opening lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38 in the high frequency support mode is set to 0.05 seconds, and the probability of winning the electric accessory open lottery in the high frequency support mode is set. Is set to 100%. Then, when the first type electric service opening is won in the electric accessory opening lottery, the opening / closing waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b is 0.05 seconds, the opening / closing door 208b is opened once, and the opening time is 0. It is set to 8 seconds. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, when it is determined that the opening standby time has elapsed (FIG. 91: S5123 described later), the main control device 60 starts the transition to the open state of the opening / closing door 208b. The process of causing the operation is not performed in the electric service opening / closing process in the next patrol, which is executed in a cycle of 0.004 seconds, but in the electric service opening / closing process (FIG. 91: S5124, FIG. 92 described later) in the same patrol. Therefore, the time required for control from the elapse of the opening standby time until the opening / closing door 208b of the opening / closing ball entry device 208 starts the transition to the open state is significantly shorter than 0.004 seconds. There is.

Therefore, the opening / closing door 208b of the opening / closing ball entry device 208 transitions to the open state about 0.1 seconds after the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds (FIG. FIG. 87). As described above, in the present embodiment, the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 until the game ball reaches the opening / closing device 208 is about 0.2 seconds, so that the through gate 206 is used. The opening / closing door 208b is in the open state at the timing when the passing game ball GB1 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208, and the game ball GB1 enters the second starting port 208a. After that, the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the path R1 enters the opening 202, and the state A3 in FIG. 86 is obtained.

As shown in the state A3 of FIG. 86, when the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the path R1 enters the opening 202, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is in a state of being tilted to the left. Therefore, the game ball GB2 that has reached the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held by the right side holding portion 204f. Then, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is rotated about 90 degrees clockwise (clockwise) about the rotation axis 204d by the weight of the game ball GB2 held by the right holding portion 204f, and the state A4 in FIG. It becomes.

As shown in the state A4 of FIG. 86, when the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the right, the game ball GB2 held by the right holding portion 204f falls from the right holding portion 204f and the path R2 on the right side. It is distributed to. After that, the game ball GB2 distributed to the path R2 reaches the opening / closing device 208. Here, in the present embodiment, since the interval between the game balls launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 is 0.6 seconds, the game ball GB2 opens and closes after the game ball GB1 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208. The interval until reaching the ball entry device 208 is also about 0.6 seconds. Further, in the present embodiment, since the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is set to 0.8 seconds, the opening / closing door 208b is maintained in the open state even at the timing when the game ball GB2 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208. .. As a result, the game ball GB2 enters the second starting port 208a provided inside the opening / closing entry device 208. After the game ball GB2 enters the second starting port 208a, the opening / closing door 208b is closed and the state A1 is reached again. Since the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is set to 0.8 seconds, the opening / closing door 208b is before the game ball GB3 next to the game ball GB2 passes through the through gate 206, as shown in FIG. 87. In addition, it will be closed.

That is, in the present embodiment, the game ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity capable of reaching the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball launching mechanism 81. , When the first-class electric role opening is won in the electric accessory opening lottery in the high frequency support mode, at the timing when the game ball GB1 that triggered the electric accessory opening lottery reaches the opening / closing device 208. The opening / closing door 208b is in the open state, and the opening / closing door 208b is maintained in the open state even at the timing when the game ball GB2 distributed to the path R2 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208. As a result, of the two game balls GB1 and GB2, both game balls enter the second starting port 208a.

FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing the behavior of the second starting port unit 200 when the second type electric service opening is won. FIG. 89 is a timing chart showing the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing ball entry device 208, and also shows the control mode of the opening / closing door 208b when the type 2 electric service opening is won. The example shown in FIGS. 88 and 89 differs from the example shown in FIGS. 86 and 87 in that the opening / closing standby time of the opening / closing door 208b is set to 0.25 seconds and passes through the through gate 206. The point is that the game ball GB1 does not enter the second starting port 208a. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

As shown in the state A1 of FIG. 88, when the game ball GB1 reaches the second starting port unit 200 and enters the inside of the second starting port unit 200 through the opening 202, it reaches the alternating distribution mechanism 204. In the example shown in the state A1, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the right, so that the game ball that has reached the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held by the left side holding portion 204e. Then, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 rotates about 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the rotation axis 204d due to the weight of the game ball GB1 held by the left side holding portion 204e, and enters the state A2. ..

As shown in the state A2 of FIG. 88, when the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the left side, the game ball GB1 held by the left side holding portion 204e falls from the left side holding portion 204e, and the path R1 on the left side is dropped. It is distributed to. After that, the game ball GB1 distributed to the path R1 passes through the through gate 206. When the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, the main control device 60 executes an electric accessory opening lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38 in the high frequency support mode is set to 0.05 seconds, and the probability of winning the electric accessory open lottery in the high frequency support mode is set. Is set to 100%. When the type 1 electric service opening is won in the electric accessory opening lottery, the opening / closing door 208b has an opening waiting time of 0.25 seconds, the opening / closing door 208b has been opened once, and the opening time is 0. It is set to 8 seconds. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the time required for control from the elapse of the opening standby time until the opening / closing door 208b of the opening / closing ball entry device 208 starts the transition to the open state is 0.004. The time is significantly shorter than the second.

Therefore, the opening / closing door 208b of the opening / closing ball entry device 208 transitions to the open state about 0.3 seconds after the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds (FIG. FIG. 89). As described above, in the present embodiment, the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 until the game ball reaches the opening / closing device 208 is about 0.2 seconds, so that the through gate 206 is used. The opening / closing door 208b is maintained in the closed state at the timing when the passing game ball GB1 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208, and the game ball GB1 does not enter the second starting port 208a and the opening / closing ball entry device. Pass through 208. After that, the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the path R1 enters the opening 202, and the state A3 in FIG. 88 is obtained.

As shown in the state A3 of FIG. 88, when the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the path R1 enters the opening 202, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is in a state of being tilted to the left. Therefore, the game ball GB2 that has reached the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held by the right side holding portion 204f. Then, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is rotated about 90 degrees clockwise (clockwise) about the rotation axis 204d by the weight of the game ball GB2 held by the right side holding portion 204f, and is in the state A4.

As shown in the state A4 of FIG. 88, when the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the right, the game ball GB2 held by the right holding portion 204f falls from the right holding portion 204f and the path R2 on the right side. It is distributed to. After that, the game ball GB2 distributed to the path R2 reaches the opening / closing device 208. Here, in the present embodiment, since the interval between the game balls launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 is 0.6 seconds, the game ball GB2 opens and closes after the game ball GB1 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208. The interval until reaching the ball entry device 208 is also about 0.6 seconds. Further, in the present embodiment, since the opening / closing standby time of the opening / closing door 208b is set to 0.25 seconds, the opening / closing door 208b is in the open state at the timing when the game ball GB2 reaches the opening / closing entry device 208. .. As a result, the game ball GB2 enters the second starting port 208a provided inside the opening / closing entry device 208. After the game ball GB2 enters the second starting port 208a, the opening / closing door 208b is closed and the state A1 is reached again. Since the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is set to 0.8 seconds, the opening / closing door 208b is before the game ball GB3 next to the game ball GB2 passes through the through gate 206, as shown in FIG. 89. In addition, it will be closed.

That is, in the present embodiment, the game ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity capable of reaching the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball launching mechanism 81. , When the second type electric role opening is won in the electric accessory opening lottery in the high frequency support mode, at the timing when the game ball GB1 that triggered the electric accessory opening lottery reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208. The opening / closing door 208b is maintained in the closed state, and the opening / closing door 208b is in the open state at the timing when the game ball GB2 distributed to the path R2 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208. As a result, one of the two game balls GB1 and GB2, the game ball GB2, enters the second starting port 208a.

From the above, according to the present embodiment, by changing the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b, the second game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206 for 1.2 seconds (FIGS. 87 and 89). 2 The number of game balls entering the starting port 208a can be changed.

When the third type electric service opening is won in the electric accessory opening lottery in the low frequency support mode, the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38 is 29.5 seconds, and the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b is 0. Since it is set to 25 seconds, the opening / closing door 208b will transition to the open state after the game ball GB1 and the game ball GB2 have passed through the opening / closing ball entry device 208. That is, when the third type electric combination opening is won in the electric accessory opening lottery in the low frequency support mode, both the game ball GB1 and the game ball GB2 do not enter the second starting port 208a.

Next, an example of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, processing different from that of the eighth embodiment will be described, and the description of the same processing will be omitted.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. The main difference from the process (FIG. 75) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment is that the high frequency support mode is set to the high frequency support flag because there is only one type of high frequency support mode in this embodiment. The point is that the type is not set. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

The main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores the high frequency support flag in step S5004. As a result, after ending the open / close execution mode corresponding to the probability change jackpot, the support mode shifts to the gaming state which is the high frequency support mode. Further, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores the high frequency support flag in step S5007. As a result, after ending the open / close execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, the support mode shifts to the gaming state, which is the high frequency support mode. Since the processing in each of the other steps is the same as the processing executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment (FIG. 75), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an electric service support process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. The main difference from the process (FIG. 76) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment is that the opening standby time corresponding to the type of electric service opening won in the electric accessory opening lottery is set. It is a point to set. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

In step S5101, it is determined whether or not the support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag is stored in the supported flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. If it is determined in step S5101, that the supporting flag is not stored (S5101: NO), the process proceeds to step S5102.

In step S5102, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag is stored in the support winning flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when the electric winning combination is won in the electric accessory opening lottery, and is deleted when the supporting flag is stored. If it is determined in step S5102 that the support winning flag is not stored (S5102: NO), the process proceeds to step S5103.

In step S5103, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal diagram unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

If it is determined in step S5103 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S5103: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S5103: YES), the process proceeds to step S5104.

In step S5104, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display of the symbol in the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step S5104 that it is the end timing of the variable display (S5104: YES), the process proceeds to step S5105, the off display is set, and then the main electric service support process is terminated. By setting the off display, the variable display of the symbol in the normal drawing unit 38 is terminated in the state where the off display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5104 that it is not the end timing of the variation display (S5104: NO), the process proceeds to step S5106.

In step S5106, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0". If it is determined in step S5106 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is "0" (S5106: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5106 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than "0" (S5106: YES), the process proceeds to step S5107.

In step S5107, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step S5108 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If the opening / closing execution mode is not in step S5107 (S5107: NO) and the high-frequency support mode is in step S5108 (S5108: YES), the process proceeds to step S5109 to perform an electric accessory opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric service holding area 64c is shifted to the lottery execution area, and the value of the lottery execution area is collated with the electric accessory opening lottery table for the high frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery in the high frequency support mode is set to 100%, the ratio of being distributed to the first type electric service opening is 50%, and the second type electric service opening The distribution ratio is set to 50%. Specifically, since the possible value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 0 to 249, when the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the lottery execution area is 0 to 124, the first value is obtained. If the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 125 to 249, the type 1 electric service opening is won, and the type 2 electric service opening is won. Then, after executing the electric accessory opening lottery, "25" (that is, 0.05 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Then, the process proceeds to step S5110.

In step S5110, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step S5109 is that the electric accessory opening is won (support winning). If it is determined in step S5110 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is the support winning (S5110: YES), the process proceeds to step S5111, and the support winning flag is stored and provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Set "1" in the second round counter area RC2. In addition, in this embodiment, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery in the high frequency support mode, when the first type electric service opening is won, the type 1 support winning flag is stored, and the type 2 electric service opening is performed. If a winner is won, the type 2 support winning flag is stored. Then, the process proceeds to step S5112. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5110 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not the support winning (S5110: NO), the process proceeds to step S5112 without executing the process of step S5111.

In step S5112, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S5112 that the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode (S5112: YES), the process proceeds to step S5113. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5112 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S5112: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is.

In step S5113, it is determined whether or not the game count counter area is “0”. The game count counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S5113 that the game count counter area is not "0" (S5113: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5113 that the game count counter area is "0", the process proceeds to step S5114 and the high frequency support flag is cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step S5115.

In step S5115, a low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. To do. After that, the processing for electric service support is terminated.

If it is determined in step S5107 that the open / close execution mode is set (S5107: YES), or if it is determined in step S5118 that the mode is not in the high frequency support mode (S5108: NO), the process proceeds to step S5116 and the electric accessory opening lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric service holding area 64c is shifted, and the value of the lottery execution area is collated with the electric accessory opening lottery table for the low frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery in the high frequency support mode is set to 10%, and the ratio assigned to the third type electric accessory opening is set to 100%. Specifically, since the possible value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 0 to 249, when the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the lottery execution area is 0 to 24, the first value is obtained. Winning the opening of the 3rd class electric service. Further, after executing the electric accessory opening lottery, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Then, the process proceeds to step S5117.

In step S5117, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step S5116 is winning the electric service opening (support winning). If it is determined in step S5117 that the support is not won (S5117: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5117 that the support is won (S5117: YES), the process proceeds to step S5118, the support winning flag is stored, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. Ends the main electric service support process.

If it is determined in step S5102 that the support winning flag is stored (S5102: YES), the process proceeds to step S5119 to determine whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step S5119 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S5119: NO), the symbol in the normal drawing unit 38 is being displayed in a variable manner, so that the main electric service support process is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5119 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S5119: YES), the process proceeds to step S5120.

In step S5120, a winning display corresponding to the type of winning electric service opening is set. As a result, the variable display of the symbol in the normal symbol unit 38 ends, and the symbol corresponding to the type of the hit display is stopped and displayed. Then, the process proceeds to step S5121.

In step S5121, the opening standby time corresponding to the type of winning electric service opening is set. Specifically, when the type 1 electric service is won, "25" (that is, 0.05 sec) is set in the open standby time timer counter area Tw, and the type 2 electric service is opened or the type 3 electric service is opened. If the opening is won, "125" (that is, 0.25 sec) is set in the opening standby time timer counter area Tw. The open standby time timer counter area Tw is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. After that, the process proceeds to step S5122, the supporting flag is stored, and the support winning flag is cleared. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

If it is determined in step S5101, that the supporting flag is stored (S5101: YES), the process proceeds to step S5123, and it is determined whether or not the release waiting time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the open standby time timer counter area Tw is "0". If it is determined in step S5123 that the value of the open standby time timer counter area Tw is "0" (S5123: YES), the process proceeds to step S5124 to control the opening / closing of the opening / closing door 208b as an electric accessory. Executes the electric service opening / closing process. The details of the electric service opening / closing process will be described later. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5123 that the value of the open standby time timer counter area Tw is not "0" (S5123: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated without executing the electric service opening / closing process. To do.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an electric service opening / closing process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. The main difference from the process (FIG. 77) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment is that when the electric service opening is won during the high frequency support mode, the winning electric service is won. Regardless of the type of opening, the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is set to 0.8 seconds, and if the electric service opening is won during the low frequency support mode, the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is 0.2 seconds. It is a point to set to. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

In step S5201, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing door 208b as an electric accessory is being opened. Whether or not the opening / closing door 208b is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in the driving state. If it is determined that the opening / closing door 208b is open (S5201: YES), the process proceeds to step S5202.

In step S5202, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the opening / closing door 208b. If it is determined in step S5202 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S5202: NO), the main electric service opening / closing process is terminated as it is. That is, if the opening duration of the opening / closing door 208b has not ended, the main electric service opening / closing process ends.

If it is determined in step S5202 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S5202: YES), the process proceeds to step S5203, and a closing process for controlling the opening / closing door 208b to the closed state is performed. 2 Set “25” (that is, 0.05 sec) in the timer counter area T2. The value of the second timer counter area T2 set in step S5203 is set when the opening / closing door 208b as the electric accessory is opened a plurality of times in one winning of the electric accessory opening lottery. It means the time length (interval) from the closing to the next opening, and is the final transition from the open state to the closed state of the opening / closing door 208b triggered by one winning of the electric accessory opening lottery. In this case, it means the length of time to wait from the closing of the opening / closing door 208b to the execution of the next electric accessory opening lottery. After executing step S5203, the process proceeds to step S5204.

In step S5204, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S5205 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step S5205 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S5205: NO), the main electric service opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5205 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S5205: YES), the process proceeds to step S5206 and the supporting flag is cleared. After that, the main electric service opening / closing process is completed.

If it is determined in step S5201 that the opening / closing door 208b is not open (S5201: NO), the process proceeds to step S5207, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the opening / closing door 208b. If it is determined in step S5207 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S5207: NO), the main electric service opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5207 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S5207: YES), the process proceeds to step S5208, and an opening process for controlling the opening / closing door 208b to the open state is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S5209.

In step S5209, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, and if it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is not in progress (S5209: NO), the process proceeds to step S5210 and whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. To judge.

If it is determined in step S5210 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (S5210: YES), the process proceeds to step S5211 and "400" (that is, 0.8 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electric service opening / closing process is completed. On the other hand, in step S5210, when it is determined that the high frequency support mode is not in progress (S5210: NO), and in step S5209, when it is determined that the open / close execution mode is in progress (S5209: YES), step S5212 is performed. Proceed and set "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electric service opening / closing process is completed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206 by achieving the same effect as that of the eighth embodiment described above and changing the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b. The number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a in 1.2 seconds (FIGS. 87 and 89) after that can be changed. Therefore, inflection can be added to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, according to the present embodiment, even when the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is set to the same length (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment), if the length of the opening standby time is changed. Since the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a can be changed, the degree of freedom in designing the game machine can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, even when the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38 is set to the same length (0.05 seconds in the present embodiment) in the high frequency support mode, the opening / closing door 208b By setting the opening standby time of the game ball to a plurality of different lengths (0.05 seconds and 0.25 seconds in this embodiment), the opening / closing door 208b is opened from the closed state after the game ball passes through the through gate 206. The time until the transition to the state is started (the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38 + the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b) can be set to a plurality of types of lengths. That is, according to the present embodiment, the time from when the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the normal drawing unit 38 until the opening / closing door 208b starts the transition from the closed state to the open state (opening of the opening / closing door 208b). By changing the standby time), the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 until the opening / closing door 208b starts the transition from the closed state to the open state (variable time of the normal drawing unit 38 + opening / closing door 208b). (Opening standby time) can be changed, and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a can be changed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the main control device 60 opens and closes the variable time of the normal drawing unit 38 after the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206. The time is set to be shorter than the time required to reach the ball device 208. Therefore, the normal drawing unit 38 obtains the result of the electric accessory opening lottery before the timing when the game ball GB1 which has passed through the through gate 206 and triggered the electric accessory opening lottery reaches the opening / closing ball opening / closing device 208. It becomes possible to display. As a result, the main control device 60 passes through the through gate 206 after the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the normal drawing unit 38, and is the game ball GB1 that triggered the electric accessory opening lottery. It is possible to execute the control (control when the first type electric service opening is won) to start the transition from the closed state to the open state of the opening / closing door 208b before the timing when the opening / closing ball entry device 208 is reached. Become. Therefore, the game ball GB1 that triggered the transition of the opening / closing door 208b to the open state (the game ball GB1 that passed through the through gate 206 and triggered the electric accessory opening lottery) is entered into the second starting port 208a. It becomes possible to execute control.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the first type electric service opening is won (FIGS. 86 and 87), the main control device 60 sets the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b to 0.05 seconds. The opening / closing door 208b is in the open state at the timing when the game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 206 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208, and the game ball GB1 enters the second starting port 208a. On the other hand, in the case of winning the second type electric service opening (FIGS. 88 and 89), the main control device 60 sets the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b to 0.25 seconds, and thus passes through the through gate 206. The opening / closing door 208b has not yet transitioned to the open state at the timing when the game ball GB1 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208, and the game ball GB1 does not enter the second starting port 208a. That is, according to the present embodiment, since the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a can be changed by changing the opening standby time, inflection can be added to the game, and the game can be played. It is possible to improve the interest.

In the present embodiment, the opening / closing waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b is set based on the type of the electric accessory opening lottery won in the high frequency support mode. However, the opening / closing door is set based on other factors. The opening standby time of 208b may be set. For example, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of support modes can be executed, the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b may be set to a different length for each type of support mode. Further, the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b may be set to a different length for each type of the lottery mode (low probability mode and high probability mode) of the big hit lottery. Further, a random number counter for setting the opening waiting time may be provided, and the opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b may be set based on the acquired value of the random number counter. In addition, when the jackpot lottery is won, the opening / closing waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b is based on the type of winning the jackpot lottery in a predetermined number of game times after the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the winning is completed. May be configured to set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a is changed by changing the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b, but the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38 is changed. By doing so, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a may be changed. Further, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a may be changed by changing both the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38 and the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b. Further, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a is changed by changing the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b in addition to the opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b and the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38. May be.

Further, the configuration for changing the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a by changing the opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b is described in the second starting port units 300, 300B to the ninth embodiment described above. It may be applied to 300F (FIGS. 78, 84, 85).

K. Eleventh embodiment:
Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described. The present embodiment includes the same second starting port unit 200 (FIG. 70) as the tenth embodiment. The difference from the tenth embodiment is that the mode for controlling the opening / closing door 208b is different. Hereinafter, a mode of control of the opening / closing door 208b will be mainly described. The description of the same configuration and processing as in the tenth embodiment will be omitted.

In this embodiment, three types of high-frequency support modes are set, and one type of winning (type 1 electric service opening) is set when the electric accessory opening lottery is won during the high-frequency support mode. Has been done. In addition, one type of winning (type 2 electric service opening) is set when the electric accessory opening lottery is won during the low frequency support mode. The details of the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38 and the control mode of the opening / closing door 208b for each winning type of the electric accessory opening lottery are as follows.

・ Electric accessory open lottery in the 1st high frequency support mode Fluctuation time of normal figure unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 100%
As a result of winning, the ratio of being assigned to the first type electric service opening: 100%
・ If you win the first-class electric service opening Waiting time for opening / closing door 208b: 0.95 seconds Number of opening / closing doors 208b: 1 time Opening / closing door 208b: 0.8 seconds

・ Electric accessory open lottery in the 2nd high frequency support mode Fluctuation time of normal figure unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 100%
As a result of winning, the ratio of being assigned to the first type electric service opening: 100%
・ If you win the first-class electric service opening Waiting time for opening / closing door 208b: 0.25 seconds Number of opening / closing doors 208b: 1 time Opening / closing door 208b: 0.8 seconds

・ Electric accessory open lottery in the 3rd high frequency support mode Fluctuation time of normal figure unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 100%
As a result of winning, the ratio of being assigned to the first type electric service opening: 100%
・ If you win the first-class electric service opening Waiting time for opening / closing door 208b: 0.05 seconds Number of opening / closing doors 208b: 1 time Opening / closing door 208b: 0.8 seconds

・ Electric accessory open lottery in low frequency support mode Fluctuation time of normal figure unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 10%
As a result of winning, the ratio of being assigned to the second type electric service opening: 100%
・ If you win the second type electric service opening Waiting time for opening / closing door 208b: 0.35 seconds Number of opening / closing doors 208b: 1 time Opening / closing door 208b: 0.2 seconds

In the above-described control mode of the opening / closing door 208b, the difference between the three high-frequency support modes is the time from when the fluctuation display of the normal drawing unit 38 is stopped until the opening / closing door 208b starts the transition to the open state. It is the length of the opening standby time, and as will be described later, the game ball entering the second starting port 208a in a situation where the game ball is continuously launched at intervals of 0.6 seconds by the game ball launch mechanism 81. The number is different. The time of 0.8 seconds set as the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is longer than 0.6 seconds, which is the firing interval between the first game ball and the second game ball, and the first game. The time is shorter than 1.2 seconds, which is the firing interval between the ball and the third game ball.

FIG. 93 is a timing chart showing the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing ball entry device 208, and showing the control mode of the opening / closing door 208b in the first high-frequency support mode. In the example shown in FIG. 93, the game ball has a constant firing intensity of 0.6, which can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launching mechanism 81. It is fired continuously at second intervals. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls that have entered the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the path R1 or the path R2. The behavior when the game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. 71. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a are different.

As shown in FIG. 93, in the first high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the path R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variation display of the normal drawing unit 38 starts. .. When the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38 of 0.05 seconds and the opening standby time of 0.95 seconds have elapsed, the opening / closing door 208b transitions to the open state and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds.

The first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 pass through the closed opening / closing door 208b within 0.10 seconds until the opening / closing door 208b transitions to the open state. Then, the third game ball GB3 passes through the through gate 206, and at the timing when it reaches the opening / closing entry device 208, the opening / closing door 208b has transitioned to the open state, so that the ball enters the second starting port 208a. To do. At the timing when the game ball GB3 passes through the through gate 206, the opening / closing door 208b is in the open state, so that the fluctuation display of the normal drawing unit 38 is not started and is held.

Then, when 0.8 seconds have elapsed and the opening / closing door 208b transitions to the closed state, the pending fluctuation display of the normal drawing unit 38 starts. As can be understood from FIG. 93, 0.2 seconds after the start of the variation display of the normal drawing unit 38, the fourth game ball GB4 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208. This relationship is the same as the relationship in which the first game ball GB1 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208 0.2 seconds after the fluctuation display of the normal drawing unit 38 starts. Therefore, the relationship that only the game ball GB3 among the game balls GB1 to the game ball GB3 enters the second starting port 208a will continue even after the game ball GB4. The first high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment described above can be summarized as follows. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 208a, the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is set to two.

・ First high frequency support mode:
Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 1/3 3 Number of game balls paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 1 x 2 = 2 Game ball increase / decrease: 3 The number of game balls is reduced by 1 in 1.8 seconds. Ball output rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls to be fired = 2/3 pieces = 0.67

FIG. 94 is a timing chart showing the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing ball entry device 208, and showing the control mode of the opening / closing door 208b in the second high-frequency support mode. In the example shown in FIG. 94, the game ball has a constant firing intensity of 0.6, which can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launching mechanism 81. It is fired continuously at second intervals. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls that have entered the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the path R1 or the path R2. The behavior when the game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. 71. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a are different.

As shown in FIG. 94, in the second high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the path R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variation display of the normal drawing unit 38 starts. .. When the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38 of 0.05 seconds and the opening standby time of 0.25 seconds have elapsed, the opening / closing door 208b transitions to the open state and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds.

The first game ball GB1 passes through the closed opening / closing door 208b within 0.30 seconds until the opening / closing door 208b transitions to the open state. The second game ball GB2 enters the second starting port 208a because the opening / closing door 208b has transitioned to the open state at the timing when the opening / closing entry device 208 is reached. Since the behavior of the third and subsequent game balls is a repetition of the behavior of the first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2, the description thereof will be omitted. The second high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment described above can be summarized as follows.

・ Second high frequency support mode:
Number of game balls entered / number of game balls fired: 1 piece / 2 pieces Number of game balls paid out = number of game balls entered x number of prize balls: 1 piece x 2 pieces = 2 pieces Increase / decrease in game balls: increase / decrease None Ball output rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 2/2 = 1.00

FIG. 95 is a timing chart showing the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing ball entry device 208, and showing the control mode of the opening / closing door 208b in the third high-frequency support mode. In the example shown in FIG. 95, the game ball has a constant firing intensity of 0.6, which can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launching mechanism 81. It is fired continuously at second intervals. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls that have entered the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the path R1 or the path R2. The behavior when the game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. 71. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a are different.

As shown in FIG. 95, in the third high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the path R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variation display of the normal drawing unit 38 starts. .. When the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38 of 0.05 seconds and the opening standby time of 0.05 seconds have elapsed, the opening / closing door 208b transitions to the open state and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds.

The first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 enter the second starting port 208a because the opening / closing door 208b has transitioned to the open state at the timing when the opening / closing entry device 208 is reached. Since the behavior of the third and subsequent game balls is a repetition of the behavior of the first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2, the description thereof will be omitted. The third high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment described above can be summarized as follows.

・ Third high frequency support mode:
Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 2/2 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 2 x 2 = 4 Game ball increase / decrease: 2 Two game balls increase in 1.2 seconds when one game ball is fired. Ball output rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 4 pieces / 2 pieces = 2.00

FIG. 96 is a timing chart showing the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing ball entry device 208, and showing the control mode of the opening / closing door 208b in the low frequency support mode. In the example shown in FIG. 96, the game ball has a constant firing intensity of 0.6, which can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launching mechanism 81. It is fired continuously at second intervals. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls that have entered the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the path R1 or the path R2. The behavior when the game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. 71. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a are different.

As shown in FIG. 96, in the low-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the path R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variation display of the normal drawing unit 38 starts. After 0.05 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38, and 0.35 seconds, which is the opening standby time, elapse, the opening / closing door 208b transitions to the open state with a probability of 10%, and the open state is changed to 0.2. Hold for seconds. In the following, a case where the second-class electric service opening is won with a probability of 10% will be described.

The first game ball GB1 passes through the closed opening / closing door 208b within 0.40 seconds until the opening / closing door 208b transitions to the open state. In the second game ball GB2, since the opening / closing door 208b has already transitioned to the closed state when the opening / closing door 208b is reached, the opening / closing door in the closed state does not enter the second starting port 208a. Pass through 208b. Since the behavior of the third and subsequent game balls is a repetition of the behavior of the first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2, the description thereof will be omitted. The low-frequency support modes of the present embodiment described above can be summarized as follows.

・ Low frequency support mode:
Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 0/2 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 0 x 2 = 0 Game ball increase / decrease: 2 The number of game balls is reduced by 2 in 1.2 seconds when one game ball is fired. Ball output rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 0 pieces / 2 pieces = 0

FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment. For reference, FIG. 97 also describes the types of high-frequency support modes executed after the end of the open / close execution mode and their contents. As described above, in the present embodiment, the types of the high-frequency support mode executed after the end of the open / close execution mode are the first high-frequency support mode, the second high-frequency support mode, and the third high-frequency support mode. Is set.

As shown in FIG. 97 (a), if the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is won and the acquired jackpot type counter C2 has a value of 0 to 15, it is sorted. The result is 4R normal jackpot A, and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. When the acquired jackpot type counter C2 has a value of 16 to 19, the distribution result is 4R normal jackpot B, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot, and the opening / closing execution mode ends. 3 Shift to high frequency support mode. Further, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 20 to 29, the distribution result is the 8R probability variation jackpot, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot, and the second opening / closing execution mode is completed. Move to high frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 97 (b), if the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 208a is won and the acquired jackpot type counter C2 has a value of 0 to 5, the distribution is performed. The result is 4R normal jackpot A, and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. When the acquired jackpot type counter C2 has a value of 6 to 11, the distribution result is 4R normal jackpot B, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot, and the opening / closing execution mode ends. 3 Shift to high frequency support mode. Further, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 12 to 20, the distribution result is the 8R probability variation jackpot, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot, and the second opening / closing execution mode is completed. Move to high frequency support mode. Further, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 21 to 29, the distribution result is the 16R probability variation jackpot, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and the second opening / closing execution mode is completed. Move to high frequency support mode.

The high-frequency support mode, which shifts after the end of the open / close execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, ends when a predetermined number of game rounds (100 times in this embodiment) are executed without winning the jackpot lottery. , Move to low frequency support mode. In addition, the high-frequency support mode that shifts after the end of the open / close execution mode corresponding to the probability change jackpot continues without ending until the next jackpot lottery is won. In addition, the high-probability mode that shifts after the end of the open / close execution mode corresponding to the probabilistic jackpot continues without ending until the next jackpot lottery is won.

Further, the first total ball ejection rate T1 and the second total ball ejection rate T2 in the present embodiment are as follows.

T1 = M1 x PA1 + M2 x PA2 + M3 x PA3
= 0.67 x (16/30) +1.00 x (10/30) +2.00 x (4/30) = 0.96
T2 = M1 x PB1 + M2 x PB2 + M3 x PB3
= 0.67 x (6/30) +1.00 x (18/30) +2.00 x (6/30) = 0.83

As described above, in the present embodiment, both the value of the first total ball ejection rate T1 and the value of the second total ball ejection rate T2 are less than 1. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it means that the number of game balls held by the player does not increase but decreases in total.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by changing the opening standby time, the first high-frequency support mode in which the ball ejection rate is less than 1 and the second high-frequency support in which the ball ejection rate is 1. Since the mode and the third high-frequency support mode in which the ball output rate exceeds 1, it is possible to add intonation to the game and improve the interest of the game. Further, according to the present embodiment, even when the time for maintaining the open / close door 208b in the open state is set to the same length (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment), the length of the open standby time is set. If it is changed, the above-mentioned three high-frequency support modes can be executed, so that the degree of freedom in designing the game machine can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the first high-frequency support having a ball ejection rate of less than 1 is provided by the second start port unit 200 (FIG. 70), which has a simple configuration using only one alternating distribution mechanism 204. It is possible to execute the mode, the second high-frequency support mode in which the ball ejection rate is 1, and the third high-frequency support mode in which the ball ejection rate exceeds 1. That is, in order to execute the three high-frequency support modes as compared with the configuration in which the second start port unit 300 (FIG. 78) provided with the two alternating distribution mechanisms 304 and 305 executes the three high-frequency support modes. Since the mechanism can be realized in a space-saving manner, the game area can be effectively utilized, such as arranging other accessories in the vacant game area.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is 4R normal jackpot A, the high probability mode is not started, but the first high frequency support mode is started. When the first high-frequency support mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the entry section is promoted, so that the execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. However, since the ball output rate in the first high frequency support mode is less than 1, the number of game balls held by the player decreases. The first high-frequency support mode ends when the result of the jackpot lottery does not become a jackpot and the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches a specified number of times (100 times). Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting to be a big hit in the big hit lottery before the number of executions of the big hit lottery reaches the predetermined number of times and the first high frequency support mode ends. In addition, since the player wants to minimize the decrease in the number of game balls he has, he plays the game while expecting that he will be a big hit in the big hit lottery as soon as possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is the 8R probability variation jackpot, the high probability mode is started and the second high frequency support mode is started. When the high probability mode is started, the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot increases. Further, when the second high-frequency support mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the entry portion is promoted, so that the execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. Further, since the ball output rate in the second high frequency support mode is 1, the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. Then, the high probability mode continues until at least the result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot (various jackpots). In addition, the second high-frequency support mode continues until the result of the big hit lottery becomes a big hit (various big hits). Therefore, the player expects that the high probability mode and the second high frequency support mode will continue until the big hit in the big hit lottery, so that the result of the big hit lottery will be the 8R probability variable big hit and the high probability mode will continue. While playing a game. In addition, since the number of game balls on hand does not increase or decrease, the player can concentrate his / her feelings on the type of result when the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a 4R normal jackpot, the high probability mode is not started, but the third high frequency support mode is started. When the third high-frequency support mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the entry section is promoted, so that the execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. Further, since the ball ejection rate in the third high frequency support mode exceeds 1, the number of game balls held by the player increases. The third high-frequency support mode ends when the result of the jackpot lottery does not become a jackpot and the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches a specified number of times (100 times). Therefore, the player continues the third high-frequency support mode until just before the number of times the jackpot lottery is executed reaches the specified number of times to increase the number of game balls on hand, but before the third high-frequency support mode ends. By then, the game will be played with the expectation that the result of the big hit lottery will be a big hit. Then, even if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot by the time the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches the specified number of times (100 times), the player can use the third high frequency support mode in which the number of game balls increases. You can get the satisfaction of having continued for the longest period of time.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to create a new game property in which the three control modes are effectively used to give the player a variety of expectations, and thus the interest of the game can be improved. Can be planned. Further, according to the present embodiment, even if the same 4R normal jackpot is used, inflection can be added to the game by providing a difference in the high frequency support mode that shifts after the end of the open / close execution mode.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is reach, a longer fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 than when the result of the jackpot lottery is out of order. To. During the period in which the third high-frequency support mode is executed, the more times the result of the jackpot lottery becomes reach, that is, the more times a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37, the more times. The time required for the number of executions of the jackpot lottery (game times) to reach the specified number of 100 times becomes longer. As a result, since the period during which the third high-frequency support continues is extended, the period during which the number of game balls held by the player increases is also extended. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, during the period in which the third high-frequency support mode is executed, it is possible to create a new game property in which the number of game balls increases as the number of times the result of the jackpot lottery becomes reach occurs. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As another embodiment, as the number of jackpot lottery executed after the third high frequency support mode is started increases, a longer time may be set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37. According to this configuration, as the number of times the jackpot lottery is executed approaches 100 times, which is the specified number of times, the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 to be set becomes longer, so that the third high-frequency support mode in which the number of game balls increases continues. The period to do is longer. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frustration of the player, such as not winning the jackpot lottery even though the number of executions of the jackpot lottery is approaching 100 times.

Further, as another embodiment, the high frequency support mode in which the open standby time is set to a time longer than 0.95 seconds in the first high frequency support mode may be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to execute the high-frequency support mode in which the ball output rate is smaller than that of the first high-frequency support mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes are executed by setting the open standby time to a plurality of lengths, but as another embodiment, a plurality of variable times of the normal drawing unit 38 are set. It may be configured to execute a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes by setting the length to.

L. 12th Embodiment:
Next, the twelfth embodiment will be described. The present embodiment includes the same second starting port unit 200 (FIG. 70) as the eleventh embodiment. The difference from the eleventh embodiment is that the high-probability mode ends when a predetermined number of game times (100 times in this embodiment) are executed without winning the jackpot lottery (so-called special time). The point that it is a machine (ST machine)) and the contents of the distribution table are different. Hereinafter, the differences from the eleventh embodiment will be mainly described. The description of the same configuration and processing as in the eleventh embodiment will be omitted.

FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment. For reference, FIG. 98 also describes the types of high-frequency support modes executed after the end of the open / close execution mode and their contents.

As shown in FIG. 98 (a), if the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is won and the acquired jackpot type counter C2 has a value of 0 to 15, it is sorted. The result is 4R normal jackpot A, and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. When the acquired jackpot type counter C2 has a value of 16 to 19, the distribution result is 4R normal jackpot B, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot, and the opening / closing execution mode ends. 3 Shift to high frequency support mode. Further, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 20 to 29, the distribution result is the 8R probability variation jackpot, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot, and the second opening / closing execution mode is completed. Move to high frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 98 (b), if the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 208a is won and the acquired jackpot type counter C2 has a value of 0 to 17, the distribution is performed. The result is the 10R probability variation jackpot A, and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot, and shifts to the first high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. When the acquired jackpot type counter C2 has a value of 18 to 26, the distribution result is 10R probability variation jackpot B, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot, and the opening / closing execution mode ends. 2 Shift to high frequency support mode. When the acquired jackpot type counter C2 has a value of 27 to 29, the distribution result is 10R probability variation jackpot C, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot. 3 Shift to high frequency support mode.

The high-frequency support mode, which shifts after the end of the open / close execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, ends when a predetermined number of game rounds (100 times in this embodiment) are executed without winning the jackpot lottery. , Move to low frequency support mode. Further, in the present embodiment, even in the high-frequency support mode that shifts after the end of the open / close execution mode corresponding to the probabilistic jackpot, the game is played a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment) without winning the jackpot lottery. Exits when is executed and transitions to infrequent support mode. Further, the high-probability mode that shifts after the end of the open / close execution mode corresponding to the probability variation jackpot also ends when a predetermined number of game rounds (100 times in the present embodiment) are executed without winning the jackpot lottery.

Further, the first total ball ejection rate T1 and the second total ball ejection rate T2 in the present embodiment are as follows.

T1 = M1 x PA1 + M2 x PA2 + M3 x PA3
= 0.67 x (16/30) +1.00 x (10/30) +2.00 x (4/30) = 0.96
T2 = M1 x PB1 + M2 x PB2 + M3 x PB3
= 0.67 × (18/30) +1.00 × (9/30) +2.00 × (3/30) = 0.90

As described above, in the present embodiment, both the value of the first total ball ejection rate T1 and the value of the second total ball ejection rate T2 are less than 1. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it means that the number of game balls held by the player does not increase but decreases in total.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is the 10R probability variation jackpot A, the high probability mode is started and the first high frequency support mode is started. When the high probability mode is started, the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot increases. Further, when the first high frequency support mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 208a is promoted, so that the execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. However, since the ball output rate in the first high frequency support mode is less than 1, the number of game balls held by the player decreases. Then, the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode end when the result of the big hit lottery does not become a big hit and the number of executions of the big hit lottery reaches a predetermined number of times (100 times). Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting that the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot as soon as possible before the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches the predetermined number and the high probability mode ends. Furthermore, the player plays the game while expecting that he / she will be a big hit in the earlier big hit lottery from the expectation that he / she wants to minimize the decrease in the number of game balls he / she has.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is the 10R probability variation jackpot B, the high probability mode is started and the second high frequency support mode is started. When the high probability mode is started, the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot increases. Further, when the second high-frequency support mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 208a is promoted, so that the execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. Further, since the ball output rate in the second high frequency support mode is 1, the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. Then, the high probability mode and the second high frequency support mode end when the result of the big hit lottery does not become a big hit and the number of executions of the big hit lottery reaches a predetermined number of times (100 times). Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting that the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot as soon as possible before the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches the predetermined number and the high probability mode ends.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is 10R probability variation jackpot C, the high probability mode is started and the third high frequency support mode is started. When the high probability mode is started, the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot increases. Further, when the third high-frequency support mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 208a is promoted, so that the execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. Further, since the ball output rate in the third high frequency support mode exceeds 1, the number of game balls held by the player increases. Then, the high probability mode and the third high frequency support mode end when the result of the big hit lottery does not become a big hit and the number of executions of the big hit lottery reaches a predetermined number of times (100 times). Therefore, the player continues the third high frequency support mode until just before the number of times the jackpot lottery is executed reaches the specified number of times to increase the number of game balls on hand, while the number of times the big hit lottery is executed reaches the specified number of times and is high. By the time the probability mode and the third high-frequency support mode are completed, the game is played with the expectation that the result of the big hit lottery will be a big hit. Then, even if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot by the time the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches the specified number of times (100 times), the player can use the third high frequency support mode in which the number of game balls increases. You can get the satisfaction of having continued for the longest period of time.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to create a new game property that gives the player a variety of expectations during the period in which the high-probability mode limited to the specified number of times is executed. It is possible to improve the interest. Further, according to the present embodiment, even with the same 10R probability variation jackpot, inflection can be added to the game by providing a difference in the high frequency support mode that shifts after the end of the open / close execution mode.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is reach, a longer fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 than when the result of the jackpot lottery is out of order. To. During the period in which the third high-frequency support mode is executed, the more times the result of the jackpot lottery becomes reach, that is, the more times a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37, the more times. The time required for the number of executions of the jackpot lottery (game times) to reach the specified number of 100 times becomes longer. As a result, since the period during which the third high-frequency support continues is extended, the period during which the number of game balls held by the player increases is also extended. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, during the period in which the third high-frequency support mode is executed, it is possible to create a new game property in which the number of game balls increases as the number of times the result of the jackpot lottery becomes reach occurs. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As another embodiment, as the number of jackpot lottery executed after the third high frequency support mode is started increases, a longer time may be set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37. According to this configuration, as the number of times the jackpot lottery is executed approaches 100 times, which is the specified number of times, the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 to be set becomes longer, so that the third high-frequency support mode in which the number of game balls increases continues. The period to do is longer. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frustration of the player, such as not winning the jackpot lottery even though the number of executions of the jackpot lottery is approaching 100 times.

Further, as another embodiment, the high frequency support mode in which the open standby time is set to a time longer than 0.95 seconds in the first high frequency support mode may be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to execute the high-frequency support mode in which the ball output rate is smaller than that of the first high-frequency support mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes are executed by setting the open standby time to a plurality of lengths, but as another embodiment, a plurality of variable times of the normal drawing unit 38 are set. It may be configured to execute a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes by setting the length to.

M. 13th Embodiment:
Next, the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The present embodiment includes the same second starting port unit 200 (FIG. 70) as the twelfth embodiment. The difference from the twelfth embodiment is that the mode for controlling the opening / closing door 208b is different. Hereinafter, a mode of control of the opening / closing door 208b will be mainly described. The description of the same configuration and processing as in the twelfth embodiment will be omitted.

In this embodiment, one type of high-frequency support mode is set, and one type of winning (type 1 electric service opening) is set when the electric accessory opening lottery is won during the high-frequency support mode. Has been done. Then, three types of fluctuation times (0.95 seconds, 0.25 seconds, 0.05 seconds) of the normal drawing unit 38 set in the high frequency support mode are prepared. In addition, one type of winning (type 2 electric service opening) is set when the electric accessory opening lottery is won during the low frequency support mode. The details of the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38 and the control mode of the opening / closing door 208b for each winning type of the electric accessory opening lottery are as follows.

・ Electric accessory open lottery in high frequency support mode Fluctuation time of normal figure unit 38: 0.95 seconds, 0.25 seconds, 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 100%
As a result of winning, the ratio of being assigned to the first type electric service opening: 100%
・ If you win the first-class electric service opening Waiting time for opening / closing door 208b: 0.95 seconds Number of opening / closing doors 208b: 1 time Opening / closing door 208b: 0.8 seconds

・ Electric accessory open lottery in low frequency support mode Fluctuation time of normal figure unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 10%
As a result of winning, the ratio of being assigned to the second type electric service opening: 100%
・ If you win the second type electric service opening Waiting time for opening / closing door 208b: 0.35 seconds Number of opening / closing doors 208b: 1 time Opening / closing door 208b: 0.2 seconds

In the present embodiment, the game balls are continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds by the game ball launch mechanism 81 due to the difference in the length of the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 set in the high frequency support mode. In this situation, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a is different. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given. The time of 0.8 seconds set as the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is longer than 0.6 seconds, which is the firing interval between the first game ball and the second game ball, and the first game. The time is shorter than 1.2 seconds, which is the firing interval between the ball and the third game ball.

FIG. 99 shows the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing ball entry device 208, and the opening / closing door when the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38 is set to 0.95 seconds during the high frequency support mode. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of 208b. In the example shown in FIG. 99, the game ball has a constant firing intensity of 0.6, which can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launching mechanism 81. It is fired continuously at second intervals. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls that have entered the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the path R1 or the path R2. The behavior when the game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. 71. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a are different.

As shown in FIG. 99, in the high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the path R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variation display of the normal drawing unit 38 starts. When 0.95 seconds set as the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38 and 0.05 seconds, which is the opening standby time, elapse, the opening / closing door 208b transitions to the open state and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds. ..

The first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 pass through the closed opening / closing door 208b within 0.10 seconds until the opening / closing door 208b transitions to the open state. Then, the third game ball GB3 passes through the through gate 206, and at the timing when it reaches the opening / closing entry device 208, the opening / closing door 208b has transitioned to the open state, so that the ball enters the second starting port 208a. To do. At the timing when the game ball GB3 passes through the through gate 206, the opening / closing door 208b is in the open state, so that the fluctuation display of the normal drawing unit 38 is not started and is held.

Then, when 0.8 seconds have elapsed and the opening / closing door 208b transitions to the closed state, the pending fluctuation display of the normal drawing unit 38 starts. As can be understood from FIG. 99, the fourth game ball GB4 reaches the open / close ball entry device 208 0.2 seconds after the fluctuation display of the normal figure unit 38 starts. This relationship is the same as the relationship in which the first game ball GB1 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208 0.2 seconds after the fluctuation display of the normal drawing unit 38 starts. Therefore, when the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38 is continuously set to 0.95 seconds, only the game ball GB3 out of the game balls GB1 to the game ball GB3 enters the second starting port 208a. The relationship will continue even after the game ball GB4.

The mode when the fluctuation time of the normal diagram unit 38 is set to 0.95 seconds during the high frequency support mode described above can be summarized as follows. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 208a, the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is set to two.

-High frequency support mode (variation time of normal figure unit 38 = 0.95 seconds):
Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 1/3 3 Number of game balls paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 1 x 2 = 2 Game ball increase / decrease: 3 The number of game balls is reduced by 1 in 1.8 seconds. Ball output rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls to be fired = 2/3 pieces = 0.67

FIG. 100 shows the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing ball entry device 208, and the opening / closing door when the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38 is set to 0.25 seconds during the high frequency support mode. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of 208b. In the example shown in FIG. 100, the game ball has a constant firing intensity of 0.6, which can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launching mechanism 81. It is fired continuously at second intervals. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls that have entered the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the path R1 or the path R2. The behavior when the game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. 71. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a are different.

As shown in FIG. 100, in the high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the path R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variation display of the normal drawing unit 38 starts. When the 0.25 seconds set as the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38 and the opening standby time of 0.05 seconds have elapsed, the opening / closing door 208b transitions to the open state and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds. ..

The first game ball GB1 passes through the closed opening / closing door 208b within 0.30 seconds until the opening / closing door 208b transitions to the open state. The second game ball GB2 enters the second starting port 208a because the opening / closing door 208b has transitioned to the open state at the timing when the opening / closing entry device 208 is reached. Regarding the behavior of the third and subsequent game balls, when the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 is continuously set to 0.25 seconds, the first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 Since the behavior of is repeated, the description thereof will be omitted.

The mode when the fluctuation time of the normal diagram unit 38 is set to 0.25 seconds during the high frequency support mode described above can be summarized as follows.

-High frequency support mode (variation time of normal figure unit 38 = 0.25 seconds):
Number of game balls entered / number of game balls fired: 1 piece / 2 pieces Number of game balls paid out = number of game balls entered x number of prize balls: 1 piece x 2 pieces = 2 pieces Increase / decrease in game balls: increase / decrease None Ball output rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 2/2 = 1.00

FIG. 101 shows the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing ball entry device 208, and when the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38 is set to 0.05 seconds during the third high frequency support mode. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the opening / closing door 208b. In the example shown in FIG. 101, the game ball has a constant firing intensity of 0.6, which can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launching mechanism 81. It is fired continuously at second intervals. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls that have entered the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the path R1 or the path R2. The behavior when the game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. 71. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a are different.

As shown in FIG. 101, in the high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the path R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variation display of the normal drawing unit 38 starts. When the 0.05 seconds set as the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38 and the opening standby time of 0.05 seconds have elapsed, the opening / closing door 208b transitions to the open state and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds. ..

The first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 enter the second starting port 208a because the opening / closing door 208b has transitioned to the open state at the timing when the opening / closing entry device 208 is reached. Regarding the behavior of the third and subsequent game balls, when the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 is continuously set to 0.05 seconds, the first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 Since the behavior of is repeated, the description thereof will be omitted.

The mode when the fluctuation time of the normal diagram unit 38 is set to 0.05 seconds during the high frequency support mode described above can be summarized as follows.

-High frequency support mode (variation time of normal figure unit 38 = 0.05 seconds):
Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 2/2 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 2 x 2 = 4 Game ball increase / decrease: 2 Two game balls increase in 1.2 seconds when one game ball is fired. Ball output rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 4 pieces / 2 pieces = 2.00

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change the ball ejection rate in the high frequency support mode by changing the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 in the high frequency support mode. That is, by changing the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38 in the high frequency support mode, it is possible to increase, maintain, or decrease the number of game balls held by the player.

In the present embodiment, when a normal jackpot is won as a result of the jackpot lottery, the mode shifts to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. If the jackpot lottery after the transition to the high-frequency support mode is won, or if the jackpot lottery is executed 100 times without winning the jackpot lottery after the transition to the high-frequency support mode, the relevant High frequency support mode ends.

In the present embodiment, after winning a normal jackpot and shifting to the high-frequency support mode, the period until the high-frequency support mode ends is by referring to the variable time table for the high-frequency support mode. , The fluctuation time of the special drawing unit 37 and the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38 are set. However, even during the period when the fluctuation time table for the high frequency support mode is referred to, when setting the fluctuation time of the game times that will win the jackpot lottery, or setting the fluctuation time of the game times that will cause reach. In this case, the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 is set by referring to the fluctuation time table for jackpot and the fluctuation time table for reach generation.

FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation time table for the high frequency support mode. FIG. 102 (A) shows the variable time table set A for the high frequency support mode, and FIG. 102 (B) shows the variable time table set B for the high frequency support mode.

In the present embodiment, when the mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 and the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 are set by referring to the fluctuation time table set A for the high frequency support mode. Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is set as a result of the big hit lottery, and when the small hit is won during the high frequency support mode, the table to be referred to is the variable time table set A for the high frequency support mode and the variable time table set A. Switch between variable time table set B for high frequency support mode. The small hit is a lottery result in which the open / close execution mode is entered, but the support mode and the lottery mode are not changed.

As shown in FIG. 102 (A), the variable time table set A for the high frequency support mode is composed of a special figure unit table A and a normal figure unit table A.

In the special figure unit table A, the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode and the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 are stored correspondingly. In the present embodiment, 1.0 second is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 during the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 times. During the period when the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70 times, 1.6 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37. During the period when the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100 times, 2.2 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37.

In the table A for the normal figure unit, the number of game times after the transition to the high frequency support mode and the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 are stored correspondingly. In addition, in FIG. 102 (A), for reference, the increase / decrease of the game ball when the fluctuation time is set, and the game ball enters the second starting port 208a when the fluctuation time is set. The interval is shown.

In the present embodiment, 0.05 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38 during the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 times. Therefore, during this period, the game ball enters the second starting port 208a at a rate of once every 0.6 seconds, and the number of game balls held by the player increases. During the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70 times, 0.25 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38. Therefore, during this period, the game ball enters the second starting port 208a at a rate of once every 1.2 seconds, and the game ball on the player's hand does not increase or decrease. During the period when the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100 times, 0.95 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38. Therefore, during this period, the game ball enters the second starting port 208a at a rate of once every 1.8 seconds, and the number of game balls held by the player decreases.

As shown in FIG. 102 (B), the variable time table set B for the high frequency support mode is composed of a special figure unit table B and a normal figure unit table B.

In the special figure unit table B, the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode and the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 are stored correspondingly. In the present embodiment, 2.2 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 during the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 times. During the period when the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70 times, 1.6 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37. During the period when the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100 times, 1.0 second is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37.

In the table B for the normal figure unit, the number of game times after the transition to the high frequency support mode and the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 are stored correspondingly. In addition, in FIG. 102 (B), for reference, the increase / decrease of the game ball when the fluctuation time is set, and the game ball enters the second starting port 208a when the fluctuation time is set. The interval is shown.

In the present embodiment, 0.95 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38 during the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 times. Therefore, during this period, the game ball enters the second starting port 208a at a rate of once every 1.8 seconds, and the number of game balls held by the player decreases. During the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70 times, 0.25 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38. Therefore, during this period, the game ball enters the second starting port 208a at a rate of once every 1.2 seconds, and the game ball on the player's hand does not increase or decrease. During the period when the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100 times, 0.05 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38. Therefore, during this period, the game ball enters the second starting port 208a at a rate of once every 0.6 seconds, and the number of game balls held by the player increases.

FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an increase / decrease in the number of game balls held by the player in the high frequency support mode. FIG. 103 (A) shows an example of an increase / decrease in the number of game balls when the variable time table set A for the high frequency support mode is selected, and FIG. 103 (B) shows a variable time table for the high frequency support mode. An example of increasing / decreasing the number of game balls when set B is selected is shown.

As shown in FIG. 103 (A), when the variable time table set A for the high frequency support mode is selected, the period during which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 times. Inside, the number of game balls on hand by the player increases. During the period when the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70 times, the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. During the period when the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100 times, the number of game balls held by the player decreases. In the example shown in FIG. 103 (A), the number of game balls held by the player at the end of 100 game rounds is larger than that at the start of the high frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 103 (B), when the variable time table set B for the high frequency support mode is selected, the period during which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 times. Inside, the number of game balls on the player's hand decreases. During the period when the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70 times, the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. During the period when the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100 times, the number of game balls held by the player increases. In the example shown in FIG. 103 (B), the number of game balls held by the player at the end of 100 game rounds is larger than that at the start of the high frequency support mode.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 is shorter during the period in which the ratio of the game ball entering the second starting port 208a is higher in the high frequency support mode. It is set (Fig. 102). Therefore, the jackpot lottery held by the game ball entering the second starting port 208a during the fluctuation of the special figure unit 37 can be quickly digested.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 in the high frequency support mode is set to be longer than the interval of the game balls entering the second starting port 208a (FIG. 102). .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the hold of the jackpot lottery from being interrupted and the sense of rhythm of the jackpot lottery in the high frequency support mode from being impaired.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when a jackpot or reach occurrence is won as a result of the jackpot lottery, a long fluctuation time (for example, 30 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37. If a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 during the period during which the number of game balls increases in the high frequency support mode, the period during which the number of game balls increases becomes long. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting to win as many reach occurrences as possible during the period when the number of game balls increases. That is, according to the present embodiment, new value can be added to the occurrence of reach.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the variable time table set A for the high frequency support mode is selected, and the game is played during the period when the number of game times after the transition to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100 times. The number of game balls on hand is reduced. If a small hit is won during this period and the variable time table set B for the high frequency support mode is selected, the number of game balls on the player's hand will increase again. Therefore, the player will play the game while expecting to win a small hit and switch the table during the period when the number of game balls decreases. That is, according to the present embodiment, since it is possible to provide the player with a new sense of expectation during the high-frequency support mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, two types of variable time table sets, A and B, are stored, but the type of the variable time table set may be one type or three or more types. May be good.

Further, as another embodiment, during the high frequency support mode, only the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 may be set with reference to the normal figure unit table A or the normal figure unit table B. Even with this configuration, the number of game balls held by the player can be increased or decreased during the high-frequency support mode, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

N. Modification example:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the gist thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible.

N1. Modification 1:
In the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 stores the contents of the game effect executed in the latest game times or the effect elements constituting the game effect regardless of the presence or absence of the hold information, and executes the déjà vu notice. In the case, the memorized game effect or the content of the effect element constituting the game effect may be executed in the next game time. With such a configuration, even if there is a new prize in the state where there is no hold information, the game effect or the game effect executed in the previous game time is configured in the game time related to the prize. Since the effect element to be performed is executed, the game effect having the same content or the effect element constituting the game effect can be executed a plurality of times, and the player can be given a sense of déjà vu.

N2. Modification 2:
In the above embodiment, when the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, the effect element to be executed first may be started at the same time as the effect element to be executed first is finished. In this way, the player can be given a stronger sense of déjà vu.

N3. Modification 3:
In the above embodiment, after the effect elements having the same content have been executed a plurality of times, a suggestion effect suggesting to the player that the effect elements having the same content have been executed a plurality of times is executed. However, it may be configured to execute a pre-suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times before the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times. .. In this way, the player who recognizes the pre-suggestion effect can be made to have a strong interest in the effect element to be executed after that. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the game production, and the interest can be improved.

N4. Modification 4:
In the eighth and ninth embodiments, the opening / closing doors 208b and 308b have different time lengths for maintaining the open state for each type of high-frequency support mode. Instead, the high-frequency support is provided. The number of times the opening / closing doors 208b and 308b transition from the closed state to the open state and the timing at which the opening / closing doors 208b and 308b transition from the closed state to the open state may differ depending on the type of mode. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to set a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes in which the number of game balls entering the second starting port is different.

N5. Modification 5:
In the ninth embodiment, the main control device 60 is configured to be capable of executing only one type of the third high frequency support mode as the high frequency support mode in which the ball ejection rate exceeds 1, but the main control device 60 is configured. , A configuration capable of executing a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes in which the ball output rate exceeds 1.

For example, in the ninth embodiment, the fourth high-frequency support mode in which the opening time of the opening / closing door 308b is set to 2.3 seconds may be executed. In the fourth high-frequency support mode in which the opening time of the opening / closing door 308b is set to 2.3 seconds, the game ball has a predetermined firing intensity capable of reaching the second starting port unit 300 by the game ball launching mechanism 81. , In the situation where the balls are continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, all four game balls will enter the second starting port 308a, and eight game balls will be paid out as prize balls. become. Therefore, the ball ejection rate is 2.00 when the fourth high frequency support mode is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make a difference in the degree of uplifting feeling given to the player in the high frequency support mode in which the ball ejection rate exceeds 1. As a result, the inflection can be given to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved. Even when the configuration is such that the fourth high-frequency support mode can be executed, the first total ball ejection rate described above can be adjusted by adjusting the respective ratios of executing the first to fourth high-frequency support modes. The values of T1 and the second total ball ejection rate T2 can be set to less than 1.

N6. Modification 6:
In the ninth embodiment, one of the four game balls GB1 is distributed to the path R11, and the three game balls GB2, GB3, and GB4 that arrive after the game ball GB1 are referred to as the path R11. It is configured to be distributed to different routes (path R2 and route R12), but instead of this configuration, one game ball GB1 is distributed to a predetermined route, and two game balls arriving after the game ball GB1 are dealt with. It may be configured to be distributed to a route different from the predetermined route, and one game ball GB1 may be distributed to a predetermined route, and four or more predetermined number of game balls arriving after the game ball GB1 may be distributed to the predetermined route. It may be configured to be distributed to a route different from the route of. That is, one game ball GB1 may be distributed to a predetermined route, and N game balls (N is an integer of 2 or more) arriving after the game ball GB1 may be distributed to a route different from the predetermined route. Good.

Further, instead of the through gate 306 in the ninth embodiment, a prize ball opening or a predetermined ball can be entered at a position where only one game ball GB1 distributed to the predetermined route can be reached. It may be configured to provide an accessory. According to such a configuration, out of (N + 1) game balls, only one game ball GB1 reaches the prize ball mouth or a predetermined accessory, and N game balls reach after the game ball GB1. It is possible to prevent the player from reaching the prize ball opening or a predetermined accessory.

Further, when designing the game machine, by setting the value of N (the number of game balls distributed to a route different from the predetermined route) to a desired value, the game reaches the prize ball opening or the predetermined accessory. The proportion of spheres can be set to the desired proportion. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the game machine and to diversify the game.

N7. Modification 7:
In the eighth to thirteenth embodiments, instead of the opening / closing doors 208b and 308b, the states of the second starting ports 208a and 308a are defined as a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a state in which the game ball is easy to enter. Other mechanisms for transitioning between may be employed. For example, so-called electric tulips may be adopted as another mechanism instead of the opening / closing doors 208b and 308b.

N8. Modification 8:
In the eighth to thirteenth embodiments, the configuration in which the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery in the high frequency support mode is set to other than 100% may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery in the high frequency support mode is set to 99%, 60%, or the like. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the ball ejection rate in the high frequency support mode. For example, the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery is 100, as opposed to the configuration in which the ball output rate is 1 when the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery in the high frequency support mode is set to 100%. If it is set to less than%, the ball ejection rate in the high frequency support mode can be set to less than 1.

Further, in the eighth to thirteenth embodiments, the number of game balls (number of prize balls) to be paid out as prize balls when one game ball enters the second starting ports 208a and 308a is set to one or more. It may be set to any value other than two. In this way, the ball ejection rate in the high frequency support mode can be set to an arbitrary value. Further, the number of game balls (number of prize balls) paid out as prize balls when one game ball enters the second starting ports 208a and 308a may be changed according to the game state. According to such a configuration, since the ball ejection rate of the high frequency support mode changes according to the game state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

N9. Modification 9:
In the 8th to 12th embodiments described above, the types of the high-frequency support mode are set for each type of jackpot, but the opportunity to execute the high-frequency support mode and the type of the high-frequency support mode are determined. Any other configuration can be adopted as the configuration to be used. For example, a configuration in which a high-frequency support mode is executed when the number of consecutive games that do not win the jackpot lottery exceeds a predetermined number, or a high-frequency support mode according to the number of consecutive games that do not win the jackpot lottery. A configuration that determines the type of the high-frequency support mode, whether or not the high-frequency support mode is executed, and a random number counter for determining the type are provided. The configuration that determines the type of mode, the configuration that determines whether or not the high-frequency support mode is executed and the type of high-frequency support mode according to the type of stop symbol, and the configuration that determines the type of high-frequency support mode, and the high frequency triggered by the execution of a specific reach effect The configuration to execute the support mode, the configuration to determine the type of high frequency support mode according to the type of reach effect to be executed, and the number of game balls entered at the timing when the number of holdings at the start port is the upper limit. High-frequency support mode is executed when the total exceeds a predetermined threshold value, and high-frequency support is provided according to the total number of game balls entered at the timing when the number of reserved start ports is the upper limit. A configuration or the like that determines the type of mode can be adopted.

N10. Modification 10:
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, the ball ejection rate and the execution rate in each high frequency support mode are set so that the first total ball ejection rate T1 and the second total ball ejection rate T2 are less than 1. However, the ball ejection rate and the execution rate in each high frequency support mode may be set so that the first total ball ejection rate T1 and the second total ball ejection rate T2 are 1. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the gambling spirit of the player.

N11. Modification 11:
When a pachinko machine of another type different from each of the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball enters a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that becomes a big hit when a right is generated, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start rotation of a reel.

Further, a part of the functions realized by the software in the above embodiment may be realized by the hardware, or a part of the functions realized by the hardware may be realized by the software.

O. About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments:
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary.

<Characteristic A group>
The feature A group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof.

[Feature A1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
Acquired information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means and the predetermined privilege grant information match.
A notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game.
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
A determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information before the special information is subject to the collation.
A production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements, and
A control means for controlling the effect execution means and
In a game machine equipped with
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined effect element is determined and the predetermined effect element is determined.
In the production execution means
The execution of the determined effect element is started from the game times before the game times related to the special information, which is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition.
A gaming machine characterized in that the determined effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content by the end of the gaming round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the feature A1, since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to give the player a déjà vu that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times. .. A player who recognizes the déjà vu has a feeling of expectation that the déjà vu may have a special meaning, for example, a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element having the same content is executed multiple times, the effect element is expected to be executed multiple times with the same content. Every time it is executed, he always pays attention to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements to be executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

Further, according to the feature A1, even if the effect (for example, the look-ahead lamp is lit in red) that directly suggests that the privilege is likely to be given is not executed, the effect element having the same content is executed. It is possible to realize a game in which attention is paid to whether or not is executed a plurality of times. Therefore, the player can always play the game with a high expectation for the effect elements that are sequentially executed.

The game effect is executed by the output from a plurality of hardware such as a speaker, a display device, a light emitting device, and a physically operating accessory included in the game machine. The above-mentioned effect element refers to a combination of outputs at predetermined timings by these a plurality of hardwares that control the game effect. For example, one effect element (for example, a cut-in notice effect, a reach effect, etc.) is configured by outputting each of the speaker, the display device, and the light emitting device at predetermined timings. Then, the game production is composed of a plurality of production elements.

As described above, since the effect element is a combination of outputs at a predetermined timing by a plurality of hardware that controls the game effect, it is composed of, for example, outputs from a speaker, a display device, and a light emitting device at a predetermined timing. If the content of the output from the display device and the light emitting device at a predetermined timing is the same, the effect element A and the effect element B in which the output from the speaker is deleted from the effect element have the same content. Will be included. When the effect element B is executed after the game machine executes the effect element A, the game effect B does not include sound (output from the speaker) for the game effect A, but other hardware. Since the contents of the output from (display device and light emitting device) are the same, it is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu.

[Feature A2]
The gaming machine described in feature A1.
The control means is a gaming machine characterized in that it controls the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature A2, the player's expectation is increased or decreased by increasing or decreasing the number of production elements having the same content to be executed multiple times, and the expectation is given intonation. Can give a change to.

[Feature A3]
The gaming machine described in feature A2.
The control means is executed a plurality of times in the period from the time when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied to the end of the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized in that the number of production elements of the contents of is increased with the passage of time.

According to the feature A3, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the déjà vu increases with the passage of time, the expectation of the player can be increased with the passage of time.

[Feature A4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A3, and further
Equipped with an operation acceptance means that accepts input operations by the player
The control means
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect element including a content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player.
A gaming machine characterized in that the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu.

According to the feature A4, since the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent the player from executing different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It can surely give a feeling of déjà vu.

[Feature A5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A4.
The control means performs a suggestion effect suggesting to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, the effect execution means. A game machine characterized in that it is to be executed by a player.

According to the feature A5, since the suggestive effect is executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content can be used. It is possible to convince the player that having been executed multiple times has a special meaning.

[Feature A6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A5.
The effect elements include a cut-in notice effect that displays a predetermined image in front of the background image, an object notice effect that displays a predetermined object image in front of the background image, and a change in a mode different from the normal time. Background change notice effect to make a predetermined character perform a predetermined operation, a lamp light emission effect to make various lamps emit light in a predetermined pattern, a symbol sequence change effect to change a symbol sequence in a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect in which two identical symbols are stopped on at least one effective line and the remaining one symbol sequence is changed, and a symbol stop effect in which a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped. A gaming machine characterized by including.

According to the feature A6, since it is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu by using various production elements, the player determines whether or not the same content is executed multiple times for the various production elements. Can be noticed.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof.

[Feature B1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
Acquired information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means and the predetermined privilege grant information match.
A notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game.
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
A determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information.
A production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements, and
A control means for controlling the effect execution means and
In a game machine equipped with
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means provides at least one effect element by the end of the game round relating to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. In addition to having the effect executing means execute the same content multiple times,
A suggestion effect suggesting to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times is executed by the effect executing means after the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times. A game machine characterized by being.

According to the feature B1, since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to give the player a déjà vu that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times. .. A player who recognizes the déjà vu has a feeling of expectation that the déjà vu may have a special meaning, for example, a privilege may be given.

Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element having the same content is executed multiple times, the effect element is expected to be executed multiple times with the same content. Every time it is executed, he always pays attention to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements to be executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

Further, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times. You can convince the player that something has a special meaning.

[Feature B2]
The gaming machine described in feature B1.
The control means is a gaming machine characterized in that it controls the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times.

According to feature B2, the player's expectation is increased or decreased by increasing or decreasing the number of production elements having the same content to be executed multiple times, and the expectation is given intonation. Can give a change to.

[Feature B3]
The gaming machine described in feature B2.
The control means is executed a plurality of times in the period from the time when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied to the end of the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized in that the number of production elements of the contents of is increased with the passage of time.

According to the feature B3, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the déjà vu increases with the passage of time, the expectation of the player can be increased with the passage of time.

[Feature B4]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B3.
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information contained in the special information before the special information is subject to the collation. Is a thing
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect execution means is executed a plurality of times from the game times before the game times related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized in that it starts the execution of a production element that is an object to be played.

According to the feature B4, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for déjà vu from the game times before the game times related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

[Feature B5]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B4, and further
Equipped with an operation acceptance means that accepts input operations by the player
The control means
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect element including a content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player.
A gaming machine characterized in that the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu.

According to the feature B5, since the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent the player from executing different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It can surely give a feeling of déjà vu.

[Feature B6]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B5.
The effect elements include a cut-in notice effect that displays a predetermined image in front of the background image, an object notice effect that displays a predetermined object image in front of the background image, and a change in a mode different from the normal time. Background change notice effect to make a predetermined character perform a predetermined operation, a lamp light emission effect to make various lamps emit light in a predetermined pattern, a symbol sequence change effect to change a symbol sequence in a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect in which two identical symbols are stopped on at least one effective line and the remaining one symbol sequence is changed, and a symbol stop effect in which a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped. A gaming machine characterized by including.

According to feature B6, it is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu by using various production elements, so pay attention to whether or not the same content is executed multiple times in the various production elements. Can be made to.

<Characteristic C group>
The feature C group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature C1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
Acquired information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means and the predetermined privilege grant information match.
A notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game.
A determination means for determining the display duration, which is the time required for one game, and
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
A determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information before the special information is subject to the collation.
A production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements, and
A control means for controlling the effect execution means and
In a game machine equipped with
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means at least two times out of a plurality of game times before the game time related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Each game is characterized in that the effect executing means is made to execute an effect element having the same content that can be executed with the shortest display duration or less among the display durations that can be determined by the determination means. A game machine to play.

According to the feature C1, since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times (at least twice), the player has a sense of déjà vu that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times. Can be given. A player who recognizes the déjà vu has a feeling of expectation that the déjà vu may have a special meaning, for example, a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element having the same content is executed multiple times, the effect element is expected to be executed multiple times with the same content. Every time it is executed, he always pays attention to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements to be executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

Further, according to the feature C1, the control means causes the effect execution means to execute an effect element having the same content that can be executed with the shortest display duration or less of the display duration that can be determined by the determination unit. Even if the display duration of each game time determined by the means is different, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute the effect element having the same content in each game time.

[Feature C2]
The gaming machine described in feature C1.
The control means
When the length of the display duration of one game in which the effect element having the same content is executed is a length that allows the effect element of the same content to be executed a plurality of times, the same in the one game. A game machine characterized in that the effect element of the content of the above is executed by the effect execution means a plurality of times.

According to the feature C2, the effect element having the same content (hereinafter, also referred to as the effect element for déjà vu notice), which is the target to be executed a plurality of times, can be executed more times, so that the player can execute it. On the other hand, the feeling of déjà vu can be strongly recognized. Further, since the number of times the effect element for déjà vu is executed increases or decreases depending on the length of the display duration of one game, it is possible to give an intonation to the player's expectation.

Further, since the déjà vu advance notice element is an effect element that can be executed with the shortest display duration or less among the display durations that can be determined by the determining means, the time required for one execution is 1. It is less than or equal to the length of the display duration of the game times. Therefore, even if the effect element for déjà vu warning is executed once in one game, an extra time may occur in the display duration. According to this game machine, when the length of the display duration of one game is such that the effect element for déjà vu notice (the effect element having the same content) can be executed a plurality of times. Since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times in one game, the surplus time of the display duration can be minimized.

[Feature C3]
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2.
The control means is a gaming machine characterized in that it controls the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature C3, the player's expectation is increased or decreased by increasing or decreasing the number of production elements having the same content to be executed multiple times, and the expectation is given intonation. Can give a change to.

[Feature C4]
The gaming machine described in feature C3.
The control means is executed a plurality of times in the period from the time when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied to the end of the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized in that the number of production elements of the contents of is increased with the passage of time.

According to the feature C4, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the déjà vu increases with the passage of time, the expectation of the player can be increased with the passage of time.

[Feature C5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C4, and further
Equipped with an operation acceptance means that accepts input operations by the player
The control means
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect element including a content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player.
A gaming machine characterized in that the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu.

According to the feature C5, since the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent the player from executing different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It can surely give a feeling of déjà vu.

[Feature C6]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature C1 to feature C5.
The control means performs a suggestion effect suggesting to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, the effect execution means. A game machine characterized in that it is to be executed by a player.

According to the feature C6, since the suggestive effect is executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content can be used. It is possible to convince the player that having been executed multiple times has a special meaning.

[Feature C7]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature C1 to feature C6.
The effect elements include a cut-in notice effect that displays a predetermined image in front of the background image, an object notice effect that displays a predetermined object image in front of the background image, and a change in a mode different from the normal time. Background change notice effect to make a predetermined character perform a predetermined operation, a lamp light emission effect to make various lamps emit light in a predetermined pattern, a symbol sequence change effect to change a symbol sequence in a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect in which two identical symbols are stopped on at least one effective line and the remaining one symbol sequence is changed, and a symbol stop effect in which a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped. A gaming machine characterized by including.

According to the feature C7, since it is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu by using various effect elements, the player determines whether or not the same content is executed multiple times for the various effect elements. Can be noticed.

<Feature D group>
The feature D group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature D1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
Acquired information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means and the predetermined privilege grant information match.
A notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game.
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
A determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information before the special information is subject to the collation.
A production execution means for executing a game production and
A control means for controlling the effect execution means and
An effect storage means for storing the contents of the game effect and
In a game machine equipped with
When it is determined that the predetermined conditions are satisfied,
The effect storage means stores the contents of at least a part of the game effects executed in the game times prior to the game times related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied.
The control means is a game time after the game time in which the content of the game effect is stored, and is a game time before the game time related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that the contents of the memorized gaming effect during at least a part of the period are reproduced by the effect executing means.

According to the feature D1, the content of the executed game effect during at least a part of the period is memorized, and the content of the memorized game effect during at least a part of the period is reproduced. It is possible to give a feeling of déjà vu that the game production has been executed multiple times. A player who recognizes the déjà vu has a feeling of expectation that the déjà vu may have a special meaning, for example, a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the game effect having the same content is executed multiple times, the game effect is expected to be executed multiple times with the same content. Every time it is executed, he always pays attention to the game production with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the game effect having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the game effect to be executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

Further, according to the feature D1, since the content of the executed game effect is memorized and reproduced, the player experiences the game effect having exactly the same content. Therefore, it is easy to give the player a sense of déjà vu.

[Feature D2]
The gaming machine according to feature D1, and further
Equipped with an operation acceptance means that accepts input operations by the player
The control means
As the game effect, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect including a content suggesting that the player accepts the input operation.
A game machine characterized in that when the game effect unit is made to execute a game effect to be stored by the effect storage means, the operation acceptance effect is not selected as the game effect.

When the operation acceptance effect is reproduced as a game effect, the operation acceptance effect may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu.

According to the feature D2, since the operation acceptance effect is not selected as the game effect to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent the player from executing different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It can surely give a feeling of déjà vu.

[Feature D3]
The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2.
The control means causes the effect executing means to execute a suggestion effect suggesting to the player that the game effect having the same content has been reproduced, after the memorized game effect is reproduced. A game machine characterized by that.

According to the feature D3, since the suggestive effect is executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game effect having the same content has been reproduced, and the game effect having the same content is reproduced. You can convince the player that something has a special meaning.

<Feature E group>
The feature E group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature E1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
Acquired information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means and the predetermined privilege grant information match.
A notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game.
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
A determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information before the special information is subject to the collation.
A production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements, and
A control means for controlling the effect execution means and
A determination means for determining the display duration, which is the time required for one game, and
The total time of the shortest display duration that can be determined by the determination means is calculated as the display duration of each of a plurality of consecutive game times before the game times related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Calculation means and
In a game machine equipped with
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means is calculated by the calculation means by the time the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. A gaming machine characterized in that the effect executing means is made to execute an effect element having the same content that can be executed a plurality of times in the total time.

According to the feature E1, since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times (at least twice), the player feels that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times (déjà vu). Can be given. A player who recognizes the déjà vu has a feeling of expectation that the déjà vu may have a special meaning, for example, a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element having the same content is executed multiple times, the effect element is expected to be executed multiple times with the same content. Every time it is executed, he always pays attention to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements to be executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

Further, according to the feature E1, the control means produces an effect element having the same content that can be executed a plurality of times within the total time calculated by the calculation means (the total time of the shortest display duration that can be determined by the determination means). Since the effect executing means is made to execute the effect a plurality of times, the effect element to be executed a plurality of times is not limited to one that can be completed within the display duration, which is the time required for one game. That is, it is possible to execute the effect element having the same content a plurality of times across a plurality of consecutive game times before the game time related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, it is possible to execute one effect element, which is a target to be executed a plurality of times, across game times. Therefore, when selecting an effect element to be executed a plurality of times, the effect element can be selected without considering the execution time of one effect element.

Further, since the effect element having the same content that can be executed multiple times is executed multiple times within the total time of each display duration that is the shortest that can be determined by the determining means, the effect element having the same content is executed multiple times. The time required for this is less than or equal to the total display duration of each actual game. Therefore, when the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times across a plurality of consecutive game times before the game time related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the time may be insufficient. It is possible to avoid it and surely execute the effect element having the same content multiple times.

[Feature E2]
The gaming machine described in the feature E1.
The control means is a gaming machine characterized in that it controls the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature E2, the player's expectation is increased or decreased by increasing or decreasing the number of production elements having the same content to be executed multiple times, and the expectation is given intonation. Can give a change to.

[Feature E3]
The gaming machine described in feature E2.
The control means is executed a plurality of times in the period from the time when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied to the end of the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized in that the number of production elements of the contents of is increased with the passage of time.

According to the feature E3, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the déjà vu increases with the passage of time, the expectation of the player can be increased with the passage of time.

[Feature E4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E3, and further
Equipped with an operation acceptance means that accepts input operations by the player
The control means
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect element including a content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player.
A gaming machine characterized in that the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu.

According to the feature E4, since the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent the player from executing different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It can surely give a feeling of déjà vu.

[Feature E5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E4.
The control means performs a suggestion effect suggesting to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, the effect execution means. A game machine characterized in that it is to be executed by a player.

According to the feature E5, since the suggestive effect is executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content can be used. It is possible to convince the player that having been executed multiple times has a special meaning.

[Feature E6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E5.
The effect elements include a cut-in notice effect that displays a predetermined image in front of the background image, an object notice effect that displays a predetermined object image in front of the background image, and a change in a mode different from the normal time. Background change notice effect to make a predetermined character perform a predetermined operation, a lamp light emission effect to make various lamps emit light in a predetermined pattern, a symbol sequence change effect to change a symbol sequence in a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect in which two identical symbols are stopped on at least one effective line and the remaining one symbol sequence is changed, and a symbol stop effect in which a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped. A gaming machine characterized by including.

According to the feature E6, since it is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu by using various effect elements, the player determines whether or not the same content is executed multiple times for the various effect elements. Can be noticed.

<Characteristic F group>
The feature F group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature F1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
Acquired information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means and the predetermined privilege grant information match.
A notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game.
A determination means for determining the display duration, which is the time required for one game, and
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
A determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information.
A production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements, and
A control means for controlling the effect execution means and
In a game machine equipped with
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means has at least one game out of the game times before the game time related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that, in a game, the effect executing means is made to execute an effect element that can be executed a plurality of times within the display duration of the game times with the same content a plurality of times.

According to the feature F1, since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to give the player a déjà vu that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times. ..
A player who recognizes the déjà vu has a feeling of expectation that the déjà vu may have a special meaning, for example, a privilege may be given.
Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element having the same content is executed multiple times, the effect element is expected to be executed multiple times with the same content. Every time it is executed, he always pays attention to the production elements with a high expectation.
Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements to be executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

Further, according to the feature F1, in at least one game time, the effect element that can be executed a plurality of times within the display duration of the game time is executed a plurality of times with the same content, so that the player feels déjà vu. Can be given in one game.

[Feature F2]
Feature The game machine described in F1.
The control means is a gaming machine characterized in that it controls the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature F2, the player's expectation is increased or decreased by increasing or decreasing the number of production elements having the same content to be executed multiple times, and the expectation is given intonation. Can give a change to.

[Feature F3]
The gaming machine described in Feature F2.
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means is a game related to the special information for which it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied after it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times is increased with the passage of time in a period until the end of the times.

According to the feature F3, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the déjà vu increases with the passage of time, the expectation of the player can be increased with the passage of time.

[Feature F4]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature F1 to feature F3.
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information contained in the special information before the special information is subject to the collation. Is a thing
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect execution means is executed a plurality of times from the game times before the game times related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized in that it starts the execution of a production element that is an object to be played.

According to the feature F4, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for déjà vu from the game times before the game times related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

[Feature F5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to the feature F4.
The control means performs a suggestion effect suggesting to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, the effect execution means. A game machine characterized in that it is to be executed by a player.

According to the feature F5, since the suggestive effect is executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content can be used. It is possible to convince the player that having been executed multiple times has a special meaning.

[Feature F6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to the feature F5.
The effect elements include a cut-in notice effect that displays a predetermined image in front of the background image, an object notice effect that displays a predetermined object image in front of the background image, and a change in a mode different from the normal time. Background change notice effect to make a predetermined character perform a predetermined operation, a lamp light emission effect to make various lamps emit light in a predetermined pattern, a symbol sequence change effect to change a symbol sequence in a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect in which two identical symbols are stopped on at least one effective line and the remaining one symbol sequence is changed, and a symbol stop effect in which a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped. A gaming machine characterized by including.

According to the feature F6, since it is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu by using various production elements, pay attention to whether or not the same content is executed multiple times in the various production elements. Can be made to.

<Characteristic G group>
The feature G group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment.

[Feature G1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
Acquired information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means and the predetermined privilege grant information match.
A notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game.
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
A determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information before the special information is subject to the collation.
A production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements, and
A control means for controlling the effect execution means and
A determination means for determining the display duration, which is the time required for one game, and
In a game machine equipped with
The determination means sets a predetermined length of display duration for at least two game times out of a plurality of game times before the game times related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. To secure,
The control means executes the effect element having the same content in at least two game times out of a plurality of game times before the game time related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized in that it is to be executed by means.

According to the feature G1, it is possible to execute the effect element having the same content in each of at least two game times in which the duration of a predetermined length is secured by the determination means. Since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to give the player a déjà vu that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times. A player who recognizes the déjà vu has a feeling of expectation that the déjà vu may have a special meaning, for example, a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element having the same content is executed multiple times, the effect element is expected to be executed multiple times with the same content. Every time it is executed, he always pays attention to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements to be executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

[Feature G2]
The gaming machine described in the feature G1.
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination means has at least two games out of a plurality of game times before the game time related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. It secures a display duration of a predetermined length for each time.
The control means causes the effect executing means to execute an effect element having the same content that can be executed in each game in which a display duration of a predetermined length is secured by the determination unit. A game machine characterized by being.

According to the feature G2, the control means causes the effect execution means to execute the effect elements having the same contents that can be executed in each game time in which the determination means secures the display duration of a predetermined length. It is possible to prevent the time required to execute the same effect element from being insufficient in each game time, and to reliably execute the effect element having the same content in each game time.

[Feature G3]
It is a game machine described in the feature G1.
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means is at least two times each of a plurality of game times before the game time related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. In the game times, the effect elements having the same contents are executed by the effect execution means.
The determination means has the same content as the effect executing means for at least two game times out of a plurality of game times before the game times related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that it secures a display duration of a length that allows the production element to be executed.

According to the feature G3, since the determining means secures a display duration of a length that allows the effect executing means to execute the same effect element, the time required for the effect executing means to execute the same effect element. However, it is possible to prevent the game from being insufficient in each game and to ensure that the same production element is executed in each game.

[Feature G4]
The gaming machine described in any one of the features G1 to the feature G3.
The control means is a gaming machine characterized in that it controls the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature G4, the player's expectation is increased or decreased by increasing or decreasing the number of production elements having the same content to be executed multiple times, and the expectation is given intonation. Can give a change to.

[Feature G5]
Feature The game machine described in G4.
The control means is executed a plurality of times in the period from the time when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied to the end of the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized in that the number of production elements of the contents of is increased with the passage of time.

According to the feature G5, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the déjà vu increases with the passage of time, the expectation of the player can be increased with the passage of time.

[Feature G6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to the feature G5, and further
Equipped with an operation acceptance means that accepts input operations by the player
The control means
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect element including a content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player.
A gaming machine characterized in that the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu.

According to the feature G6, since the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent the player from executing different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It can surely give a feeling of déjà vu.

[Feature G7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to the feature G6.
The control means performs a suggestion effect suggesting to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, the effect execution means. A game machine characterized in that it is to be executed by a player.

According to the feature G7, since the suggestive effect is executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content can be used. It is possible to convince the player that having been executed multiple times has a special meaning.

[Feature G8]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to the feature G7.
The effect elements include a cut-in notice effect that displays a predetermined image in front of the background image, an object notice effect that displays a predetermined object image in front of the background image, and a change in a mode different from the normal time. Background change notice effect to make a predetermined character perform a predetermined operation, a lamp light emission effect to make various lamps emit light in a predetermined pattern, a symbol sequence change effect to change a symbol sequence in a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect in which two identical symbols are stopped on at least one effective line and the remaining one symbol sequence is changed, and a symbol stop effect in which a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped. A gaming machine characterized by including.

According to the feature G8, since it is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu by using various effect elements, the player determines whether or not the same content is executed multiple times for the various effect elements. Can be noticed.

<Characteristic H group>
The feature H group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment.

[Feature H1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
Acquired information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means and the predetermined privilege grant information match.
A notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game.
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
A determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information.
A production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements, and
A control means for controlling the effect execution means and
Time acquisition means for acquiring time information and
In a game machine equipped with
The control means
As the effect element, the effect execution means is made to execute a time-linked effect element that is continuously executed with the passage of time based on the time information.
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the execution of the time-linked effect element is started by the end of the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. In the case, a plurality of the time-linked effect elements executed during at least a part of the period are provided to the effect execution means by the time the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. A game machine characterized in that it is executed once.

According to the feature H1, since the time-linked effect element executed in at least a part of the period is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to provide the player with an effect having a new interest. In addition, since the time-linked effect element executed during at least a part of the period is executed a plurality of times, the player has a sense of déjà vu that the time-linked effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times. Can be given.

A player who recognizes the déjà vu has a feeling of expectation that the déjà vu may have a special meaning, for example, a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the time-linked effect element is executed a plurality of times, the time-linked effect element is executed in the expectation that the time-linked effect element is executed a plurality of times. Every time, he always has a high expectation and pays attention to the time-linked production element. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the time-linked effect element is executed a plurality of times, and to preferably increase the player's attention to the time-linked effect element executed based on the time information. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

If a plurality of game machines having the feature H1 are installed in the game hall, the game machines that satisfy the predetermined conditions and the game machines that do not meet the predetermined conditions have the same time-linked effect element from the same time. Even when is started, there is a time difference (deviation) in the time-linked effect element to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to give a superiority complex to a player who is playing a game with a game machine that satisfies a predetermined condition.

[Feature H2]
Feature The game machine described in H1.
The control means sets a specific time position of the time-linked effect element having a predetermined time length as a start position when the effect executing means executes the time-linked effect element a plurality of times. A game machine characterized by being there.

According to the feature H2, since the time-linked effect element is executed a plurality of times with the specific time position as the start position, the player is already strong against the part of the time-linked effect element after the specific time position. It is possible to recognize the visual sensation.

[Feature H3]
Feature The game machine described in H2.
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information contained in the special information before the special information is subject to the collation. Is a thing
The control means is a game time in which execution is started after it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and is a game time before the game time related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game characterized in that the time-linked effect element is executed by the effect executing means with the specific time position as the start position, triggered by the timing of starting each of the game times at least two times. Machine.

According to the feature H3, by synchronizing the start timing of each time-linked effect element executed a plurality of times with the start timing of the game round, a stronger déjà vu can be given to the player.

[Feature H4]
The gaming machine according to feature H2 or feature 3.
The control means stores the time position of the time-linked effect element, which is executed at the timing when the game round is started after it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, as the specific time position. A game machine characterized by being.

If a specific time position is set at the end of the time-linked effect element, when the time-linked effect element is started from a specific time position, the time-linked effect element corresponding to the specific time position is displayed. , It may not be executed even once at the start timing of the first game round of at least two game rounds. In this case, the time-linked effect element, which was executed as a continuous series of flows until the first game round is started, is suddenly interrupted at the start timing of the first game round and is executed even once. The time-linked effect element will be started / executed from a specific time position that has not been set.

According to the feature H4, the game times after it is determined that the predetermined conditions are satisfied, in other words, the time-linked effect executed at the timing when the first game times of the above two game times are started. Since the time position of the element is memorized as a specific time position and the memorized specific time position is used as the start position of the time-linked effect element for the second and subsequent times of the execution multiple times, the time-linked effect element The temporal position once executed as a continuous series of flows can be set as the start position of the time-linked effect element executed a plurality of times after the second time. Therefore, the time-linked effect element, which was executed as a continuous series of flows until the first game round is started, is prevented from being suddenly interrupted at the start timing of the first game round, and is executed even once. It is possible to prevent the time-linked effect element from starting / executing from a specific time position that has not been set.

[Feature H5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to the feature H4.
The control means
Further, as the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute a non-time interlocking effect element that is executed without being based on the time information.
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied and the non-time-linked effect element is executed together with the time-linked effect element, the time-linked effect executed during at least a part of the period. The element and the non-time interlocking effect element are characterized in that the effect executing means is made to execute the element and the non-time interlocking effect element a plurality of times before the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. Game machine.

According to the feature H5, in addition to the time-linked effect element, the non-time-linked effect element is also executed a plurality of times, so that a stronger déjà vu can be given to the player.

[Feature H6]
Feature H5 description of the gaming machine
The control means is a gaming machine that controls the number of the non-time interlocking effect elements to be executed a plurality of times.

According to feature 6, by increasing or decreasing the number of non-time-linked effect elements to be executed multiple times, the player's expectation can be increased or decreased, or the player's expectation can be increased or decreased. Can make a difference.

[Feature H7]
Feature The game machine described in H6.
The control means is executed a plurality of times in a period from the time when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied until the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. A gaming machine characterized in that the number of non-time-linked production elements is increased with the passage of time.

According to the feature H7, since the number of non-time-linked production elements, which is one of the production elements for which the player recognizes the déjà vu, increases with the passage of time, the player's expectation is increased with the passage of time. Can be increased.

[Feature H8]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature H1 to the feature H7.
Equipped with an operation acceptance means that accepts input operations by the player
The control means
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect element including a content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player.
A gaming machine characterized in that the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the non-time interlocking effect element to be executed a plurality of times when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu.

According to the feature H8, since the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the non-time interlocking effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress that different contents are executed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It is possible to give a person a sense of déjà vu.

[Feature H9]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to the feature H8.
The control means performs a suggestion effect suggesting to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, the effect execution means. A game machine characterized in that it is to be executed by a player.

According to the feature H9, since the suggestive effect is executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content can be used. It is possible to convince the player that having been executed multiple times has a special meaning.

[Feature H10]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature H1 to the feature H9.
The effect elements include a cut-in notice effect that displays a predetermined image in front of the background image, an object notice effect that displays a predetermined object image in front of the background image, and a change in a mode different from the normal time. Background change notice effect to make a predetermined character perform a predetermined operation, a lamp light emission effect to make various lamps emit light in a predetermined pattern, a symbol sequence change effect to change a symbol sequence in a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect in which two identical symbols are stopped on at least one effective line and the remaining one symbol sequence is changed, and a symbol stop effect in which a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped. A gaming machine characterized by including.

According to the feature H10, since it is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu by using various effect elements, the player determines whether or not the same content is executed multiple times for the various effect elements. Can be noticed.

<Feature I group>
The feature I group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 1 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature I1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
Acquired information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means and the predetermined privilege grant information match.
A notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game.
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
A determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information.
A production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements, and
A control means for controlling the effect execution means and
An operation acceptance means that accepts input operations by the player,
In a game machine equipped with
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is used as the effect execution means by the time the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. It is to be executed multiple times,
When the operation acceptance effect element including the content suggesting the acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As a control for causing the effect executing means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element.
After the effect executing means is made to execute the first effect mode including the content suggesting the acceptance of the input operation by the player, the operation mode of the input operation accepted by the operation accepting means satisfies a predetermined operation condition. When it is satisfied, the effect executing means is made to execute a second effect mode different from the first effect mode.
If the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition after the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means, the second effect mode is not executed by the effect execution means.
As a control for causing the effect executing means to execute the operation acceptance effect element from the second time onward.
When the second effect mode is executed when the effect execution means executes the first operation acceptance effect element, the second effect mode is executed.
After the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means, the second effect mode is performed regardless of whether the operation mode satisfies or does not satisfy the operation condition. Let the production execution means execute it,
If the second effect mode is not executed when the effect execution means executes the first operation acceptance effect element, the second effect mode is not executed.
After the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means, the second effect mode is performed regardless of whether the operation mode satisfies or does not satisfy the operation condition. A game machine characterized in that it is not allowed to be executed by a production execution means.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

According to the feature I1, when the second effect mode is executed in the first operation acceptance effect element regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, the second operation acceptance effect element in the second and subsequent operation acceptance effect elements. On the other hand, if the second effect mode is not executed in the first operation acceptance effect element, the second effect mode is not executed in the second and subsequent operation acceptance effect elements. Even when the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation acceptance effect element executed the first time and the second and subsequent times can be the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a déjà vu that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

A player who recognizes the déjà vu has a feeling of expectation that the déjà vu may have a special meaning, for example, a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element having the same content is executed multiple times, the effect element is expected to be executed multiple times with the same content. Every time it is executed, he always pays attention to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements to be executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

[Feature I2]
The gaming machine described in feature I1.
The control means
As a control for causing the effect executing means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element.
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, the second effect mode is caused by the effect execution means when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition.
As a control for causing the effect executing means to execute the operation acceptance effect element from the second time onward.
When the second effect mode is executed when the first operation acceptance effect element is executed by the effect execution means, the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means. Later, when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within the predetermined time, the effect execution means is made to execute the second effect mode when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition.
When the second effect mode is executed when the first operation acceptance effect element is executed by the effect execution means, the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means. Later, when the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is caused to execute the second effect mode when the predetermined time has elapsed. A game machine featuring.

According to the feature I2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second production mode is triggered by the operation mode satisfying the predetermined operation condition. Since it is executed, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, even when the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode can be executed when the predetermined time has elapsed. .. Further, even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is executed, so that the game can be given unexpectedness. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature I3]
The gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2.
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied and the operation acceptance effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element is selected.
As a control for causing the effect executing means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the effect executing means does not display a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation can be accepted. A featured game machine.

The player may perform an input operation at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect executing means, the player recognizes that the input operation is performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the same content is used. Even if the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the player may not feel a sense of déjà vu with respect to the operation acceptance effect element executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature I3, when the operation acceptance effect element is executed by the effect execution means a plurality of times, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect execution means, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling déjà vu. Can be done.

[Feature I4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features I1 to I3, and further
A changing means for changing the mode of the operation accepting means to the mode when the input operation by the player is accepted is provided.
The control means
When the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the operation condition and the second effect mode is executed by the effect execution means.
The changing means is controlled to change the mode of the operation accepting means to the mode of the operation accepting means when the input operation satisfying the operation condition is accepted from the player. Game machine.

According to the feature I4, since the mode of the operation accepting means is changed, it is possible to give the game unexpectedness. Further, it can be persuasive that the second effect mode is executed even though the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition.

[Feature I5]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature I1 to feature I4.
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information is subject to the collation.
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means is the effect executing means before the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is subject to the collation. In addition, the gaming machine is characterized in that it starts the execution of the effect element that is the object to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature I5, since the execution of the effect element to be executed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the target of the collation, a plurality of game times are performed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for déjà vu.

[Feature I6]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature I1 to feature I5.
The control means provides the effect executing means with a suggestion effect suggesting to the player that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after the operation acceptance effect element has been executed a plurality of times. A game machine characterized by being executed.

According to the feature I6, since the suggestive effect is executed by the effect executing means, the player can be made to recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content can be used. It is possible to convince the player that having been executed multiple times has a special meaning.

<Characteristic J group>
The feature J group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 2 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature J1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
Acquired information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means and the predetermined privilege grant information match.
A notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game.
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
A determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information.
A production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements, and
A control means for controlling the effect execution means and
An operation acceptance means that accepts input operations by the player,
In a game machine equipped with
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is used as the effect execution means by the time the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. It is to be executed multiple times,
When the operation acceptance effect element including the content suggesting the acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As a control for causing the effect executing means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element.
After the effect executing means is made to execute the first effect mode including the content suggesting the acceptance of the input operation by the player, the operation mode of the input operation accepted by the operation accepting means satisfies a predetermined operation condition. When it is satisfied, the effect executing means is made to execute a second effect mode different from the first effect mode.
If the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition after the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means, a third effect mode different from the first and second effect modes is performed. It is intended to be executed by the effect executing means.
As a control for causing the effect executing means to execute the operation acceptance effect element from the second time onward.
When the second effect mode is executed when the effect execution means executes the first operation acceptance effect element, the second effect mode is executed.
After the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means, the second effect mode is performed regardless of whether the operation mode satisfies or does not satisfy the operation condition. Let the production execution means execute it,
When the third effect mode is executed when the effect execution means executes the first operation acceptance effect element, the third effect mode is executed.
After the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means, the third effect mode is performed regardless of whether the operation mode satisfies or does not satisfy the operation condition. A game machine characterized in that it is executed by a production execution means.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

According to the feature J1, when the second effect mode is executed in the first operation acceptance effect element regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, the second operation acceptance effect element in the second and subsequent operation acceptance effect elements. On the other hand, when the third effect mode is executed in the first operation acceptance effect element, the third effect mode is executed in the second and subsequent operation acceptance effect elements. Even when the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation acceptance effect element executed the first time and the second and subsequent times can be the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a déjà vu that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

A player who recognizes the déjà vu has a feeling of expectation that the déjà vu may have a special meaning, for example, a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element having the same content is executed multiple times, the effect element is expected to be executed multiple times with the same content. Every time it is executed, he always pays attention to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements to be executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

[Feature J2]
The gaming machine described in Feature J1.
The control means
As a control for causing the effect executing means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element.
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, the effect execution means is made to execute the second effect mode when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition.
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the effect execution means is made to execute the third effect mode when the predetermined time has elapsed.
As a control for causing the effect executing means to execute the operation acceptance effect element from the second time onward.
When the second effect mode is executed when the first operation acceptance effect element is executed by the effect execution means, the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means. Later, when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within the predetermined time, the effect execution means is made to execute the second effect mode when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition.
When the second effect mode is executed when the first operation acceptance effect element is executed by the effect execution means, the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means. Later, when the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is caused to execute the second effect mode when the predetermined time elapses.
The third effect mode is executed when the first operation acceptance effect element is executed by the effect execution means, and the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means. Later, when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within the predetermined time, the effect execution means is made to execute the third effect mode when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition.
The third effect mode is executed when the first operation acceptance effect element is executed by the effect execution means, and the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means. Later, when the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the effect execution means is made to execute the third effect mode when the predetermined time has elapsed. A game machine featuring.

According to the feature J2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second or third operation mode satisfies the predetermined operation condition. Since the effect mode is executed, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second or third effect mode is executed when the predetermined time elapses. be able to. Further, even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second or third effect mode is executed, so that the game is given unexpectedness. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature J3]
The gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2.
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied and the operation acceptance effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element is selected.
As a control for causing the effect executing means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the effect executing means does not display a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation can be accepted. A featured game machine.

The player may perform an input operation at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect executing means, the player recognizes that the input operation is performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the same content is used. Even if the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the player may not feel a sense of déjà vu with respect to the operation acceptance effect element executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature J3, when the operation acceptance effect element is executed multiple times by the effect execution means, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect execution means, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling déjà vu. Can be done.

[Feature J4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to J3, and further
A changing means for changing the mode of the operation accepting means to the mode when the input operation by the player is accepted is provided.
The control means
When the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the operation condition and the second effect mode is executed by the effect execution means.
The changing means is controlled to change the mode of the operation accepting means to the mode of the operation accepting means when the input operation satisfying the operation condition is accepted from the player. Game machine.

According to the feature J4, since the mode of the operation accepting means is changed, the game can be given a surprise, and the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition. It is possible to give persuasive power to the execution of the second effect mode.

[Feature J5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to the feature J4.
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information is subject to the collation.
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means is the effect executing means before the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is subject to the collation. In addition, the gaming machine is characterized in that it starts the execution of the effect element that is the object to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature J5, the execution of the effect element, which is the target to be executed a plurality of times, is started before the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the target of the collation. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for déjà vu.
[Feature J6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to the feature J5.
The control means provides the effect executing means with a suggestion effect suggesting to the player that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after the operation acceptance effect element has been executed a plurality of times. A game machine characterized by being executed.

According to the feature J6, since the suggestive effect is executed by the effect executing means, the player can be made to recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content can be used. It is possible to convince the player that having been executed multiple times has a special meaning.

<Characteristic K group>
The feature K group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 3 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature K1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
Acquired information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means and the predetermined privilege grant information match.
A notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game.
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
A determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information.
A production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements, and
A control means for controlling the effect execution means and
An operation acceptance means that accepts input operations by the player,
In a game machine equipped with
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is used as the effect execution means by the time the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. It is to be executed multiple times,
When the operation acceptance effect element including the content suggesting the acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As a control for causing the effect executing means to execute the operation acceptance effect element.
After the effect executing means is made to execute the first effect mode including the content suggesting the acceptance of the input operation by the player, the operation mode of the input operation accepted by the operation accepting means satisfies a predetermined operation condition. A gaming machine characterized in that the effect executing means is made to execute a second effect mode different from the first effect mode regardless of whether the effect is satisfied or not.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

According to the feature K1, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, the second effect mode is executed after the first effect mode is executed. Therefore, when the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times. Even so, the contents of the operation acceptance effect elements executed from the first time and the second and subsequent times can be the same.
Then, it is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

A player who recognizes the déjà vu has a feeling of expectation that the déjà vu may have a special meaning, for example, a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element having the same content is executed multiple times, the effect element is expected to be executed multiple times with the same content. Every time it is executed, he always pays attention to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements to be executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

[Feature K2]
Feature The game machine described in K1.
The control means
As a control for causing the effect executing means to execute the operation acceptance effect element.
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, the effect execution means is made to execute the second effect mode when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition.
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is caused to execute the second effect mode when the predetermined time elapses. A game machine to be.

According to the feature K2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second production mode is triggered by the operation mode satisfying the predetermined operation condition. Since it is executed, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, even when the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode can be executed when the predetermined time has elapsed. .. Further, even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is executed, so that the game can be given unexpectedness. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature K3]
The gaming machine according to feature K1 or feature K2.
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied and the operation acceptance effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element is selected.
As a control for causing the effect executing means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the effect executing means does not display a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation can be accepted. A featured game machine.

The player may perform an input operation at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect executing means, the player recognizes that the input operation is performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the same content is used. Even if the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the player may not feel a sense of déjà vu with respect to the operation acceptance effect element executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature K3, when the operation acceptance effect element is executed multiple times by the effect execution means, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect execution means, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling déjà vu. Can be done.

[Feature K4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K3, and further
A changing means for changing the mode of the operation accepting means to the mode when the input operation by the player is accepted is provided.
The control means
When the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the operation condition and the second effect mode is executed by the effect execution means.
The changing means is controlled to change the mode of the operation accepting means to the mode of the operation accepting means when the input operation satisfying the operation condition is accepted from the player. Game machine.

According to the feature K4, since the mode of the operation accepting means is changed, the game can be given an unexpectedness, and the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition. It is possible to give persuasive power to the execution of the second effect mode.

[Feature K5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature K1 to the feature K4.
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information is subject to the collation.
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means is the effect executing means before the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is subject to the collation. In addition, the gaming machine is characterized in that it starts the execution of the effect element that is the object to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature K5, the execution of the effect element, which is the target to be executed a plurality of times, is started before the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the target of the collation. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for déjà vu.
[Feature K6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature K1 to the feature K5.
The control means provides the effect executing means with a suggestion effect suggesting to the player that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after the operation acceptance effect element has been executed a plurality of times. A game machine characterized by being executed.

According to the feature K6, since the suggestive effect is executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content can be used. It is possible to convince the player that having been executed multiple times has a special meaning.

<Characteristic L group>
The feature L group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 4 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature L1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
Acquired information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means and the predetermined privilege grant information match.
A notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game.
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
A determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information.
A production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements, and
A control means for controlling the effect execution means and
An operation acceptance means that accepts input operations by the player,
In a game machine equipped with
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is used as the effect execution means by the time the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. It is to be executed multiple times,
When the operation acceptance effect element including the content suggesting the acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As a control for causing the effect executing means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element.
An operation of the input operation accepted by the operation accepting means, which includes a content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player and allows the player to select one option from a plurality of options. The effect executing means is displayed with a selection screen in which the selection state is switched each time the mode satisfies a predetermined operation condition.
The effect execution means is made to execute an effect mode corresponding to the option selected at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed.
As a control for causing the effect executing means to execute the operation acceptance effect element from the second time onward.
The same selection screen as the selection screen displayed the first time is displayed on the effect executing means, and the effect execution means is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized in that, at a timing when the predetermined time has elapsed, the effect executing means is made to execute the same effect mode as the effect mode corresponding to the option selected for the first time.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

According to the feature L1, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, the operation acceptance effect element executed after the second time has the same effect mode as the effect mode executed in the first operation acceptance effect element. Since it is executed, even if the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation acceptance effect element executed from the first time and the second and subsequent times can be the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a déjà vu that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

A player who recognizes the déjà vu has a feeling of expectation that the déjà vu may have a special meaning, for example, a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element having the same content is executed multiple times, the effect element is expected to be executed multiple times with the same content. Every time it is executed, he always pays attention to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements to be executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

[Feature L2]
The gaming machine described in the feature L1.
The selection screen is a gaming machine having the same mode before and after the selection state is switched.

According to the feature L2, when the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the same effect mode is executed from the selection screen of the same mode, so that a stronger déjà vu is given to the player. Can be done.

[Feature L3]
The gaming machine according to feature L1 or feature L2.
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied and the operation acceptance effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element is selected.
As a control for causing the effect executing means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the effect executing means does not display a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation can be accepted. A featured game machine.

The player may perform an input operation at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect executing means, the player recognizes that the input operation is performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the same content is used. Even if the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the player may not feel a sense of déjà vu with respect to the operation acceptance effect element executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature L3, when the operation acceptance effect element is executed by the effect execution means a plurality of times, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect execution means, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling déjà vu. Can be done.

[Feature L4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features L1 to the feature L3.
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information is subject to the collation.
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means is the effect executing means before the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is subject to the collation. In addition, the gaming machine is characterized in that it starts the execution of the effect element that is the object to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature L4, since the execution of the effect element to be executed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the target of the collation, a plurality of game times are performed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for déjà vu.

[Feature L5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features L1 to the feature L4.
The control means provides the effect executing means with a suggestion effect suggesting to the player that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after the operation acceptance effect element has been executed a plurality of times. A game machine characterized by being executed.

According to the feature L5, since the suggestive effect is executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content can be used. It is possible to convince the player that having been executed multiple times has a special meaning.

<Characteristic M group>
The feature M group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 5 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature M1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
Acquired information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means and the predetermined privilege grant information match.
A notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game.
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
A determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information.
A production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements, and
A control means for controlling the effect execution means and
An operation acceptance means that accepts input operations by the player,
In a game machine equipped with
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is used as the effect execution means by the time the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. It is to be executed multiple times,
When the operation acceptance effect element including the content suggesting the acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As a control for causing the effect executing means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element.
A selection screen that includes content suggesting that the player accepts the input operation, and allows the player to select one of the plurality of production modes, and the selection state is switched over time. Is displayed on the effect executing means, and
Regardless of whether the operation mode of the input operation accepted by the operation accepting means satisfies or does not satisfy a predetermined operation condition, one effect mode is selected from the plurality of effect modes. In this state, the selected effect mode is executed by the effect execution means.
As a control for causing the effect executing means to execute the operation acceptance effect element from the second time onward.
The same selection screen as the selection screen displayed the first time is displayed on the effect executing means, and the effect execution means is displayed.
Regardless of whether the operation mode satisfies or does not satisfy the operation condition, the same effect mode as the first selected effect mode is selected, and the selected effect mode is selected. A gaming machine characterized in that the mode is executed by the effect executing means.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

According to the feature M1, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, the operation acceptance effect element executed after the second time has the same effect mode as the effect mode executed in the first operation acceptance effect element. Since it is selected and executed, even if the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation acceptance effect element executed the first time and the second and subsequent times can be the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a déjà vu that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

A player who recognizes the déjà vu has a feeling of expectation that the déjà vu may have a special meaning, for example, a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element having the same content is executed multiple times, the effect element is expected to be executed multiple times with the same content. Every time it is executed, he always pays attention to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements to be executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

[Feature M2]
Feature The gaming machine described in M1.
The control means
As a control for causing the effect executing means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element.
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, one effect mode is selected from the plurality of effect mode when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition. ,
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, one effect mode is selected from the plurality of effect mode when the predetermined time elapses. And
As a control for causing the effect executing means to execute the operation acceptance effect element from the second time onward.
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within the predetermined time, the same production mode as the first selection effect mode is selected when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition. State and
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the same production mode as the first selection mode is selected when the predetermined time elapses. A game machine characterized by being a thing.

According to the feature M2, when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, one of the plurality of production modes is selected when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition. Since the selected state is set, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, one of the plurality of production modes is triggered by the elapse of the predetermined time. Can be in the selected state.

[Feature M3]
The gaming machine according to feature M1 or feature M2.
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied and the operation acceptance effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element is selected.
As a control for causing the effect executing means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the effect executing means does not display a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation can be accepted. A featured game machine.

The player may perform an input operation at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect executing means, the player recognizes that the input operation is performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the same content is used. Even if the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the player may not feel a sense of déjà vu with respect to the operation acceptance effect element executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature M3, when the operation acceptance effect element is executed multiple times by the effect execution means, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect execution means, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling déjà vu. Can be done.

[Feature M4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature M1 to the feature M3.
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information is subject to the collation.
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means is the effect executing means before the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is subject to the collation. In addition, the gaming machine is characterized in that it starts the execution of the effect element that is the object to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature M4, the execution of the effect element, which is the target to be executed a plurality of times, is started before the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the target of the collation. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for déjà vu.

[Feature M5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to the feature M4.
The control means provides the effect executing means with a suggestion effect suggesting to the player that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after the operation acceptance effect element has been executed a plurality of times. A game machine characterized by being executed.

According to the feature M5, since the suggestive effect is executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content can be used. It is possible to convince the player that having been executed multiple times has a special meaning.

<Characteristic N group>
The feature N group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 6 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature N1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
Acquired information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means and the predetermined privilege grant information match.
A notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game.
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
A determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information.
A production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements, and
A control means for controlling the effect execution means and
An operation acceptance means that accepts input operations by the player,
In a game machine equipped with
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is used as the effect execution means by the time the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. It is to be executed multiple times,
When the operation acceptance effect element including the content suggesting the acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As a control for causing the effect executing means to execute the operation acceptance effect element.
The effect executing means executes a first effect mode in which the effect executing means displays a predetermined parameter that changes in a certain direction with the passage of time, and includes a content suggesting that the player accepts the input operation. Let me
A gaming machine characterized in that, after the parameters satisfy a predetermined parameter condition, the effect executing means is made to execute a second effect mode different from the first effect mode.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

According to the feature N1, after the first effect mode is executed, the parameters satisfy a predetermined parameter condition regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, and the second effect mode is executed. Therefore, even when the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation acceptance effect element executed the first time and the second and subsequent times can be the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a déjà vu that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

A player who recognizes the déjà vu has a feeling of expectation that the déjà vu may have a special meaning, for example, a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element having the same content is executed multiple times, the effect element is expected to be executed multiple times with the same content. Every time it is executed, he always pays attention to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements to be executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

[Feature N2]
The gaming machine described in feature N1.
The control means causes the effect executing means to execute a speed changing process for changing the changing speed of the parameters when the operation mode of the input operation accepted by the operation receiving means satisfies a predetermined operation condition. A game machine characterized by being.

According to the feature N2, the player operates the operation accepting means so that the operation mode of the input operation satisfies a predetermined operation condition in an attempt to change the change speed of the parameter. Therefore, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game.

[Feature N3]
The gaming machine described in Feature N2.
When the control means changes the parameter in a direction of decreasing with the passage of time, the decrease rate of the parameter becomes smaller as the number of the input operations received by the operation accepting means increases per unit time. In addition, the gaming machine is characterized in that the speed changing process is executed by the effect executing means.

According to the feature N3, the player operates the operation accepting means so that the number of input operations per unit time is increased in an attempt to reduce the rate of decrease of the parameters. Therefore, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game.

[Feature N4]
The gaming machine described in Feature N2.
When the control means changes the parameter in a direction of increasing with the passage of time, the increasing speed of the parameter increases as the number of the input operations received by the operation receiving means per unit time increases. In addition, the gaming machine is characterized in that the speed changing process is executed by the effect executing means.

According to the feature N4, the player operates the operation accepting means so that the number of input operations per unit time is increased in order to increase the rate of increase of the parameters. Therefore, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game.

[Feature N5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features N1 to the feature N4.
The control means
When the operation acceptance effect element is executed by the effect execution means for the first time, the process of changing the parameters is memorized and the process is memorized.
A gaming machine characterized in that when the effect executing means executes the operation acceptance effect element from the second time onward, the effect executing means reproduces the process of changing the stored parameters.

According to the feature N5, in the operation acceptance effect element executed a plurality of times, the process of changing the parameters is the same, so that a stronger déjà vu can be given to the player.

[Feature N6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features N1 to N5, and further
A changing means for changing the mode of the operation accepting means to the mode when the input operation by the player is accepted is provided.
The control means
When the effect executing means executes the first operation acceptance effect element for the first time, the process of changing the mode of the operation acceptance means when the input operation is accepted is memorized, and the process is memorized.
A game characterized in that when the effect executing means executes the operation acceptance effect element from the second time onward, the change process of the memorized mode of the operation acceptance means is reproduced by the change means. Machine.

According to the feature N6, since the mode of the operation accepting means is changed, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game. Further, in the second and subsequent operation acceptance effect elements, the process of changing the mode of the operation acceptance means in the first operation acceptance effect element is reproduced, so that a stronger déjà vu can be given to the player.

[Feature N7]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature N1 to feature N6.
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information is subject to the collation.
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means is the effect executing means before the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is subject to the collation. In addition, the gaming machine is characterized in that it starts the execution of the effect element that is the object to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature N7, since the execution of the effect element to be executed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the target of the collation, a plurality of game times are performed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for déjà vu.

[Feature N8]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature N1 to feature N7.
The control means provides the effect executing means with a suggestion effect suggesting to the player that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after the operation acceptance effect element has been executed a plurality of times. A game machine characterized by being executed.

According to the feature N8, since the suggestive effect is executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content can be used. It is possible to convince the player that having been executed multiple times has a special meaning.

<Characteristic O group>
The feature O group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 7 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature O1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
Acquired information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means and the predetermined privilege grant information match.
A notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game.
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
A determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information.
A production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements, and
A control means for controlling the effect execution means and
An operation acceptance means that accepts input operations by the player,
In a game machine equipped with
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is used as the effect execution means by the time the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. It is to be executed multiple times,
When the operation acceptance effect element including the content suggesting the acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As a control for causing the effect executing means to execute the operation acceptance effect element.
After the effect executing means is made to execute the first effect mode including the content suggesting the acceptance of the input operation by the player, the operation mode of the input operation accepted by the operation accepting means satisfies a predetermined operation condition. When it is satisfied, the effect executing means is made to execute a second effect mode different from the first effect mode.
If the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition after the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means, the second effect mode is not executed by the effect execution means.
When the second effect mode is executed in all of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, or when the second effect mode is executed once in all the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times. If not executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that the effect executing means is made to execute a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation acceptance effect element has been executed a plurality of times with the same content.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

According to the feature O1, when the player performs the same input operation in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content, and the same content. It is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu that the effect element of is executed multiple times. Then, when the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content, the effect effect is executed by the effect execution means, so that the player is informed that the effect element with the same content is executed a plurality of times. In addition to being able to recognize it, it is possible to convince the player that the execution of the operation acceptance effect element having the same content multiple times has a special meaning.

Further, when the player experiences the suggestion effect after the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content, the player expects that the suggestion effect is executed, and each time the operation acceptance effect element is executed, the player expects that the suggestion effect is executed. The operation acceptance means is operated so that the operation acceptance effect mode is executed with the same contents by performing the same input operation, and the occurrence of the suggestion effect is expected. Therefore, it is possible to preferably increase the player's attention to the operation acceptance effect elements that are sequentially executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O2]
The gaming machine described in feature O1.
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, the control means executes the second effect mode on the effect execution means when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition. A game machine characterized by being something to make.

According to the feature O2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second production mode is triggered by the operation mode satisfying the predetermined operation condition. Since it is executed, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game.

[Feature O3]
The gaming machine according to feature O1 or feature O2.
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied and the operation acceptance effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element is selected.
As a control for causing the effect executing means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the effect executing means does not display a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation can be accepted. A featured game machine.

The player may perform an input operation at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect executing means, the player recognizes that the input operation is performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the same content is used. Even if the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the player may not feel a sense of déjà vu with respect to the operation acceptance effect element executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature O3, when the operation acceptance effect element is executed multiple times by the effect execution means, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect execution means, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling déjà vu. Can be done.

[Feature O4]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature O1 to feature O3.
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information is subject to the collation.
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means is the effect executing means before the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is subject to the collation. In addition, the gaming machine is characterized in that it starts the execution of the effect element that is the object to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature O4, the execution of the effect element, which is the target to be executed a plurality of times, is started before the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the target of the collation. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for déjà vu.

<Characteristic P group>
The feature P group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 8 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature P1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
Acquired information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means and the predetermined privilege grant information match.
A notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game.
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
A determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information.
A production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements, and
A control means for controlling the effect execution means and
An operation acceptance means that accepts input operations by the player,
In a game machine equipped with
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is used as the effect execution means by the time the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. It is to be executed multiple times,
When the operation acceptance effect element including the content suggesting the acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As a control for causing the effect executing means to execute the operation acceptance effect element.
After the effect executing means is made to execute the first effect mode including the content suggesting the acceptance of the input operation by the player, the operation mode of the input operation accepted by the operation accepting means satisfies a predetermined operation condition. When it is satisfied, the effect executing means is made to execute a second effect mode different from the first effect mode.
If the operation mode does not satisfy a predetermined operation condition after the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means, a third effect mode different from the first and second effect modes is achieved. Is to be executed by the effect executing means.
When the second effect mode is executed in all of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, or the third effect mode is executed in all of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times. in case of,
A gaming machine characterized in that the effect executing means is made to execute a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation acceptance effect element has been executed a plurality of times with the same content.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

According to the feature P1, when the player performs the same input operation in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content, and the same content. It is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu that the effect element of is executed multiple times. Then, when the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content, the effect effect is executed by the effect execution means, so that the player is informed that the effect element with the same content is executed a plurality of times. In addition to being able to recognize it, it is possible to convince the player that the execution of the operation acceptance effect element having the same content multiple times has a special meaning.

Further, when the player experiences the suggestion effect after the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content, the player expects that the suggestion effect is executed, and each time the operation acceptance effect element is executed, the player expects that the suggestion effect is executed. The operation acceptance means is operated so that the operation acceptance effect mode is executed with the same contents by performing the same input operation, and the occurrence of the suggestion effect is expected.
Therefore, it is possible to preferably increase the player's attention to the operation acceptance effect elements that are sequentially executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature P2]
The gaming machine described in feature P1.
The control means
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, the effect execution means is made to execute the second effect mode when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition.
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the effect execution means is made to execute the third effect mode when the predetermined time elapses. A game machine to be.

According to the feature P2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second production mode is triggered by the operation mode satisfying the predetermined operation condition. Since it is executed, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, even when the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the third effect mode can be executed when the predetermined time elapses. .. Further, even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the third effect mode is executed, so that the game can be given unexpectedness. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature P3]
The gaming machine according to feature P1 or feature P2.
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied and the operation acceptance effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element is selected.
As a control for causing the effect executing means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the effect executing means does not display a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation can be accepted. A featured game machine.

The player may perform an input operation at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect executing means, the player recognizes that the input operation is performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the same content is used. Even if the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the player may not feel a sense of déjà vu with respect to the operation acceptance effect element executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature P3, when the operation acceptance effect element is executed by the effect execution means a plurality of times, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect execution means, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling déjà vu. Can be done.

[Feature P4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature P1 to the feature P3.
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information is subject to the collation.
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means is the effect executing means before the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is subject to the collation. In addition, the gaming machine is characterized in that it starts the execution of the effect element that is the object to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature P4, the execution of the effect element, which is the target to be executed a plurality of times, is started before the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is the target of the collation. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for déjà vu.

<Characteristic Q group>
The feature Q group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth and ninth embodiments.

[Feature Q1]
Launch means for launching a game ball (game ball launch mechanism 81) and
A ball entry portion (second starting port 208a in the eighth embodiment, second starting port 308a in the ninth embodiment) through which the launched game ball can enter.
A passing portion through which the launched game ball can pass (through gate 206 in the eighth embodiment, through gate 306 in the ninth embodiment),
The state of the ball entry portion is the first state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter the ball entry portion, and the game ball can or easily enter the ball entry portion. A state transition means (opening / closing door 208b in the eighth embodiment, opening / closing door 308b in the ninth embodiment) for transitioning between the second state and the state.
Distributing means for distributing the reached game balls to a plurality of paths (alternate distribution mechanism 204 in the eighth embodiment, first alternating distribution mechanism 304 and second alternate distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment), and
A first route (route R1 in the eighth embodiment, route R11 in the ninth embodiment) configured so that the distributed game balls can pass through the passing portion, and
A second path (path R2 in the eighth embodiment, path R2 and path R12 in the ninth embodiment) configured so that the distributed game ball cannot pass through the passing portion.
With
The sorting means
While distributing the reached game ball to the first path,
A game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the first route is distributed to the second route.
The game ball that arrives after the game ball that is distributed to the second path is configured to be distributed to the first path.
The first path and the second path are such that the distributed game ball can enter the ball entry portion when the ball entry portion is in the second state. A game machine characterized by being configured.

According to the feature Q1, the game ball distributed to the first path (hereinafter, also referred to as the first game ball) can pass through the passing portion and the entry portion is in the second state. In some cases, it is possible to enter the ball into the ball entry section. On the other hand, the game ball that arrives after the first game ball (hereinafter, also referred to as the second game ball) is distributed to the second path, so that it is impossible to pass through the passing portion and the ball enters. When the portion is in the second state, it is possible to enter the ball into the ball entry portion. That is, of the first and second game balls, only the first game ball can pass through the passing portion, and whether each of the first and second game balls enters the entry portion. Whether or not it depends on whether or not the first and second game balls are in the second state at the timing when they reach the entry portion. Therefore, of the two game balls (the first game ball and the second game ball), the number of game balls that may pass through the passing portion is set to one, and the game enters the entry portion. Since the number of balls can be changed depending on the state of the ball entry portion, the game can be diversified.

For example, the length of time that the ball entry portion maintains the second state after transitioning from the first state to the second state, and the number of times the ball entry section transitions from the first state to the second state. When the timing at which the ball entry section transitions from the first state to the second state is controlled so as to be different for each mode, the ball entry section of the first and second game balls is used. Since the number of game balls to be entered in the game can be made different for each mode, it is possible to diversify the game.

[Feature Q2]
The gaming machine described in feature Q1.
A lottery execution means (process shown in step S4509 of FIG. 76) for executing a lottery when the game ball passes through the passing portion, and
A control means (processes shown in FIGS. 76, 77, 83) for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery, and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature Q2, the control means controls the state transition means based on the result of the lottery executed when the game ball passes through the passing portion. Since the second game ball does not pass through the passing portion, the control means can use the first and second game balls in a situation where the game ball is continuously fired by the launching means at a predetermined firing intensity at a predetermined interval. Whether the state of the ball entry portion at the timing when each of the balls reaches the ball entry section is the first state or the second state, that is, each of the first and second game balls is set as the ball entry section. Whether or not to enter the ball is determined by the result of a lottery executed when the first game ball passes through the passing portion and the mode of control of the state transition means by the control means. Therefore, one game ball (first game ball) controls whether or not each of the two game balls (the first game ball and the second game ball) is allowed to enter the ball entry portion. It can be realized by a series of control triggered by passing through the passing portion.

[Feature Q3]
The gaming machine described in feature Q2,
The control means has a plurality of control modes (first and second high-frequency support modes in the eighth embodiment, first to third high-frequency support modes in the ninth embodiment) for controlling the state transition means. And
For each control mode, the time length for maintaining the second state after the ball entering portion transitions from the first state to the second state, after the game ball has passed through the passing portion. The time length until the ball entry portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state, the number of times the ball entry portion transitions from the first state to the second state, and so on. A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of the timings at which the ball entry portion transitions from the first state to the second state is different.

According to the feature Q3, the number of game balls entering the entry portion of the two game balls (first game ball and second game ball) can be made different for each control mode. Because it can be done, it is possible to diversify the game.

[Feature Q4]
The gaming machine according to feature Q2 or feature Q3.
A display means (general drawing unit 38) for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is provided.
The time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion until the result of the lottery executed when the game ball passes through the passing portion is displayed by the display means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion to when the game ball reaches the entering portion is set to be shorter than the time.

According to the feature Q4, the display means can display the result of the lottery before the timing when the first game ball that has passed through the passing portion and triggered the lottery reaches the entering portion. .. Since the control means starts control based on the result of the lottery after the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means, the first game ball that has passed through the passing portion and triggered the lottery is the entry portion. The control based on the result of the lottery can be started before the timing of reaching.

For example, the control means can realize a control mode in which the entry portion is in the second state at the timing when the first game ball that has passed through the passing portion reaches the entry portion.

[Feature Q5]
The gaming machine described in feature Q4.
After the game ball has passed the passing portion, the result of the lottery executed when the game ball has passed the passing portion is displayed by the display means, and the ball entry portion is in the second state. The time it takes to start the transition to
A gaming machine characterized in that the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion to when the game ball reaches the entering portion is set to be shorter than the time.

According to the feature Q5, the control means can realize a control mode in which the first game ball that has passed through the passing portion reaches the entry portion, and the entry portion is in the second state. Become.

[Feature Q6]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature Q2 to feature Q5.
The control means has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means, and the control means includes a plurality of control modes.
In a situation where the game ball is continuously launched by the launching means at a predetermined firing intensity at a predetermined interval, the game ball distributed to the first path and passing through the passing portion reaches the entering portion. At the timing, the ball entering portion is in the second state, and at the timing when the game ball distributed to the second path reaches the ball entering portion, the ball entering portion is in the first state. Control mode (first high-frequency support mode in the eighth embodiment) and
In a situation where the game ball is continuously launched by the launching means at a predetermined firing intensity at a predetermined interval, the game ball distributed to the first path and passing through the passing portion reaches the entering portion. At the timing, the ball entering portion is in the second state, and at the timing when the game ball distributed to the second path reaches the ball entering portion, the ball entering portion is in the second state. Control mode (second high frequency support mode in the eighth embodiment) and
A game machine characterized by having.

According to the feature Q6, the first game ball enters the ball entry section, but the second game ball does not enter the ball entry section. The first control mode, the first game ball, and the second game ball. Since it is possible to realize a second control mode in which both of the game balls enter the ball entry portion, it is possible to add intonation to the game and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature Q7]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature Q1 to feature Q5.
The sorting means
The one game ball that has arrived is distributed to the first path (path R11 in the ninth embodiment), and at the same time, it is distributed.
N number of game balls (N is an integer of 2 or more) arriving after the game balls distributed to the first route are distributed to the second route (path R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment).
A game machine characterized in that one game ball arriving after the N game balls distributed to the second path is distributed to the first path.

According to the feature Q7, since one game ball is distributed to the first path and N game balls are distributed to the second path, each of the (N + 1) game balls is entered. Control of whether or not to enter the unit can be realized by a series of controls triggered by the passage of one game ball (first game ball) through the passing unit. As a result, the game can be diversified. For example, if the number of game balls entering the entry portion of the (N + 1) game balls is different for each control mode, various controls with different numbers of game balls entering the entry portion. It is possible to realize the mode.

[Feature Q8]
The gaming machine described in feature Q7.
A lottery execution means for executing a lottery when the game ball passes through the passing portion, and
A display means for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means, and
A control means that controls the state transition means based on the result of the lottery, and
With
The control means has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means, and the control means includes a plurality of control modes.
In a situation where the game balls are continuously launched by the launching means at a predetermined firing intensity at a predetermined interval, one game ball distributed to the first path and passing through the passing portion is said to enter the ball. The ball entry portion is in the second state at the timing of reaching the portion, and the ball entry portion is said to be in the second state at all timings when the N game balls distributed to the second path reach the ball entry portion. The first control mode (first high-frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment), which is the first state, and
In a situation where the game balls are continuously launched by the launching means at a predetermined firing intensity at a predetermined interval, one game ball distributed to the first path and passing through the passing portion is said to enter the ball. At the timing of reaching the entry portion, the entry portion is in the second state, and at least one of the N game balls distributed to the second path reaches the entry portion. In the second control mode (second high-frequency support mode and third high-frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) in which the ball entry portion is in the second state,
A game machine characterized by having.

According to the feature Q8, the first control mode in which the first game ball enters the entry section but N game balls do not enter the entry section, and the first game ball enters the entry section. Since at least one of the N game balls that have entered the ball can realize a second control mode in which the ball enters the entry portion, the game can be given intonation, and the game can be played. It is possible to improve the interest of.

[Feature Q9]
The gaming machine according to feature Q7 or feature Q8.
The second route is composed of N routes (path R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment).
The distribution means includes an alternating distribution mechanism (first alternating distribution mechanism 304 and second alternating distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) that alternately distributes the game ball to any one of the two paths. A game machine characterized by being configured by being combined in multiple stages.

According to the feature Q9, the function of distributing one arrived game ball to the first path and distributing N game balls arriving after the game ball distributed to the first path to the second path is electronic. It can be realized by a simple configuration as compared with the configuration realized by using control or the like. As a configuration for realizing the function by using electronic control or the like, for example, the number of reached game balls is measured by using a counter or the like, and a game ball is used by using a structure or the like driven by an electric force. Can be mentioned as a configuration for distributing.

[Feature Q10]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature Q1 to feature Q9.
A third path (path R2 in Example 1 and Example 4 of FIG. 84) configured so that the distributed game ball cannot pass through the passing portion is provided.
The sorting means
The one game ball that has arrived is distributed to the first path (path R11 in Example 1 of FIG. 84, path R111 in Example 4 of FIG. 84), and is also distributed.
At least one of the plurality of game balls arriving after the game balls distributed to the first path is the second path (path R12 in Example 1 of FIG. 84, route R12 in Example 4 of FIG. 84). Sort to R12 and route R112),
At least one of the plurality of game balls arriving after the game ball distributed to the first path is distributed to the third path.
The game ball distributed to the second path and one game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the third path are configured to be distributed to the first path.
The third path is configured so that the distributed game ball cannot enter the ball entry portion even when the ball entry portion is in the second state. A game machine characterized by being.

According to the feature Q10, since the distributed game ball is provided with a third path configured so as to be impossible to enter the ball entry portion, the game can be further diversified. For example, if a large number of game balls are distributed to the third path, the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion can be reduced.

<Characteristic R group>
The feature R group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment.

を満たすように構成されている
ことを特徴とする遊技機。 [Feature R1]
Launch means for launching a game ball (game ball launch mechanism 81) and
A ball entry portion (second starting port 308a in the ninth embodiment) through which the launched game ball can enter, and
An execution means (main control device 60) that executes a ball entry assist mode (high frequency support mode) that assists the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out the game ball as a prize ball based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry portion.
It is a game machine equipped with
The ratio of the number of paid game balls to the number of fired game balls in a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined interval with a predetermined firing intensity by the firing means is defined as the ball ejection rate. If you do
The execution means
It is possible to execute n types of ball entry assist modes (n is an integer of 2 or more) having different ball exit rates.
As one of the n types of ball entry assist modes, at least a game ball reduction mode in which the ball exit rate is less than 1 (first high frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) and the ball exit rate are It is possible to execute more than 1 game ball increase mode (third high frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment).
The ball exit rate when the i-th (i is an integer from 1 to n) entry assist mode is executed is defined as Mi.
When the ratio of the i-th ball entry assist mode to the execution of the ball entry assist mode is defined as Pi, the ball entry assist mode is executed.
The following relational expression (R1)

A gaming machine characterized by being configured to meet the requirements.

According to the feature R1, although the game ball increase mode in which the ball exit rate exceeds 1 can be executed as one aspect of the ball entry assist mode, the total ball exit when the ball entry assist mode is executed. Since the rate is less than 1, it is possible to give the player an uplifting feeling in the game ball increase mode, and it is possible to suppress the player's gambling spirit from being excessively increased. As a result, it is possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game.

[Feature R2]
The gaming machine described in feature R1.
The executing means is capable of executing a plurality of types of game ball increasing modes (third high-frequency support mode and fourth high-frequency support mode in the modified example 5) having different ball ejection rates. ..

According to the feature R2, since a plurality of types of game ball increase modes having different ball output rates can be executed, it is possible to make a difference in the degree of uplifting feeling given to the player in the game ball increase mode. As a result, the inflection can be given to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature R3]
The gaming machine according to feature R1 or feature R2.
A passing portion through which the launched game ball can pass (through gate 306 in the ninth embodiment) and
The state of the ball entry portion is the first state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter the ball entry portion, and the game ball can or easily enter the ball entry portion. A state transition means (opening / closing door 308b in the ninth embodiment) for transitioning from the second state, which is a state, and
A lottery execution means (process shown in step S4509 of FIG. 76) for executing a lottery when the game ball passes through the passing portion, and
A control means (processes shown in FIGS. 76 and 83) that controls the state transition means based on the result of the lottery, and
Distributing means for distributing the reached game balls to a plurality of paths (first alternating distribution mechanism 304 and second alternating distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) and
It is possible that the distributed game ball can pass through the passing portion, and when the entering portion is in the second state, it is possible to enter the entering portion. The first route (route R11 in the ninth embodiment) configured in
It is impossible for the distributed game ball to pass through the passing portion, and when the entering portion is in the second state, it is possible to enter the entering portion. The second route (route R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment) configured as described above,
With
The sorting means
The one game ball that has arrived is distributed to the first path, and at the same time, it is distributed.
N game balls arriving after the game balls distributed to the first path are distributed to the second path.
It is configured to distribute one game ball arriving after the N game balls distributed to the second path to the first path.
The control means has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means, and the game ball increase mode is obtained by executing one of the plurality of control modes by the control means. It is a mode that is realized,
The game ball reduction mode is a mode realized by executing another control mode among the plurality of control modes by the control means.

According to the feature R3, one game ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a first game ball) distributed to the first path can pass through the passing portion and the entry portion is the second. In the case of the above state, it is possible to enter the ball into the ball entry portion. On the other hand, since the N game balls arriving after the first game ball are distributed to the second path, it is impossible to pass through the passing portion and the entry portion is in the second state. In that case, it is possible to enter the ball into the ball entry section. That is, of the first game ball and N game balls, only the first game ball can pass through the passing portion, and each of the first game ball and N game balls. Whether or not the game ball enters the entry section depends on whether or not the entry section reaches the entry section when each of the first game ball and the N game balls reaches the entry section. It depends on whether it is in a state or not.

Since the N game balls arriving after the first game ball do not pass through the passing portion, the control means is used in a situation where the game balls are continuously fired by the launching means at a predetermined firing intensity at a predetermined interval. , Whether the state of the entry portion at the timing when each of the first game ball and the N game balls reaches the entry portion is the first state or the second state. That is, whether or not to allow each of the first game ball and the N game balls to enter the entry portion is executed when the first game ball passes through the passing portion. It is determined by the result of the lottery and the control mode of the state transition means set for each control mode. Therefore, the control of whether or not each of the (N + 1) game balls is allowed to enter the entry portion is triggered by the fact that one game ball (first game ball) has passed through the passing portion. It can be realized by a series of controls.

Further, according to the feature R3, the time length for maintaining the second state after the entry portion transitions from the first state to the second state, and the time length for the entry portion to maintain the second state from the first state to the second state. When the number of transitions to the state, the timing at which the ball entry unit transitions from the first state to the second state, etc. are controlled so as to be different for each control mode, (N + 1) game balls Since the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion can be made different for each control mode, the ball ejection rate in each control mode can be set to a different value.

[Feature R4]
Feature The game machine described in R3.
The control means is used as the plurality of control modes.
In a situation where the game balls are continuously launched by the launching means at a predetermined firing intensity at a predetermined interval, one game ball distributed to the first path and passing through the passing portion is said to enter the ball. The ball entry portion is in the second state at the timing of reaching the portion, and the ball entry portion is said to be in the second state at all timings when the N game balls distributed to the second path reach the ball entry portion. The first control mode (first high-frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment), which is the first state, and
In a situation where the game balls are continuously launched by the launching means at a predetermined firing intensity at a predetermined interval, one game ball distributed to the first path and passing through the passing portion is said to enter the ball. At the timing of reaching the entry portion, the entry portion is in the second state, and at least one of the N game balls distributed to the second path reaches the entry portion. In the second control mode (second high-frequency support mode and third high-frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) in which the ball entry portion is in the second state,
Have,
The game ball increase mode is a mode realized by executing the second control mode by the control means.
The game ball reduction mode is a mode realized by executing the first control mode by the control means.

According to the feature R4, the first game ball enters the entry section, but N game balls do not enter the entry section, and the first game ball enters the entry section. Since at least one of the N game balls can be realized as a game ball increase mode in which the ball enters the entry portion, an intonation can be given to the game, and the interest of the game can be realized. It can be improved.

<Characteristic S group>
The feature S group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment.

[Feature S1]
Launch means for launching a game ball (game ball launch mechanism 81) and
Distributing means for distributing the reached game balls to a plurality of paths (first alternating distribution mechanism 304 and second alternating distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) and
With
The sorting means
The one game ball that has arrived is distributed to the first path (path R11 in the ninth embodiment), and at the same time, it is distributed.
A second route (route in the ninth embodiment) in which N game balls (N is an integer of 2 or more) arriving after the game balls distributed to the first route are different from the first route. Sort to R2 and route R12),
A game machine characterized in that one game ball arriving after the N game balls distributed to the second path is distributed to the first path.

According to the feature S1, one of the (N + 1) game balls (hereinafter, also referred to as the first game ball) is distributed to the first path, and N that arrives after the first game ball. Since individual game balls can be distributed to the second route, the game can be diversified by effectively using the first route and the second route, and the interest of the game can be improved. be able to.

For example, in the case where a ball entry portion where the game ball can enter or a predetermined accessory is provided at a position where only the first game ball distributed to the first path can reach, (N + 1). Of the individual game balls, only the first game ball reaches the entry section or the predetermined accessory, and N game balls that arrive after the first game ball become the entry section or the predetermined accessory. It is possible not to reach it. Further, by setting the value of N (the number of game balls distributed to the second path) to a desired value at the time of designing the game machine, the ratio of the game balls reaching the entry portion or the predetermined accessory can be set. It can be set to a desired ratio. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the game machine and to diversify the game.

[Feature S2]
The gaming machine described in feature S1.
A passing portion (through gate 306 in the ninth embodiment) through which the game ball can pass is provided.
The first route is configured so that the game balls allocated to the first route can pass through the passing portion.
The second path is a game machine characterized in that the game balls allocated to the second path are configured so as to be unable to pass through the passing portion.

According to the feature S2, only the first game ball out of the (N + 1) game balls can pass through the passing portion. Therefore, when a predetermined process is executed when the game ball passes through the passing portion, the predetermined process is performed by 1 each time (N + 1) game balls reach the distribution means. It can be executed at a rate of times.

For example, in the case where a predetermined lottery is executed when the game ball passes through the passing portion, the predetermined lottery is performed every time (N + 1) number of game balls reach the distribution means. It will be executed at the rate of times. Further, at the time of designing the game machine, by setting the value of N (the number of game balls distributed to the second path) to a desired value, the frequency at which the predetermined lottery is executed is set to the desired frequency. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the game machine and to diversify the game.

[Feature S3]
The gaming machine described in feature S2.
A ball entry portion (second starting port 308a in the ninth embodiment) through which the launched game ball can enter, and
The state of the ball entry portion is the first state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter the ball entry portion, and the game ball can or easily enter the ball entry portion. A state transition means (opening / closing door 308b in the ninth embodiment) for transitioning from the second state, which is a state, and
With
The first path and the second path are such that the distributed game ball can enter the ball entry portion when the ball entry portion is in the second state. A game machine characterized by being configured.

According to the feature S3, the first game ball distributed to the first path can pass through the passing portion, and when the entering portion is in the second state, the entering portion is concerned. It becomes possible to enter the ball. On the other hand, since the N game balls arriving after the first game ball are distributed to the second path, it is impossible to pass through the passing portion and the entry portion is in the second state. In that case, it is possible to enter the ball into the ball entry section. That is, of the first game ball and N game balls, only the first game ball can pass through the passing portion, and each of the first game ball and N game balls. Whether or not the game ball enters the entry section depends on whether or not the entry section reaches the entry section when each of the first game ball and the N game balls reaches the entry section. It depends on whether it is in a state or not. Therefore, out of the (N + 1) number of game balls, the number of game balls that may pass through the passing portion is set to one, and the number of game balls that enter the entry portion is set to the state of the entry portion. Since it can be changed depending on it, it is possible to diversify the game.

For example, the length of time that the ball entry portion maintains the second state after transitioning from the first state to the second state, and the number of times the ball entry section transitions from the first state to the second state. When the timing of transition from the first state to the second state of the ball entry section is controlled so as to be different for each mode, the entry section of the (N + 1) game balls is used. Since the number of game balls to be entered can be made different for each mode, it is possible to diversify the game.

[Feature S4]
The gaming machine described in feature S3.
A lottery execution means (process shown in step S4509 of FIG. 76) for executing a lottery when the game ball passes through the passing portion, and
A control means (processes shown in FIGS. 76 and 83) that controls the state transition means based on the result of the lottery, and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature S4, the control means controls the state transition means based on the result of the lottery executed when the game ball passes through the passing portion. Since the N game balls arriving after the first game ball do not pass through the passing portion, the control means is used in a situation where the game balls are continuously fired by the launching means at a predetermined firing intensity at a predetermined interval. , Whether the state of the entry portion at the timing when each of the first game ball and the N game balls reaches the entry portion is the first state or the second state. That is, whether or not to allow each of the first game ball and the N game balls to enter the entry portion is executed when the first game ball passes through the passing portion. It is determined by the result of the lottery and the mode of control of the state transition means by the control means. Therefore, the control of whether or not each of the (N + 1) game balls is allowed to enter the entry portion is triggered by the fact that one game ball (first game ball) has passed through the passing portion. It can be realized by a series of controls.

[Feature S5]
The gaming machine described in the feature S4.
The control means has a plurality of control modes (first to third high-frequency support modes in the ninth embodiment) for controlling the state transition means.
For each control mode, the time length for maintaining the second state after the ball entering portion transitions from the first state to the second state, after the game ball has passed through the passing portion. The time length until the ball entry portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state, the number of times the ball entry portion transitions from the first state to the second state, and so on. A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of the timings at which the ball entry portion transitions from the first state to the second state is different.

According to the feature S5, the number of game balls entering the entry portion of the (N + 1) game balls can be made different for each control mode, so that the game can be diversified. it can.

[Feature S6]
The gaming machine described in feature S5.
A display means (general drawing unit 38) for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means is provided.
The time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion until the result of the lottery executed when the game ball passes through the passing portion is displayed by the display means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion to when the game ball reaches the entering portion is set to be shorter than the time.

According to the feature S6, the display means can display the result of the lottery before the timing when the first game ball that has passed through the passing portion and triggered the lottery reaches the entering portion. .. Since the control means starts control based on the result of the lottery after the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means, the first game ball that has passed through the passing portion and triggered the lottery is the entry portion. The control based on the result of the lottery can be started before the timing of reaching.

For example, the control means can realize a control mode in which the entry portion is in the second state at the timing when the first game ball that has passed through the passing portion reaches the entry portion.

[Feature S7]
The gaming machine described in feature S7.
After the game ball has passed the passing portion, the result of the lottery executed when the game ball has passed the passing portion is displayed by the display means, and the ball entry portion is in the second state. The time it takes to start the transition to
A gaming machine characterized in that the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion to when the game ball reaches the entering portion is set to be shorter than the time.

According to the feature S7, the control means can realize a control mode in which the first game ball that has passed through the passing portion reaches the entry portion, and the entry portion is in the second state. Become.

[Feature S8]
The gaming machine described in feature S7.
The control means has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means, and the control means includes a plurality of control modes.
In a situation where the game balls are continuously launched by the launching means at a predetermined firing intensity at a predetermined interval, one game ball distributed to the first path and passing through the passing portion is said to enter the ball. The ball entry portion is in the second state at the timing of reaching the portion, and the ball entry portion is said to be in the second state at all timings when the N game balls distributed to the second path reach the ball entry portion. The first control mode (first high-frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment), which is the first state, and
In a situation where the game balls are continuously launched by the launching means at a predetermined firing intensity at a predetermined interval, one game ball distributed to the first path and passing through the passing portion is said to enter the ball. At the timing of reaching the entry portion, the entry portion is in the second state, and at least one of the N game balls distributed to the second path reaches the entry portion. In the second control mode (second high-frequency support mode and third high-frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) in which the ball entry portion is in the second state,
A game machine characterized by having.

According to the feature S8, the first control mode in which the first game ball enters the ball entry section but N game balls do not enter the ball entry section, and the first game ball enters the ball entry section. Since at least one of the N game balls that have entered the ball can realize a second control mode in which the ball enters the entry portion, the game can be given intonation, and the game can be played. It is possible to improve the interest of.

[Feature S9]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features S1 to S8.
The second route is composed of a plurality of routes (path R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment).
The distribution means includes an alternating distribution mechanism (first alternating distribution mechanism 304 and second alternating distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) that alternately distributes the game ball to any one of the two paths. A game machine characterized by being configured by being combined in multiple stages.

According to the feature S9, the function of distributing one arrived game ball to the first path and distributing N game balls arriving after the game ball distributed to the first path to the second path is electronically provided. It can be realized by a simple configuration as compared with the configuration realized by using control or the like. As a configuration for realizing the function by using electronic control or the like, for example, the number of reached game balls is measured by using a counter or the like, and a game ball is used by using a structure or the like driven by an electric force. Can be mentioned as a configuration for distributing.

[Feature S10]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features S1 to S9.
A third path (path R2 in Example 4 of FIG. 84) configured so that the distributed game ball cannot pass through the passing portion is provided.
The sorting means
The one game ball that has arrived is distributed to the first path (path R111 in Example 4 of FIG. 84), and at the same time.
At least N of the plurality of game balls arriving after the game balls distributed to the first path are distributed to the second path (path R12 and path R112 in Example 4 of FIG. 84).
At least one of the plurality of game balls arriving after the game ball distributed to the first path is distributed to the third path.
The game ball distributed to the second path and one game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the third path are configured to be distributed to the first path.
The third path is configured so that the distributed game ball cannot enter the ball entry portion even when the ball entry portion is in the second state. A game machine characterized by being.

According to the feature S10, since the distributed game ball is provided with a third path configured so as to be impossible to enter the ball entry portion, the game can be further diversified. For example, if a large number of game balls are distributed to the third path, the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion can be reduced.

<Characteristic T group>
The feature T group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment.

[Feature T1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area, and
A ball entry portion (second starting port 208a in the tenth embodiment) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter, and
A passing portion (through gate 206 in the tenth embodiment) through which a game ball circulating in the game area can pass, and
The state of the ball entry portion is the first state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter the ball entry portion, and the game ball can or easily enter the ball entry portion. A state transition means (opening / closing door 208b in the tenth embodiment) for transitioning from the second state, which is a state, and
A control means for controlling the state transition means when the game ball passes through the passing portion, and a control means for controlling the state transition means.
With
The control means
Based on the game state (in the tenth embodiment, the result of the electric accessory opening lottery and the type of support mode)
The transition start waiting time, which is the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion to when the entering portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (usually in the tenth embodiment). The length of the fluctuation time of the unit 38 + the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b) can be set to a plurality of types of lengths.
In a situation where the game ball is continuously launched by the launching means at a predetermined firing intensity at a predetermined interval, 1.2 after the game ball GB1 has passed through the through gate 206 for a predetermined time (in the tenth embodiment, the game ball GB1 has passed through the through gate 206). A gaming machine characterized in that the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion per second (FIG. 87, 89) differs depending on the length of the transition start waiting time set by the control means.

According to the feature T1, since the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion can be changed by changing the transition start waiting time, it is possible to add intonation to the game and improve the interest of the game. be able to. Further, according to the feature T1, for example, even when the time for the ball entry portion to maintain the second state (the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b in the tenth embodiment) is set to the same length, the transition occurs. By changing the length of the start waiting time, the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion can be changed, so that the degree of freedom in designing the game machine can be improved.

[Feature T2]
Feature The game machine described in T1.
A lottery execution means (process shown in step S5109 of FIG. 91) for executing a lottery when the game ball passes through the passing portion, and
A display means (general drawing unit 38) for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means, and
With
The control means
Based on the game state (result of the electric accessory opening lottery in the tenth embodiment)
The time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the ball entry portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (opening of the opening / closing door 208b in the tenth embodiment). A gaming machine characterized in that the length of (standby time) can be set to a plurality of types of lengths.

According to the feature T2, the transition start waiting time (variation time of the normal drawing unit 38 + opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) is from the time when the game ball passes through the passing portion until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means. Time (variation time of the normal drawing unit 38) and the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the entry portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (opening / closing door 208b). It is the total time of the opening waiting time). Therefore, according to the feature T2, when the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means (variable time of the normal drawing unit 38) is set to the same length. Even if there are, there are multiple types of time (opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b) from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the entry portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state. By setting the length, the transition start waiting time (variation time of the normal drawing unit 38 + opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) can be set to a plurality of types of lengths. That is, according to the feature T2, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the entry portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b). By changing, the transition start waiting time (variation time of the normal drawing unit 38 + opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) can be changed, and the number of game balls entering the entry portion can be changed. Can be done.

[Feature T3]
The gaming machine according to feature T1 or feature T2.
The ball entry portion is configured so that a game ball that has passed through the passing portion can enter the ball in the second state.
The control means
The time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion until the result of the lottery executed when the game ball passes through the passing portion is displayed by the display means (variation of the normal drawing unit 38). Time,
The time is set to be shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion to when the game ball reaches the entering portion.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the feature T3, the display means can display the result of the lottery before the timing when the game ball that has passed through the passing portion and triggered the lottery reaches the entering portion. As a result, the control means is the ball entry section after the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means and before the timing when the game ball that has passed through the passing section and triggered the lottery reaches the ball entry section. It becomes possible to execute the control for initiating the transition from the first state to the second state. Therefore, the game ball that triggered the transition of the ball entry section to the second state (the game ball that passed through the passing section and triggered the lottery) is entered into the ball entry section that has transitioned to the second state. It becomes possible to make it.

[Feature T4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features T1 to T3.
The ball entry portion is configured so that a game ball that has passed through the passing portion can enter the ball entry portion when the ball entry portion is in the second state.
The control means
The transition start waiting time, which is the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion to when the entering portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (usually in the tenth embodiment). The first variation time of the unit 38 + the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b) is set to a time shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion to when the game ball reaches the entering portion. Control and
The transition start waiting time, which is the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion to when the entering portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (usually in the tenth embodiment). The second variation time of the unit 38 + the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b) is set to a time longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion to when the game ball reaches the entering portion. Control and
A game machine characterized by being able to execute.

According to the feature T4, when the first control is executed, the entry portion transitions to the second state at the timing when the game ball passing through the passing portion reaches the entry portion, so that the passing portion The game ball that has passed through the ball enters the ball entry section, while when the second control is executed, the ball entry section is still at the timing when the game ball that has passed through the pass section reaches the ball entry section. Since the state of 2 has not been transitioned, the game ball that has passed through the passing portion does not enter the entering portion. That is, according to the feature T4, since the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion can be changed by changing the transition start waiting time, it is possible to add intonation to the game and improve the interest of the game. Can be planned.

[Feature T5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features T1 to T4.
A distribution means (alternate distribution mechanism 204 in the tenth embodiment) for distributing the reached game ball to a plurality of routes, and
A first path (path R1 in the tenth embodiment) configured so that the distributed game ball can pass through the passing portion, and
A second path (path R2 in the tenth embodiment) configured so that the distributed game ball cannot pass through the passing portion, and
With
The sorting means
While distributing the reached game ball to the first path,
A game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the first route is distributed to the second route.
The game ball that arrives after the game ball that is distributed to the second path is configured to be distributed to the first path.
The first path and the second path are such that the distributed game ball can enter the ball entry portion when the ball entry portion is in the second state. A game machine characterized by being configured.

According to the feature T5, the game ball distributed to the first path (hereinafter, also referred to as the first game ball) can pass through the passing portion and the entry portion is in the second state. In some cases, it is possible to enter the ball into the ball entry section. On the other hand, the game ball that arrives after the first game ball (hereinafter, also referred to as the second game ball) is distributed to the second path, so that it is impossible to pass through the passing portion and the ball enters. When the portion is in the second state, it is possible to enter the ball into the ball entry portion. That is, of the first and second game balls, only the first game ball can pass through the passing portion, and whether each of the first and second game balls enters the entry portion. Whether or not it depends on whether or not the first and second game balls are in the second state at the timing when they reach the entry portion. Therefore, of the two game balls (the first game ball and the second game ball), the number of game balls that may pass through the passing portion is set to one, and the game enters the entry portion. The number of balls can be changed depending on the state of the ball entry portion. Then, one game ball (first game ball) controls whether or not each of the two game balls (the first game ball and the second game ball) is allowed to enter the ball entry portion. It can be realized by a series of control triggered by passing through the passing portion.

Further, according to the feature T5, the transition start waiting time can be set to a plurality of types of lengths when the first game ball passes through the passing portion. Therefore, for example, two game balls (the first). Control when the transition start waiting time at which both the first game ball and the second game ball) will enter the ball entry portion is set (control when the first type electric service opening is won in the tenth embodiment). (FIG. 87)) The transition start waiting time is set so that only the second game ball out of the two game balls (the first game ball and the second game ball) enters the entry portion. (Control when the second type electric service opening is won in the tenth embodiment (FIG. 89)). That is, according to the feature T5, the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion can be changed by changing the length of the transition start waiting time, so that intonation can be added to the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Feature T6]
Feature The game machine described in T5.
The sorting means
The one game ball that has arrived is distributed to the first path (path R11 in the ninth embodiment), and at the same time, it is distributed.
N number of game balls (N is an integer of 2 or more) arriving after the game balls distributed to the first route are distributed to the second route (path R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment).
A game machine characterized in that one game ball arriving after the N game balls distributed to the second path is distributed to the first path.

According to the feature T6, one game ball is distributed to the first path and N game balls are distributed to the second path, so that each of the (N + 1) game balls is entered. Control of whether or not to enter the unit can be realized by a series of controls triggered by the passage of one game ball (first game ball) through the passing unit. Further, according to the feature T6, the transition start waiting time can be set to a plurality of types of lengths when the first game ball passes through the passing portion. That is, according to the feature T6, by changing the length of the transition start waiting time, the number of game balls entering the entry portion of the (N + 1) game balls can be changed. Inflection can be added to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature T7]
Feature The game machine described in T6.
The second route is composed of N routes (path R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment).
The distribution means includes an alternating distribution mechanism (first alternating distribution mechanism 304 and second alternating distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) that alternately distributes the game ball to any one of the two paths. A game machine characterized by being configured by being combined in multiple stages.

According to the feature T7, the function of distributing one arrived game ball to the first path and distributing N game balls arriving after the game ball distributed to the first path to the second path is electronic. It can be realized by a simple configuration as compared with the configuration realized by using control or the like. As a configuration for realizing the function by using electronic control or the like, for example, the number of reached game balls is measured by using a counter or the like, and a game ball is used by using a structure or the like driven by an electric force. Can be mentioned as a configuration for distributing.

[Feature T8]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features T5 to T7.
A third path (path R2 in Example 1 and Example 4 of FIG. 84) configured so that the distributed game ball cannot pass through the passing portion is provided.
The sorting means
The one game ball that has arrived is distributed to the first path (path R11 in Example 1 of FIG. 84, path R111 in Example 4 of FIG. 84), and is also distributed.
At least one of the plurality of game balls arriving after the game balls distributed to the first path is the second path (path R12 in Example 1 of FIG. 84, route R12 in Example 4 of FIG. 84). Sort to R12 and route R112),
At least one of the plurality of game balls arriving after the game ball distributed to the first path is distributed to the third path.
The game ball distributed to the second path and one game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the third path are configured to be distributed to the first path.
The third path is configured so that the distributed game ball cannot enter the ball entry portion even when the ball entry portion is in the second state. A game machine characterized by being.

According to the feature T8, since the distributed game ball is provided with a third path configured so as to be impossible to enter the ball entry portion, the game can be further diversified. For example, if a large number of game balls are distributed to the third path, the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion can be reduced.

<Characteristic U group>
The feature U group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature U1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area, and
A ball entry portion (second starting port 208a (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter.
The state of the ball entry portion is the first state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter the ball entry portion, and the game ball can or easily enter the ball entry portion. A state transition means (opening / closing door 208b (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) for transitioning between the second state and the state.
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion.
A passing portion (through gate 206 in the eleventh embodiment) through which a game ball circulating in the game area can pass, and
A lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the passage of a game ball through the passing portion, and
A display means for starting the variable display of the identification information based on the passage of the game ball through the passing portion, ending the variable display, and stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery executing means. (Public drawing unit 38) and
A control means that controls the state transition means based on the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means, and
With
The ratio of the number of paid game balls to the number of fired game balls in a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined interval with a predetermined firing intensity by the firing means is defined as the ball ejection rate. If you do
The control means
It has a plurality of types of control modes for controlling the state transition means.
Transition start waiting time from when the display means starts the variation display until the ball entry unit starts the transition from the first state to the second state (the normal drawing unit in the eleventh embodiment). By setting the fluctuation time of 38 + the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b) to a different length for each control mode.
A first control mode in which the ball ejection rate is less than 1 (first high frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) and
A second control mode in which the ball ejection rate is 1 (second high frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) and
A third control mode in which the ball ejection rate exceeds 1 (third high frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) and
A game machine characterized by being able to execute.

According to the feature U1, by changing the transition start waiting time, the first control mode in which the ball ejection rate is less than 1, the second control mode in which the ball ejection rate is 1, and the ball ejection rate are 1. Since it is possible to execute a third control mode exceeding the above, it is possible to add intonation to the game and improve the interest of the game. Further, according to the feature U1, for example, even when the time for the ball entry portion to maintain the second state (the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) is set to the same length, the transition occurs. By changing the length of the start waiting time, the above-mentioned three control modes can be executed, so that the degree of freedom in designing the game machine can be improved.

[Feature U2]
Features The gaming machine described in U1.
Alternate distribution means (alternate distribution mechanism 204 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) that alternately distributes the reached game ball to two paths.
A first path (path R1 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) configured so that the distributed game ball can pass through the passing portion, and
A second path (path R2 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) configured so that the distributed game ball cannot pass through the passing portion, and
With
The alternating distribution means
The one game ball that has arrived is distributed to the first path, and at the same time, it is distributed.
One game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the first path is distributed to the second path.
It is configured to distribute one game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the second path to the first path.
The first path and the second path are such that the distributed game ball can enter the ball entry section when the ball entry section is in the second state. It is composed and
In a situation where the game balls are continuously launched by the launching means at a predetermined firing intensity at a predetermined interval, the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion per predetermined time is set for each control mode. A gaming machine characterized in that it differs depending on the length of the transition start waiting time.

According to the feature U2, the first control mode in which the ball ejection rate is less than 1 and the second control mode in which the ball ejection rate is 1 are provided by a simple configuration using only one alternating distribution means. It is possible to execute a third control mode in which the ball ejection rate exceeds 1. That is, since the mechanism for executing the three control modes can be realized in a space-saving manner, the game area can be effectively utilized, such as arranging other accessories in the vacant game area.

[Feature U3]
The gaming machine according to feature U1 or feature U2.
The control means
The time from when the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed until the ball entry portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (opening / closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment). The length of the opening standby time) can be set to a different length for each of the control modes.

According to the feature U3, the transition start waiting time (variation time of the normal drawing unit 38 + opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) is from the time when the game ball passes through the passing portion until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means. Time (variation time of the normal drawing unit 38) and the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the entry portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (opening / closing door 208b). It is the total time of the opening waiting time). Therefore, according to the feature U3, when the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means (variable time of the normal drawing unit 38) is set to the same length. Even if there is, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the entry portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b) is a different length. By setting to, the transition start waiting time (variation time of the normal drawing unit 38 + opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) can be set to different lengths. That is, according to the feature U3, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the entry portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b). By changing, the transition start waiting time (variation time of the normal drawing unit 38 + opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) can be changed, and the number of game balls entering the entry portion can be changed. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to realize a first control mode in which the ball ejection rate is less than 1, a second control mode in which the ball ejection rate is 1, and a third control mode in which the ball ejection rate exceeds 1. It will be possible.

<Characteristic V group>
The feature V group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature V1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area, and
A ball entry portion (second starting port 208a in the eleventh embodiment) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter.
The state of the ball entry portion is the first state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter the ball entry portion, and the game ball can or easily enter the ball entry portion. A state transition means (opening / closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) for transitioning from the second state, which is a state, and
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion.
A lottery execution means for the entry section, which executes a lottery for the entry section based on the entry of a game ball into the entry section, and a lottery execution means for the entry section.
The variation display of the identification information is started based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry section, and the variation display is finished to obtain the result of the ball entry section lottery by the ball entry section lottery executing means. A lottery result display means (special figure unit 37) for the ball entry section that stops and displays the corresponding identification information, and
A special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (opening / closing execution mode) in which a privilege is given to the player based on the result of the lottery for the ball entry section being a predetermined result (various jackpots).
A starting means for starting a high-probability lottery mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the result of the lottery for the ball entry portion will be the predetermined result (various jackpots) is improved.
The ending means for ending the high-probability lottery mode and
A passing portion (through gate 206 in the eleventh embodiment) through which a game ball circulating in the game area can pass, and
A passage portion lottery execution means for executing a passage portion lottery based on the passage of the game ball through the passage portion, and a passage portion lottery execution means.
The variation display of the identification information is started based on the passage of the game ball through the passing portion, and the variation display is ended, and the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery for the passing portion by the lottery executing means for the passing portion. The lottery result display means for the passing part (general drawing unit 38) that stops and displays
By controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery for the passing portion by the lottery executing means for the passing portion, the control means for transitioning the ball entry portion from the first state to the second state. ,
With
The ratio of the number of paid game balls to the number of fired game balls in a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined interval with a predetermined firing intensity by the firing means is defined as the ball ejection rate. If you do
The control means
It has a plurality of types of control modes for controlling the state transition means.
A first control mode in which the ball ejection rate is less than 1 (first high frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) and
A second control mode in which the ball ejection rate is 1 (second high frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) and
A third control mode in which the ball ejection rate exceeds 1 (third high frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) and
Is feasible and
In the first control mode, the result of the lottery for the ball entry portion is the first result (4R normal jackpot A (FIG. 97) in the eleventh embodiment) among the predetermined results (various jackpots). If the number of times of the lottery for the ball entry section executed after the first control mode is started is the result of the lottery for the ball entry section is the predetermined result (various jackpots). It ends based on reaching the specified number of times (100 times) without
In the second control mode, the result of the lottery for the ball entry portion is the second result (8R probability variation jackpot in the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 97)) among the predetermined results (various jackpots). It starts based on the above, and ends based on the result of the lottery for the ball entry section executed after the second control mode is started, which is the predetermined result (various jackpots).
In the third control mode, the result of the lottery for the ball entry portion is the third result (4R normal jackpot B (FIG. 97) in the eleventh embodiment) among the predetermined results (various jackpots). If the number of times of the lottery for the ball entry section executed after the third control mode is started is the result of the lottery for the ball entry section is the predetermined result (various jackpots). It ends based on reaching the specified number of times (100 times) without
The high-probability lottery mode is started based on the result of the lottery for the ball entry portion being the second result (8R probability variation jackpot) of the predetermined results, and is before the high-probability lottery mode. The feature is that the result of the lottery for the entry ball part is ended based on the first result (4R normal jackpot A) or the third result (4R normal jackpot B) among the predetermined results. A game machine to play.

According to the feature V1, when the result of the lottery for the ball entry part is the first result (4R normal jackpot A), the high probability lottery mode is not started, but the first control mode (first high frequency support mode) is set. To be started. When the first control mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the entry section is promoted, so that the execution of the lottery for the entry section is promoted. However, since the ball output rate in the first control mode is less than 1, the number of game balls held by the player decreases. The first control mode ends when the number of executions of the lottery for the ball entry section reaches a predetermined number of times (100 times) without the result of the lottery for the ball entry section becoming a predetermined result (various jackpots). Therefore, the player wants the lottery for the entry section to have a predetermined result (various jackpots) before the number of executions of the lottery for the entry section reaches the specified number and the first control mode ends. Play the game while expecting. In addition, in order to minimize the decrease in the number of game balls on hand, the player plays the game while expecting that a predetermined result (various jackpots) will be obtained in the lottery for the ball entry section as soon as possible.

Further, according to the feature V1, when the result of the lottery for the ball entry part becomes the second result (8R probability variation jackpot), the high probability lottery mode is started and the second control mode (second high frequency support mode) is started. ) Is started. When the high-probability lottery mode is started, the probability that the result of the lottery for the entry section will be a predetermined result (various jackpots) is improved. Further, when the second control mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the entry section is promoted, so that the execution of the lottery for the entry section is promoted. Since the ball output rate in the second control mode is 1, the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. Then, the high-probability lottery mode is continued until at least the result of the lottery for the entry portion becomes a predetermined result (various jackpots). In addition, the second control mode continues until the result of the lottery for the ball entry portion becomes a predetermined result (various jackpots). Therefore, the player continues the high-probability lottery mode and the second control mode until a predetermined result (various jackpots) is obtained in the lottery for the entry part, so that the result of the lottery for the entry part is the second result. The game is played while expecting that the high probability lottery mode will continue as (8R probability variation jackpot). In addition, since the number of game balls on hand does not increase or decrease, the player can concentrate his / her feelings on the type of result when the result of the lottery for the ball entry section is a predetermined result (various jackpots).

Further, according to the feature V1, when the result of the lottery for the ball entry part becomes the third result (4R normal jackpot B), the high probability lottery mode is not started, but the third control mode (third high frequency support mode). ) Is started. When the third control mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the entry section is promoted, so that the execution of the lottery for the entry section is promoted. Then, since the ball output rate in the third high-frequency support mode exceeds 1, the number of game balls held by the player increases. The third control mode ends when the number of executions of the lottery for the ball entry section reaches a predetermined number of times (100 times) without the result of the lottery for the ball entry section becoming a predetermined result (various jackpots). Therefore, the player continues the third control mode until just before the number of times the lottery for the ball entry section reaches the specified number of times to increase the number of game balls on hand, but the third control mode ends. Before, the game is played with the expectation that the result of the lottery for the ball entry club will be a predetermined result (various jackpots). Then, even if the result of the lottery for the ball entry section does not reach a predetermined result (various jackpots) by the time the number of executions of the lottery for the ball entry section reaches the specified number of times (100 times), the player It is possible to obtain the satisfaction that the third control mode in which the number of game balls increases has continued for the longest period of time.

In this way, according to the feature V1, it is possible to create a new playability that gives the player a variety of expectations by effectively using the three control modes, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

[Feature V2]
The gaming machine described in Feature V1.
The lottery result display means for the ball entry section is provided with a variation time setting means for the ball entry section that sets the length of the variation time for the ball entry section, which is the time during which the identification information is variablely displayed.
The variable time setting means for the ball entry portion is
During the period when the third control mode is executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that a longer time is set as the variation time for the ball entry portion as the number of times of the lottery for the ball entry section executed after the third control mode is started increases.

According to the feature V2, as the number of executions of the lottery for the ball entry section approaches the specified number of times, the set variation time for the ball entry section becomes longer, so that the period during which the third control mode in which the number of game balls increases continues is Become longer. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of frustration that the result of the lottery for the ball entry section is not a predetermined result even though the number of executions of the lottery for the ball entry section is approaching the predetermined number of times.

[Feature V3]
The gaming machine according to feature V1 or feature V2.
The lottery result display means for the ball entry section is provided with a variation time setting means for the ball entry section that sets the length of the variation time for the ball entry section, which is the time during which the identification information is variablely displayed.
The lottery execution means for the ball entry section is
Even if it is determined that the result of the lottery for the ball entry section is not the predetermined result (various jackpots), if the predetermined condition (reach generation condition) is satisfied, the condition fulfillment result (disappearance result (reach)) is satisfied. Occurrence))), and if the above-mentioned predetermined condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the condition is not satisfied (out-of-reach result (reach non-occurrence)).
The variable time setting means for the ball entry portion is
During the period when the third control mode is executed,
The length of the variation time for the ball entry section corresponding to the lottery for the ball entry section, in which the result of the lottery for the ball entry section is the result of satisfying the condition (disappearance result (reach occurrence))
The result of the lottery for the ball entry section is the result of non-satisfaction of the condition (out-of-ball result (reach non-occurrence)).
A game machine characterized by being set for a long time.

According to the feature V3, when the result of the lottery for the entry part is the condition fulfillment result (out-of-condition result (reach occurrence)), the condition non-satisfaction result (out-of-reach result (reach non-occurrence)) is obtained. However, a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time for the ball entry section. The more times a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time for the ball entry section, the longer it takes for the number of executions of the lottery for the ball entry section to reach the specified number of times. As a result, since the period during which the third control mode continues is long, the period during which the number of game balls held by the player increases is also long. Therefore, it is possible to create a new game property in which the number of game balls increases as the number of times the result of the lottery for the ball entry section becomes the condition fulfillment result (out-of-ball result (reach occurrence)), so that the interest of the game can be improved. Can be planned.

[Feature V4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature V1 to the feature V3.
The control means
The transition start waiting time from when the display means starts the variable display until the ball entry unit starts the transition from the first state to the second state (in the eleventh embodiment, the normal drawing unit). By setting the fluctuation time of 38 + the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b) to a different length for each control mode.
The first control mode (first high frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) and
The second control mode (second high frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) and
The third control mode (third high frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) and
A game machine characterized by being able to execute.

According to the feature V4, by changing the transition start waiting time, the first control mode in which the ball ejection rate is less than 1, the second control mode in which the ball ejection rate is 1, and the ball ejection rate are 1. Since it is possible to execute a third control mode exceeding the above, it is possible to add intonation to the game and improve the interest of the game. Further, according to the feature V4, for example, even when the time for the ball entry portion to maintain the second state (the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) is set to the same length, the transition occurs. By changing the length of the start waiting time, the above-mentioned three control modes can be executed, so that the degree of freedom in designing the game machine can be improved.

[Feature V5]
Feature The game machine described in V4.
Alternate distribution means (alternate distribution mechanism 204 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) that alternately distributes the reached game ball to two paths.
A first path (path R1 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) configured so that the distributed game ball can pass through the passing portion, and
A second path (path R2 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) configured so that the distributed game ball cannot pass through the passing portion, and
With
The alternating distribution means
The one game ball that has arrived is distributed to the first path, and at the same time, it is distributed.
One game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the first path is distributed to the second path.
It is configured to distribute one game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the second path to the first path.
The first path and the second path are such that the distributed game ball can enter the ball entry section when the ball entry section is in the second state. It is composed and
In a situation where the game balls are continuously launched by the launching means at a predetermined firing intensity at a predetermined interval, the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion per predetermined time is set for each control mode. A gaming machine characterized in that it differs depending on the length of the transition start waiting time.

According to the feature V5, the first control mode in which the ball ejection rate is less than 1 and the second control mode in which the ball ejection rate is 1 are provided by a simple configuration using only one alternating distribution means. It is possible to execute a third control mode in which the ball ejection rate exceeds 1. That is, since the mechanism for executing the three control modes can be realized in a space-saving manner, the game area can be effectively utilized, such as arranging other accessories in the vacant game area.

[Feature V6]
The gaming machine according to feature V4 or feature V5.
The control means
The time from when the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed until the ball entry portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (opening / closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment). The length of the opening standby time) can be set to a different length for each of the control modes.

According to the feature V6, the transition start waiting time (variation time of the normal drawing unit 38 + opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) is from the time when the game ball passes through the passing portion until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means. Time (variation time of the normal drawing unit 38) and the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the entry portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (opening / closing door 208b). It is the total time of the opening waiting time). Therefore, according to the feature V6, when the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means (variable time of the normal drawing unit 38) is set to the same length. Even if there is, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the entry portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b) is a different length. By setting to, the transition start waiting time (variation time of the normal drawing unit 38 + opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) can be set to different lengths. That is, according to the feature V6, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the entry portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b). By changing, the transition start waiting time (variation time of the normal drawing unit 38 + opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) can be changed, and the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion can be changed. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to realize a first control mode in which the ball ejection rate is less than 1, a second control mode in which the ball ejection rate is 1, and a third control mode in which the ball ejection rate exceeds 1. It will be possible.

<Characteristic W group>
The feature W group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment.

[Feature W1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area, and
A ball entry portion (second starting port 208a in the eleventh embodiment) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter.
The state of the ball entry portion is the first state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter the ball entry portion, and the game ball can or easily enter the ball entry portion. A state transition means (opening / closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) for transitioning from the second state, which is a state, and
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion.
A lottery execution means for the entry section, which executes a lottery for the entry section based on the entry of a game ball into the entry section, and a lottery execution means for the entry section.
The variation display of the identification information is started based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry section, and the variation display is finished to obtain the result of the ball entry section lottery by the ball entry section lottery executing means. A lottery result display means (special figure unit 37) for the ball entry section that stops and displays the corresponding identification information, and
A special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (opening / closing execution mode) in which a privilege is given to the player based on the result of the lottery for the ball entry section being a predetermined result (various jackpots).
A starting means for starting a high-probability lottery mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the result of the lottery for the ball entry portion will be the predetermined result (various jackpots) is improved.
The ending means for ending the high-probability lottery mode and
A passing portion (through gate 206 in the eleventh embodiment) through which a game ball circulating in the game area can pass, and
A passage portion lottery execution means for executing a passage portion lottery based on the passage of the game ball through the passage portion, and a passage portion lottery execution means.
The variation display of the identification information is started based on the passage of the game ball through the passing portion, and the variation display is ended, and the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery for the passing portion by the lottery executing means for the passing portion. The lottery result display means for the passing part (general drawing unit 38) that stops and displays
By controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery for the passing portion by the lottery executing means for the passing portion, the control means for transitioning the ball entry portion from the first state to the second state. ,
With
The ratio of the number of paid game balls to the number of fired game balls in a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined interval with a predetermined firing intensity by the firing means is defined as the ball ejection rate. If you do
The control means
It has a plurality of types of control modes for controlling the state transition means.
The game ball non-increasing control mode (first high-frequency support mode, second high-frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) in which the ball output rate is 1 or less, and
The game ball increase control mode (third high frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) in which the ball output rate exceeds one, and
Is feasible and
In the game ball non-increase control mode, the result of the lottery for the ball entry portion is the first result (10R probability variation jackpot A and 10R probability variation jackpot B in the twelfth embodiment) among the predetermined results (various jackpots) (FIG. 98). )) Is started, and the number of times of the lottery for the ball entry section executed after the game ball non-increase control mode is started is determined by the result of the lottery for the ball entry section. It ends based on reaching the specified number of times (100 times) without getting the result (various big hits),
In the game ball increase control mode, the result of the lottery for the ball entry portion is the second result (10R probability variation jackpot C (FIG. 98) in the twelfth embodiment) among the predetermined results (various jackpots). If the number of times of the lottery for the ball entry section executed after the game ball increase control mode is started is the result of the lottery for the entry section is the predetermined result (various jackpots). It ends based on reaching the specified number of times (100 times) without
The high-probability lottery mode is based on the fact that the result of the lottery for the ball entry portion is the first result (10R probability variation jackpot A, 10R probability variation jackpot B) or the second result (10R probability variation jackpot C). The number of times the lottery for the ball entry section is executed after the high-probability lottery mode is started is the specified number of times without the result of the lottery for the ball entry section being the predetermined result (various jackpots). A gaming machine characterized in that it ends based on reaching (100 times).

According to the feature W1, when the result of the lottery for the entry part becomes the first result (10R probability variation jackpot A or 10R probability variation jackpot B), the high probability lottery mode is started and the game ball non-increase control mode (first). 1 High frequency support mode or 2nd high frequency support mode) is started. When the high-probability lottery mode is started, the probability that the result of the lottery for the entry section will be a predetermined result (various jackpots) is improved. Further, when the game ball non-increase control mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the entry section is promoted, so that the execution of the lottery for the entry section is promoted. However, since the ball output rate in the game ball non-increase control mode is 1 or less, the game ball on the player's hand does not increase. Then, in the high-probability lottery mode and the game ball non-increase control mode, the number of times the lottery for the entry part is executed is set to the specified number (100 times) without the result of the lottery for the entry part being a predetermined result (various jackpots). It ends when it reaches. Therefore, the player obtains a predetermined result (various jackpots) in the lottery for the ball entry section as soon as possible before the number of executions of the lottery for the ball entry section reaches the specified number and the high probability lottery mode ends. Play the game while expecting it to be played.

Further, according to the feature W1, when the result of the lottery for the entry part becomes the second result (10R probability variation jackpot C), the high probability lottery mode is started and the game ball increase control mode (third high frequency support). Mode) is started. When the high-probability lottery mode is started, the probability that the result of the lottery for the entry section will be a predetermined result (various jackpots) is improved. Further, when the game ball increase control mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the entry section is promoted, so that the execution of the lottery for the entry section is promoted. Further, since the ball output rate in the game ball increase control mode exceeds 1, the number of game balls held by the player increases. Then, in the high-probability lottery mode and the game ball increase control mode, the number of times the lottery for the entry part is executed reaches the specified number of times (100 times) without the result of the lottery for the entry part being a predetermined result (various big hits). Then it ends. Therefore, the player determines the number of times the lottery for the entry part is executed while increasing the number of game balls on hand by continuing the game ball increase control mode until just before the number of times the lottery for the entry part reaches the specified number. By the time the number of times is reached and the high-probability lottery mode and the game ball increase control mode are ended, the game is played while expecting that the result of the lottery for the ball entry section will be a predetermined result (various jackpots). Then, even if the result of the lottery for the ball entry section does not reach a predetermined result (various jackpots) by the time the number of executions of the lottery for the ball entry section reaches the specified number of times (100 times), the player It is possible to obtain the satisfaction that the game ball increase control mode in which the game balls increase has continued for the longest period of time.

As described above, according to the feature W1, it is possible to create a new game property that gives the player a variety of expectations during the period in which the high-probability lottery mode limited to the specified number of times is executed. It is possible to improve the interest.

[Feature W2]
Feature The game machine described in W1.
The lottery result display means for the ball entry section is provided with a variation time setting means for the ball entry section that sets the length of the variation time for the ball entry section, which is the time during which the identification information is variablely displayed.
The variable time setting means for the ball entry portion is
During the period in which the game ball increase control mode is executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that, as the number of times of the lottery for the ball entry portion executed after the game ball increase control mode is started, a longer time is set as the variation time for the ball entry portion.

According to the feature W2, as the number of executions of the lottery for the ball entry section approaches the specified number of times, the set variation time for the ball entry section becomes longer, so that the period during which the game ball increase control mode in which the number of game balls increases continues. Become longer. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of frustration that the result of the lottery for the ball entry section is not a predetermined result even though the number of executions of the lottery for the ball entry section is approaching the predetermined number of times.

[Feature W3]
The gaming machine according to feature W1 or feature W2.
The lottery result display means for the ball entry section is provided with a variation time setting means for the ball entry section that sets the length of the variation time for the ball entry section, which is the time during which the identification information is variablely displayed.
The lottery execution means for the ball entry section is
Even if it is determined that the result of the lottery for the ball entry section is not the predetermined result (various jackpots), if the predetermined condition (reach generation condition) is satisfied, the condition fulfillment result (disappearance result (reach)) is satisfied. Occurrence))), and if the above-mentioned predetermined condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the condition is not satisfied (out-of-reach result (reach non-occurrence)).
The variable time setting means for the ball entry portion is
During the period in which the game ball increase control mode is executed,
The length of the variation time for the ball entry section corresponding to the lottery for the ball entry section, in which the result of the lottery for the ball entry section is the result of satisfying the condition (disappearance result (reach occurrence))
The result of the lottery for the ball entry section is the result of non-satisfaction of the condition (out-of-ball result (reach non-occurrence)), rather than the length of the fluctuation time for the ball entry section corresponding to the lottery for the ball entry section.
A game machine characterized by being set for a long time.

According to the feature W3, when the result of the lottery for the entry part is the condition fulfillment result (out-of-reach result (reach occurrence)), the condition non-satisfaction result (out-of-reach result (reach non-occurrence)) is obtained. However, a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time for the ball entry section. The more times a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time for the ball entry section, the longer it takes for the number of executions of the lottery for the ball entry section to reach the specified number of times. As a result, the period during which the game ball increase control mode continues is long, so that the period during which the player's own game balls are increased is also long. Therefore, it is possible to create a new game property in which the number of game balls increases as the number of times the result of the lottery for the ball entry section becomes the condition fulfillment result (out-of-ball result (reach occurrence)), so that the interest of the game can be improved. Can be planned.

[Feature W4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features W1 to W3.
The control means
The transition start waiting time from when the display means starts the variable display until the ball entry unit starts the transition from the first state to the second state (in the eleventh embodiment, the normal drawing unit). By setting the fluctuation time of 38 + the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b) to a different length for each control mode.
The game ball non-increasing control mode (first high-frequency support mode, second high-frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) and
The game ball increase control mode (third high frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) and
A game machine characterized by being able to execute.

According to the feature W4, by changing the transition start waiting time, it is possible to execute the game ball non-increase control mode in which the ball output rate is 1 or less and the game ball increase control mode in which the ball output rate exceeds 1. Therefore, it is possible to add intonation to the game and improve the interest of the game. Further, according to the feature W4, for example, even when the time for the ball entry portion to maintain the second state (the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b in the twelfth embodiment) is set to the same length, the transition occurs. By changing the length of the start waiting time, the above-mentioned two control modes can be executed, so that the degree of freedom in designing the game machine can be improved.

[Feature W5]
Features The gaming machine described in W4.
Alternate distribution means (alternate distribution mechanism 204 (FIG. 70)) that alternately distributes the reached game balls to two paths,
A first path (path R1 (FIG. 70)) configured so that the distributed game ball can pass through the passing portion, and
A second path (path R2 (FIG. 70)) configured so that the distributed game ball cannot pass through the passing portion, and
With
The alternating distribution means
The one game ball that has arrived is distributed to the first path, and at the same time, it is distributed.
One game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the first path is distributed to the second path.
It is configured to distribute one game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the second path to the first path.
The first path and the second path are such that the distributed game ball can enter the ball entry section when the ball entry section is in the second state. It is composed and
In a situation where the game balls are continuously launched by the launching means at a predetermined firing intensity at a predetermined interval, the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion per predetermined time is set for each control mode. A gaming machine characterized in that it differs depending on the length of the transition start waiting time.

According to the feature W5, a game ball non-increase control mode in which the ball ejection rate is 1 or less and a game ball increase control mode in which the ball ejection rate exceeds 1 are provided by a simple configuration using only one alternating distribution means. Can be executed. That is, since the mechanism for executing the two control modes can be realized in a space-saving manner, the game area can be effectively utilized, such as arranging other accessories in the vacant game area.

[Feature W6]
The gaming machine according to the feature W4 or the feature W5.
The control means
The time from when the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed until the ball entry portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (opening / closing door 208b in the twelfth embodiment). The length of the opening standby time) can be set to a different length for each of the control modes.

According to the feature W6, the transition start waiting time (variation time of the normal drawing unit 38 + opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) is from the time when the game ball passes through the passing portion until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means. Time (variation time of the normal drawing unit 38) and the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the entry portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (opening / closing door 208b). It is the total time of the opening waiting time). Therefore, according to the feature W5, when the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means (variable time of the normal drawing unit 38) is set to the same length. Even if there is, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the entry portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b) is a different length. By setting to, the transition start waiting time (variation time of the normal drawing unit 38 + opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) can be set to different lengths. That is, according to the feature W5, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the entry portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b). By changing, the transition start waiting time (variation time of the normal drawing unit 38 + opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) can be changed, and the number of game balls entering the entry portion can be changed. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to realize a game ball non-increase control mode in which the ball output rate is 1 or less and a game ball increase control mode in which the ball output rate exceeds 1.

[Feature W7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features W1 to W6.
The control means
As a game ball non-increasing mode (first high-frequency support mode, second high-frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) in which the ball output rate is 1 or less.
The game ball reduction control mode (first high frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) in which the ball ejection rate is less than one, and
The game ball maintenance control mode (second high frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) in which the ball ejection rate is 1 and
A game machine characterized by being able to execute.

According to the feature W7, when the game ball reduction control mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the entry section is promoted, so that the execution of the lottery for the entry section is promoted. However, since the ball output rate in the game ball reduction control mode is less than 1, the number of game balls held by the player decreases. Therefore, in order to minimize the decrease in the number of game balls on hand, the player plays the game with the expectation that a predetermined result (various jackpots) will be obtained in the lottery for the ball entry section as soon as possible. As described above, according to the feature W7, various expectations can be given to the player, so that the interest of the game ball can be improved.

<Feature X group>
The feature X group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment.

[Feature X1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area, and
A ball entry portion (second starting port 208a in the eleventh embodiment) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter.
The state of the ball entry portion is the first state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter the ball entry portion, and the game ball can or easily enter the ball entry portion. A state transition means (opening / closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) for transitioning from the second state, which is a state, and
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion.
An acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry portion,
A lottery execution means for a ball entry section that executes a lottery for the entry section based on the acquired special information, and
The variation display of the identification information is started based on the execution of the lottery for the entry section, and the variation display is ended, and the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery for the entry section by the lottery execution means for the entry section is completed. The lottery result display means (special figure unit 37) for the ball entry section that stops and displays
A variable time setting means for the ball entry section that sets the length of the variable time for the ball entry section (the variation time of the special figure unit 37), which is the time for displaying the identification information in a variable manner in the lottery result display means for the ball entry section.
A passing portion (through gate 206 in the eleventh embodiment) through which a game ball circulating in the game area can pass, and
A passage portion lottery execution means for executing a passage portion lottery based on the passage of the game ball through the passage portion, and a passage portion lottery execution means.
The variation display of the identification information is started based on the passage of the game ball through the passing portion, and the variation display is ended, and the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery for the passing portion by the lottery executing means for the passing portion. The lottery result display means for the passing part (general drawing unit 38) that stops and displays
After setting the length of the fluctuation time for the passage portion (variation time of the normal drawing unit 38), which is the time for displaying the identification information in a variable manner in the lottery result display means for the passage portion, and after the fluctuation time for the passage portion has elapsed. , The control means for transitioning the ball entry portion from the first state to the second state by controlling the state transition means based on the result of the passing portion lottery by the passing portion lottery executing means. When,
The variation time table for the entry section in which the length of the variation time for the entry section is stored corresponding to the number of times the lottery for the entry section is executed (table A for the special figure unit in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 102)). ) And the passage portion fluctuation time table in which the length of the passage portion fluctuation time is stored corresponding to the number of executions of the ball entry portion lottery (table A for the normal drawing unit in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 102). )), And a table storage means for storing as a set of table groups (variable time table set A (FIG. 102) for high frequency support mode in the thirteenth embodiment).
With
The ratio of the number of paid game balls to the number of fired game balls in a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined interval with a predetermined firing intensity by the firing means is defined as the ball ejection rate. If you do
The control means
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of control modes for controlling the state transition means.
By setting the length of the fluctuation time for the passing portion to a different length for each of the control modes,
The first control mode in which the ball ejection rate is less than 1 (the mode shown in FIG. 99 of the high frequency support mode in the thirteenth embodiment) and
A second control mode in which the ball ejection rate is 1 (a mode shown in FIG. 100 of the high frequency support mode in the thirteenth embodiment) and
A third control mode in which the ball ejection rate exceeds 1 (a mode shown in FIG. 101 of the high frequency support mode in the thirteenth embodiment) and
At least two of these control modes are feasible and
When the ball-entry portion fluctuation time setting means sets the length of the ball-entry portion fluctuation time with reference to the ball-entry portion fluctuation time table,
A gaming machine characterized in that the length of the fluctuation time for the passage portion is set with reference to the fluctuation time table for the ball entry portion and the fluctuation time table for the passage portion stored as a set of tables.

According to the feature X1, the first control in which the ball ejection rate is less than 1 by setting the length of the fluctuation time for the passing portion (the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38) to a different length for each control mode. Since at least two control modes can be executed, that is, a second control mode in which the ball ejection rate is 1, and a third control embodiment in which the ball ejection rate exceeds 1. It is possible to improve the interest.

Further, according to the feature X1, the length of the fluctuation time for the passing portion and the length of the fluctuation time for the entry portion are set based on the number of executions of the lottery (game times) for the entry portion. Then, the ball ejection rate changes depending on the length of the set variable time for the passing portion. That is, the proportion of the game ball entering the ball entry portion changes. Therefore, if the length of the variation time for the entry section, which is suitable for the ratio of the game ball to the entry section, is stored in the variable time table for the entry section in advance, the lottery for the entry section (game times). It is possible to set a variation time for ball entry suitable for the ball entry rate of the game ball to the ball entry portion that changes based on the number of times of execution.

[Feature X2]
The gaming machine described in feature X1.
A holding storage means for holding and storing the special information acquired between the start of the variable display of the identification information by the lottery result display means for the ball entry section and the end of the stop display up to a specified number is provided.
In the variable time table for the ball entry portion (table A for the special figure unit (FIG. 102) in the thirteenth embodiment), when the length of the variable time for the passing portion is set, the ball enters the ball entry section. A game machine characterized in that a fluctuation time longer than the interval between game balls to be played is stored.

According to the feature X2, since the special information can always be stored in the hold storage means, it is possible to realize a state in which the lottery for the entry portion is continuously executed without interruption.

[Feature X3]
The gaming machine according to feature X1 or feature X2.
The table storage means stores a plurality of the table groups (variable time table sets A and B (FIG. 102) in the thirteenth embodiment).
The control means is a gaming machine characterized in that when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when a small hit is won), the table group to be referred to is switched.

According to the feature X3, since the table group to be referred to is switched, the fluctuation time for the entry portion, the fluctuation time for the passage portion, and the exit rate set based on the number of executions of the lottery for the entry portion can be changed. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature X4]
The gaming machine according to any one of feature X1 to feature X3.
Alternate distribution means (alternate distribution mechanism 204 (FIG. 70)) that alternately distributes the reached game balls to two paths,
A first path (path R1 (FIG. 70)) configured so that the distributed game ball can pass through the passing portion, and
A second path (path R2 (FIG. 70)) configured so that the distributed game ball cannot pass through the passing portion, and
With
The alternating distribution means
The one game ball that has arrived is distributed to the first path, and at the same time, it is distributed.
One game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the first path is distributed to the second path.
It is configured to distribute one game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the second path to the first path.
The first path and the second path are such that the distributed game ball can enter the ball entry section when the ball entry section is in the second state. It is composed and
In a situation where the game balls are continuously launched by the launching means at a predetermined firing intensity at a predetermined interval, the number of game balls entering the entry portion per predetermined time is the variation time for the passing portion. A game machine characterized by the fact that it depends on the length of the game.

According to the feature X4, the first control mode in which the ball ejection rate is less than 1 and the second control embodiment in which the ball ejection rate is 1 are provided by a simple configuration using only one alternating distribution means. A third control mode in which the ball ejection rate exceeds 1 can be executed. That is, since the mechanism for executing the three control modes can be realized in a space-saving manner, the game area can be effectively utilized, such as arranging other accessories in the vacant game area.

The inventions of the feature A group to the feature X group solve the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure and direction for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

Here, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, further improvement of technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player, and a starting ball that is provided in the game area and allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter. A unit, an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the ball entering the starting ball, and an information acquisition means.
A gaming machine including an acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means when a game ball enters the starting ball entry portion.

Rotating game machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be realized with various configurations within a range not deviating from the gist thereof. For example, the embodiments corresponding to the technical features in each of the embodiments described in the column of the outline of the invention, the technical features in the modified examples are used to solve some or all of the above-mentioned problems, or the above-mentioned above. It is possible to replace or combine them as appropriate to achieve some or all of the effects. Further, if the technical feature is not described as essential in the present specification, it can be deleted as appropriate.

10 ... Pachinko machine 11 ... Outer frame 12 ... Pachinko machine body 13 ... Inner frame 14 ... Front door frame 15 ... Hinge 16 ... Hinge 17 ... Cylinder lock 18. .. Window 19 ... Glass unit 20 ... Upper plate 21 ... Lower plate 22 ... Discharge port 23 ... Lever 24 ... Direction operation button 25 ... Operation handle 30 ... Game board 31 ... Induction rail 31a ... Inner rail part 31b ... Outer rail part 32 ... General winning opening 33 ... 1st starting port 34 ... 2nd starting port 34a ... Electric Accessory 34b ... Electric accessory drive unit 35 ... Through gate 36 ... Variable winning device 36a ... Large winning opening 36b ... Opening and closing door 36c ... Variable winning drive unit 37 ... Special Figure unit 37a ... 1st result display section 37b ... 2nd result display section 37c ... 1st hold display section 37d ... 2nd hold display section 38 ... Normal drawing unit 39 ... Round Display unit 40 ... Variable display unit 41 ... Design display device 41a ... Display surface 41aL ... Display area 41aS ... Display area 42 ... Nail 43 ... Out port 45 ... Main Display 46 ... Speaker 47 ... Various lamps 51 ... 1st control unit 52 ... 2nd control unit 53 ... 3rd control unit 54 ... Tank 55 ... Tank rail 56. .. Case rail 60 ... Main controller 61 ... Main control board 62 ... Main MPU
63 ... Main ROM
63a ... Win / fail table storage area 63b ... Sorting table storage area 63c ... Reach judgment table storage area 63d ... Display duration table storage area 63e ... Stop result table storage area 63f ... Command information storage area 64 ... Main RAM
64a ... Lottery counter buffer 64b ... Hold ball storage area 64b ... Hold information storage area 64c ... Electric service hold area 64d ... Various counter areas 64e ... Various flag storage areas 67a .. Various detection sensors 70 ... Payout control device 71 ... Payout device 80 ... Launch control device 81 ... Game ball launch mechanism 85 ... Power supply device 86 ... Power failure monitoring circuit 90 ... Voice Light emission control device 91 ... Sound light emission control board 92 ... Sound light side MPU
93 ... Sound light side ROM
93a ... Table storage area for hold confirmation 93b ... Table storage area for déjà vu notice occurrence table 93c ... Notice production table storage area for déjà vu notice 93d ... Stop symbol table storage area for déjà vu notice 93e ... Variable display pattern table storage area 94 ... Sound / light side RAM
94a ... Various flag storage areas 94b ... Various counter areas 94c ... Lottery counter area 94d ... Notice effect storage area for déjà vu notice 100 ... Display control device 101 ... Display control board 102 ... Display side MPU
103 ... Program ROM
104 ... Work RAM
105 ... VDP
106 ... Character ROM
107 ... Video RAM
200 ... 2nd start port unit 202 ... Opening 204 ... Alternating distribution mechanism 204a ... Central piece 204b ... Left side piece 204c ... Right side piece 204d ... Rotating shaft 204e ... Left side holding part 204f ... Right side holding part 206 ... Through gate 208 ... Opening and closing ball entry device 208a ... Second starting port 208b ... Opening and closing door 208c ... Taxiway 300. .. 2nd start port unit 300B ... 2nd start port unit 300C ... 2nd start port unit 300D ... 2nd start port unit 300E ... 2nd start port unit 300F ... 2nd start Mouth unit 302 ... Opening 304 ... Alternating distribution mechanism (first alternating distribution mechanism)
304a ... Central piece 304b ... Left side piece 304c ... Right side piece 304d ... Rotation axis 304e ... Left side holding part 304f ... Right side holding part 305 ... Second alternating distribution Mechanism 305A ... Third alternating distribution mechanism 305a ... Central piece 305b ... Left side piece 305c ... Right side piece 305d ... Rotating shaft 305e ... Left side holding part 305f ... Right side Holding part 306 ... Through gate 308 ... Opening and closing ball entry device 308a ... Second starting port 308b ... Opening and closing door 308c ... Guide path

Claims (2)

A launching means for launching a game ball,
The entry part where the launched game ball can enter, and
An execution means for executing a ball entry assist mode for assisting the entry of a game ball into the ball entry portion, and
A payout means for paying out the game ball as a prize ball based on the ball entering the ball entry section.
It is a game machine equipped with
The ratio of the number of paid game balls to the number of fired game balls in a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined interval with a predetermined firing intensity by the firing means is defined as the ball ejection rate. If you do
The execution means
It is possible to execute n types of ball entry assist modes (n is an integer of 2 or more) having different ball exit rates.
As one of the n types of ball entry assist modes, at least a game ball decrease mode in which the ball output rate is less than 1 and a game ball increase mode in which the ball output rate exceeds 1 can be executed. ,
The ball exit rate when the i-th (i is an integer from 1 to n) entry assist mode is executed is defined as Mi.
When the ratio of the i-th ball entry assist mode to the execution of the ball entry assist mode is defined as Pi, the ball entry assist mode is executed.
The following relational expression (R1)

A gaming machine characterized by being configured to meet the requirements. The gaming machine according to claim 1.
The executing means is a gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of types of gaming ball increasing modes having different ball ejection rates.

Images